ACLEIA

DRAFT ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
ASSESSMENT REPORT
of
EXPANSION OF CLINKERIZATION UNIT AT RAURI
AND KASHLOG LIMESTONE MINES
Tehsil ARKI, Dist SOLAN (HIMACHAL PRADESH)
AMBUJA CEMENT LIMITED
Prepared By
EMTRC Consultants Private Limited
(Accredited by NABET-QCI & NABL - ISO17025)
B-16, Plot 10-A, East Arjun Nagar, Delhi-32
Email: moitra@emtrc.com website www.emtrc.com
JULY 2012
EMTRC CONSULTANTS PVT LTD.
DELHI
CERTIFICATE
This Draft EIA Report has been prepared for the Expansion of Rauri Cement Plant and
Kashlog Limestone Mines of Ambuja Cements Limited near Darlaghat in tehsil Arki,
district Solan (Himachal Pradesh) for Public Hearing. The Terms of Reference for this
EIA was approved by the Ministry of Environment & Forests, GOI vide Letter No. F.No.J-
11011/986/2008-IA;II (I) dated 12 March, 2009.
Technical data related to the process, plant design, layout was provided by Ambuja
Cements Limited. Information related to land, water, fuel, Mining Plan, compliance with
existing EC, existing pollution data of plant and CSR activities is provided by ACL.
Baseline data on ambient air, noise, water and soil quality, flora-fauna and socio-
economics has been generated by Scientists of EMTRC as well as collated from
authentic documents. Additional data related to Biological Environment, Hydrogeology,
GIS and Traffic Survey provided by ACL has been also included in the EIA. Impact
Assessment was done using scientific tools and methods prescribed in EIA Manual as
well as by applying analytical reasoning and professional judgment of the subject
experts. The EIA Report fully complies with all the points mentioned in the TOR
approved by MOEF. The data submitted in this EIA Report, as generated by EMTRC, is
true and factually correct.
DR. J.K.MOITRA
MANAGING DIRECTOR
Issue Record:
EMTRC Consultants Ambuja Cement
Private Limited Limited
Ref. Date Remarks
Checked and
EIA Coordinator
Approved by
Draft Report for
68 5/8/2009
Dr. J. K. Moitra Mr. A. Solankey Public Hearing
Rev-7 14/07/2012
ii
AMBUJA CEMENT LIMITED
DARLAGHAT
UNDERTAKING
(As per OM No. J.11013/41/200/IA-II (I) dated 5. 10.2011Ministry
of Environment & Forests, Govt. of India)
This Draft EIA Report has been prepared by EMTRC Consultants Private Limited, Delhi
for the proposed Expansion of Clinkerization Unit at Rauri and Kashlog limestone mines
at Kashlog for public hearing .The terms of Reference for preparation of EIA was issued
by the Ministry of Environment & Forests ,GOI vide letter No. J-110-11/986/2008-IA-II (I)
dated 12.3.2009.
Information and Data on the Project Technical Details, Land, Water, Fuel, Raw Materials,
Pollution Mitigation Measures, Stack Details, Project Cost and Schedule, Manpower,
Project Layout and Location Maps used in this EIA report has been given by Ambuja
Cements Ltd, Darlaghat. EMTRC has generated the baseline environment data for this
project. The draft EIA report, as prepared by EMTRC is approved by AMBUJA CEMENTS
LTD, DARLAGHAT for submission to HPSPCB for Public Hearing. The EIA Report fully
complies with all the points mentioned in the TOR prescribed by MoEF. EMTRC
conducted the impact assessment and prepared EMP based on information supplied by
Ambuja Cements Ltd, Darlaghat.
The data submitted in this EIA Report is true and factually correct. We hereby submit this
undertaking on the 3rd day of July 2012 as per OM dated 05.10.2011 that the contents
and information submitted in this EIA report is owned by Ambuja Cements Ltd, Darlaghat.
iii
iv
v
vi
vii
viii
CONTENTS
Section TITLE PAGE
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose of the Report 1

1.2 Identification of Project and Project Proponent 2
1.3 Nature and Size & Location of the Project 3
1.4 Importance of the Project to Country & Region 7
1.5 Compliance with CREP Recommendations 8
1.6 Scope of EIA study 9
CHAPTER 2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2.1 Project Profile 13

2.2 Type of Project 13
2.2.1 Mining 13
2.2.2 Clinkerization Unit 14
2.3 Need of Project 14
2.4 Lay out Maps 15
2.5 Size and Magnitude of Operation 15
2.6 Schedule for Approval & Implementation 19
2.7 Mining Process 19
2.7.1 Background Information 19
2.7.2 Mining Plan 20
2.7.3 Mining Methodology 22
2.7.4 Mining Plan Details 23
2.7.4.1 Western (Kashlog) Block 23
2.7.4.2 Eastern (Mangu) Block 28
2.7.5 Drilling & Blasting 35
2.7.6 Transportation of Limestone and Shale 40
2.7.7 Mining Equipment 40
2.7.8 Water for Limestone Mime Expansion 43
2.7.9 Power Supply 44
2.7.10 Employment 44
2.7.11 Infrastructure 44
2.8 Description of Mitigation Measures - Mining 45
2.8.1 Movement of HEMM on Haul Road 45
2.8.2 Drilling of Holes for Blasting 45
2.8.3 Blasting 47
2.8.4 Crushing 48
2.8.5 Overland Belt Conveyor (OLBC) 48
2.8.6 Noise 48
ix
2.8.7 Solid Waste / Hazardous Waste 49
2.8.8 Waste Water 49
2.8.9 Safe Mine Practices 49
2.9 Clinkerisation Process 53
2.9.1 Water for Cement Plant 59
2.9.2 Power Requirement 59
2.9.3 Automation & Instrumentation 59
2.9.4 Instrumentation & Control 60
2.9.5 Civil Structures 60
2.9.6 Manpower 61
2.9.7 Pollution Mitigation Measures 61
2.9.7.1 Fugitive Dust Emission Control 62
CHAPTER 3 DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT
3.1 Study Area, Period and Methodology 64

3.2 Geology and Hydrogeology 65
3.3 Meteorology 72
3.3.1 Meteorological Observations 72
3.4 Ambient Air Quality 75
3.4.1 Observation on AAQ 80
3.5 Ambient Noise Quality 82
3.5.1 Observation on Ambient Noise Quality 83
3.6 Surface & Ground Water Quality 84
3.6.2 Observation on Water Quality of Study Area 91
3.7 Soil Quality 91
3.7.1 Observation on Soil Quality 93
3.8 Ecology 93
3.8.1 Flora 93
3.8.2 Flora of the Mining Site 96
3.8.3 Fauna 100
3.8.4 Wild Life Sanctuary 102
3.9 Land Use Pattern 105
3.10 Socio-economic Features 109
CHAPTER 4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION

MEASURES
4.1 Identification of Impact 112

4.2 Impact Assessment 112
4.2.1 Construction Stage Impact 112
4.3 Operational Stage Impact 113
4.3.1 Impact on Landform 113
4.3.2 Impact on Natural Resources 116
4.3.3 Impact on Climate 117
4.3.4 Impact on Ambient Air 117
4.3.5 Impact on Ambient Noise 128
x
4.3.6 Impact Due to Blasting, Vibrations and Flyrock 133
4.3.7 Impact on Drainage and Water Bodies 136
4.3.7.1 Protection and Conservation of Water Bodies 140
4.3.8 Impact of Solid Waste Disposal 143
4.3.9 Impact on Soil Quality 144
4.3.10 Impact on Ecology 145
4.3.11 Impact on Occupational Health 146
4.3.12 Impact Due to Accident 147
4.3.13 Impact on Public Health and Safety 148
4.3.14 Impact on Traffic Movement 149
4.3.15 Social Impacts 153
4.3.16 Impact of Change of Land use 154
4.4 Assessment of Significance of Impact 154
CHAPTER 5 ADDITIONAL STUDIES
5.1 Risk Analysis 156

5.1.1 Emergency Response Plan 159
5.1.2 Risk Mitigation Measures 166
5.2 Wild life Conservation Plan 168
5.3 Reclamation & Rehabilitation Plan 170
5.3.1 Proposal for Next Five Year Scheme Period 171
5.3.2 Stabilization of Mine Slopes 173
5.3.3 Check Dams & Retaining Walls 173
5.3.4 Plantation 173
5.3.5 Rehabilitation of Displaced Persons 174
CHAPTER 6 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN
6.1 Monitoring Plan 175

6.1.1 Stack and Fugitive Emission Monitoring 177
6.1.2 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring 177
6.1.3 Meteorological Monitoring 178
6.1.4 Equipments & Ambient Noise 178
6.1.5 Water & Waste Water Monitoring 179
6.1.6 Solid & Hazardous Waste Monitoring 180
6.1.7 Flora & Fauna Monitoring 180
6.1.8 Workers Health & Safety Monitoring 180
6.1.9 Community Health Monitoring 181
6.1.10 Monitoring of DMP 181
6.1.11 Monitoring of CSR Activities 181
6.2 Action During Abnormal Operational Conditions 182
6.3 Budget for Environmental Monitoring 182
6.4 Reporting 182
CHAPTER 7 PROJECT BENEFIT 183-184
xi
CHAPTER 8 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
8.1 EMP During Construction Stage 185

8.1.1 Management of Labour Camp 186
8.1.2 EMP for Air Pollution During Construction Phase 186
8.1.3 EMP for Water Pollution During Construction Phase 188
8.1.4 EMP for Noise Pollution During Construction Phase 188
8.1.5 EMP for Solid Waste During Construction Phase 189
8.1.6 Reclamation and Closure Plan 189
8.2 EMP for Air Pollution Control 190
8.2.1 Fugitive Emission Control during Mining Operation 190
8.2.2 Fugitive Emission Control from Cement Plant 191
8.2.3 Air pollution Control from Cement Plant 193
8.2.4 EMP for Water Pollution During Operational Stage 194
8.2.5 EMP for Noise Pollution During Operational Stage 197
8.2.6 EMP for Controlling Vibration 199
8.2.7 EMP for Solid Waste Utilization and Disposal 201
8.3 Slop Stability Investigations by IBM 201
8.4 Soil Conservation and Slope Stabilization 202
8.5 Green Belt Development Plan 206
8.6 Occupational Health & Safety Plan 218
8.7 Green House Gas Emission Reduction 221
8.8 Socio-economic Development Plan 223
8.9 Environment Management System 234
8.9.1 Structure of Environment Management Department 235
8.9.2 Budget for Environmental Management 237
8.10 Resource Conservation Plan 237
241-252
CHAPTER 9 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION
CHAPTER 10 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS ENGAGED 253
xii
LIST OF APPENDIX
Appendix 1: Point-wise Compliance to TOR Conditions Issued by MOEF
LIST OF ANNEXURES
Annexure-1: Single Window Clearance from State Government (dated 21-5-2012) page 267-269
Annexure-2: NOC from Principal Chief Conservator of Forests (dated 24-1-2012) page-270
Annexure-3 Letter from MOEF Regarding Renewal of Mining Lease (dt27-9-2011) page 271
Annexure-4: Letter from State Govt Regarding Renewal of Mining Lease (dt 7-6-2012) page 272-275
Annexure-5: Letter from GWB and NOC from Gram Panchayat for Taking Groundwater page 276-277
Annexure-6: Extract from Hydrogeology Report of Plant and Mine Site page 278-281
Annexure-7: Biological Environment Report of Study Area page 282-328
Annexure-8: Extract from Traffic and Air Pollution Surveys on Road Network Report page 329-341
Annexure-9: Pollution Testing Report of Existing Cement Plant and Mines page 342-358
LIST OF TABLES
Table No. Name of the Table Page No.

Table 1.1 Name of Forest within 10 km Radius of Study Area 6
Table 2.1 Conceptual Plan for Limestone & Shale Production (in Million tones) 21
Table 2.2 Proposed Year-wise Development Plan (Western Block) 28
Table 2.3 Proposed Year-wise Development Plan (Eastern Block) 29
Table 2.4 Planned Production for Next Five Years 30
Table 2.5 Coordinates of Proposed Working – Eastern Block 35
Table 2.6 List of Mining Equipment 42
Table 2.7 List of Miscellaneous Mining Equipments 42
Table 2.8 List of Proposed Additional Mining Equipments (Expansion) 43
Table 2.9 List of Proposed Additional Miscellaneous Equipments - Expansion 43
Table 3.1 Component, Study Area, Period and Methodology of EIA 54
Table 3.2 AAQ Monitoring Location 76
Table 3.3 AAQ Monitoring Results (Winter Season 2008-09) 76
Table 3.4 AAQ Monitoring Results (Summer Season 2011) 77
Table 3.5 Chemical Characterization of RSPM (Winter Season 2008-09) 80
xiii
Table 3.6 Chemical Characterization of RSPM (Summer Season 2011) 80
Table 3.7 Ambient Noise Quality Results(Winter Season 2008-09) 82
Table 3.8 Ambient Noise Quality Results(Summer Season 2011) 83
Table 3.9 Water Sampling Locations 84
Table 3.10 Analysis Results of Surface Water (Winter Season 2008-09) 85
Table 3.11 Analysis Results of Surface Water (Summer Season 2011) 86
Table 3.12 Analysis Results of Ground Water (Winter Season 2008-09) 87
Table 3.13 Analysis Results of Ground Water (Summer Season 2011) 89
Table 3.14 Soil Sampling Locations 91
Table 3.15 Soil Analysis Results (Winter Season 2008-09) 92
Table 3.16 Soil Analysis Results (Summer Season 2011) 92
Table 3.17 List of Flora In Kunihar Forest Division 94
Table 3.18 Phytosociological Studies near Chandi Village 96
Table 3.19 Phytosociological Studies near Giyana Village 97
Table 3.20 Phytosociological Studies near Banli Village 98
Table 3.21 Phytosociological Studies near Mangu Village 98
Table 3.22 Phytosociological Studies near Dhar Village 99
Table 3.23 List of Fauna In Kunihar Forest Division 101
Table 3.24 List of Flora found inPiplughat Wild Life Sanctuary 103
Table 3.25 List of Fauna found in Piplughat Wild Life Sanctuary 103
Table 3.26 List of Flora In Majhathal Wild Life Sanctuary 104
Table 3.27 List of Fauna In Majhathal Wild Life Sanctuary 105
Table 3.28 Land use Pattern of Study Area 105
Table 3.29 Area under Principal Crops (in ha) 109
Table 3.30 Production of Principle Crops (in tons) 109
Table 3.31 Population Figures in Arki Tehsil and Solan District 110
Table 3.32 Rural & Urban Population Arki Tehsil and Solan District 110
Table 3.33 SC & ST Population Arki Tehsil and Solan District 110
Table 3.34 Occupational Pattern of the Workforce 111
Table 3.35 Classification of Main Workers 111
xiv
Table 4.1 Cement Plant Stack Emission Inventory 120
Table 4.2 Emission Inventory of Lime Stone Mine 121
Table 4.3 Impact of Air Emission due to Mining Activity 124
Table 4.4 Impact of Air Emission due to Clinkerization Activity 124
Table 4.5 Monitored Noise Level of Mining Machinery 129
Table 4.6 Monitored Noise Level of Cement Plant 133
Table 4.7 Top Soil Utilization During Last Five Years 145
Table 4.8 Results of Traffic Modeling (1-hr avg values in µg/m3) 151
Table 5.1 Details of Proposed Reclamation Area During Next 5 Years 171
Table 6.1 Man Power for Environmental Monitoring 176
Table 6.2 Instruments for Environmental Monitoring 176
Table 8.1 Soil Additives and Their Properties 208
Table 8.2 Nutrient Contents of Some Organic Manure 208
Table 8.3 Location – wise Plantation Status in Mines 210
Table 8.4 Proposed Year wise Plantation for Next 5 Years 213
Table 8.5 Status of Plantation in Existing Cement Plant 215
Table 8.6 Mining use Area and Rehabilitated Area in First 5 years 216
Table 8.7 Mining use Area and Rehabilitated Area in Next 5 years 216
Table 8.8 Mining use Area and Rehabilitated Area in Next 5 years 217
Table 8.9 Recommended Medical Examination for Employees 219
Table 8.10 CSR Budget 233
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure No. Name of the Figure Page
No.
Figure 1.1 Location of Plant Site and Mines 10
Figure 1.2 Map showing the cement plant, limestone mines, Majhathal and 11
Piplughat Sanctuary along with the distance
Figure 1.3 Google Map Showing Features Around 10 Km Area of Mines andPlant 12
Figure 2.1 Layout Map (Clinkerization Plant) 16
Figure 2.2 Surface Layout (Mine Area) 17
Figure 2.3 Land use Map of Mining Lease Area 18
xv
Figure 2.4 Landuse Plan (Pre-Operational) 24
Figure 2.5 Landuse Plan( Operational) 25
Figure 2.6 Mining Plan : Post-Operational 26
Figure 2.7 Hydraulic Rock Breaker 39
Figure 2.8 Working of Backhoe and Dumper 41
Figure 2.9 Drilling Machine 46
Figure 2.10 Hole for Blasting 46
Figure 2.11 Rock Breaker 50
Figure 2.12 Backhoe for Excavation 50
Figure 2.13 Benches of Mining Area 51
Figure 2.14 Process Flow Chart for Clinker Manufacturing 58
Figure 3.1 Hydro-geological Map of Soaln District 69
Figure 3.2 Wind Rose Diagram of Site (Winter 2008-09) 73
Figure 3.3 Wind Rose Diagram of Site (Summer 2011) 74
Figure 3.4 Map Showing AAQ Monitoring Locations 81
Figure 3.5 Satellite Imagery of 10 km area around Plant Site 107
Figure 3.6 Satellite Imagery 10 km area around Mine Site 108
Figure 4.1 Isopleths Showing GLC of PM within the Mines Boundary 125
Figure 4.2 Isopleths Showing GLC of PM Along the Mines Boundary 125
Figure 4.3 Isopleths Showing GLC of PM Outside the Mines Boundary 126
Figure 4.4 Isopleths Showing GLC of PM around Clinker Unit (5 km) 126
Figure 4.5 Isopleths Showing GLC of PM around Clinker Unit (2.5 km) 127
Figure 4.6 Isopleths Showing GLC of SO2 around Clinker Unit (5 km) 127
Figure 4.7 Isopleths Showing GLC of NOx around Clinker Unit (5 km) 127
Figure 4.8 Air Quality Contours of Incremental GLC 128
Figure 4.9 Predicted Noise Level Contours from DG Set 131
Figure 4.10 Predicted Noise Level Contours from Crusher 131
Figure 4.11 Predicted Noise Level Contours from Blasting Site 132
Figure 4.12 Predicted Noise level Contours From Clinker Plant 132
Figure 8.1 Water Flow & Balance of Proposed Mines Expansion 195
Figure 8.2 Water Flow & Balance of 2.6 MTPA Clinker Plant 196
xvi
EIA of Expansion of Cement Plant at Rauri
and Limestone Mines at Kashlog
Tehsil Arki, District Solan, HP
Ambuja Cement Limited
CHAPTER 1 : INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose of Report
Ambuja Cement Ltd. (ACL) contributes about 10 percent of total cement production of
India. ACL’s existing plant in Himachal Pradesh is located at Suli, tehsil Arki in district
Solan. The clinkerization capacity of Suli plant is 2.6 Million Tons Per Annum (MTPA).
ACL has obtained the environmental clearance for 5.5 MTPA limestone mining at
Kashlog, Patti and Mangu villages, located in the Arki tehsil. ACL has also obtained
environment clearance for installation of another clinkerization plant of 1.8 MTPA
capacity adjacent to Suli plant at village Rauri. This plant is under operation.
Considering the increasing demand of the cement in the Himachal Pradesh and other
northern states, availability of cement grade limestone and viability of similar unit size,
ACL decided to expand the 1.8 MTPA clinkerization plant at Rauri to 2.6 MTPA. The
limestone and shale mining capacity shall be enhanced from 5.5 MTPA to 7.6 MTPA, so
as to cater to the demand of both Suli and Rauri plant.
Renewal of Kashlog limestone mine lease of ACL was due on 27-05-2012. ACL has
applied to State Government for renewal of lease vide letter dated 24-01-2011. Geology
Wing of Department of Industries, Govt. of Himachal Pradesh vide letter No. Udyog-Bhu
(Khani-4) Major-289/2011-2089 dated 07-06-2012 approved the renewal of mining lease
for extraction of limestone and shale for captive use in existing cement plants for a
period of 20 years.
Amendment dated 4th April 2011 in EIA Notification 2006 stipulates prior environmental
clearance at the time of mine lease renewal. MoEF vide letter No. Z-11013/26/2011 (M)
dated 27th September 2011 informed that since ACL has already obtained the ToR from
MoEF vide their letter no. J-11011.986/2008-IA-(I) dated March 12, 2009 for preparation
of EIA report of expansion of Rauri Cement Plant and Kashlog Limestone Mines (5.5
MTPA to 7.6 MTPA), no fresh application for ToR is required for renewal of mine lease,
however appraisal of mining component will be done by EAC (Mines).
1
The draft EIA Report has been prepared in line with the TORs issued by MoEF vide their
letter no. J-11011.986/2008-IA-(I) dated March 12, 2009 for preparation of EIA report.
The EIA Report complies with the TORs prescribed by MOEF. Any comments,
shortcomings, etc obtained / noted during the Public Hearing shall be included in the
Final EIA Report.
1.2 Identification of Project and Project Proponent
Project: The project under EIA study comprises the following:
1. Clinkerisation capacity enhancement from 1.8 MTPA to 2.6 MTPA of Rauri plant
.(increase by 0.8 MTPA).
2. Limestone and shale mining capacity enhancement from 5.5 MTPA to 7.6 MTPA
at Kashlog Mines (increase by 2.1 MTPA; out of which 1.84 MTPA is limestone
and 0.26 MTPA is shale).
The limestone deposits were investigated by ACL with the help of the Geological
Department of Government of Himachal Pradesh. Availability of limestone of cement
grade quality in adequate quantity, economical viability of mining of limestone and its
processing has been the major factors for identification of the location of cement plant.
The production of the limestone shall be done in the existing mining lease area, whose
mining plan has been approved by the Indian Bureau of Mines. No additional land will be
acquired for the mines and cement plant expansion.
Considerations of site selection for cement plant are as follows:

• The proposed site is based on Kashlog deposit of limestone located at an aerial
distance of about 2.8 km from Rauri.
• The overland belt conveyor from Kashlog mines to plant site exists.
• Sufficient non-forest land is available for the clinker plant and its associated facilities
• There is sparse agriculture land around the site
• There are no irrigation facilities in the area.
• There is no wildlife in the identified mining lease area and plant area.
Project Proponent: Ambuja Cement Limited is a leading manufacturer of various types

of cement in India. Ambuja Cement has an excellent track record with respect to
2
productivity, energy conservation, quality control, environmental management and

pollution control. Environment Management Division (EMD) has been established at all
the ACL plants. EMD consists of experts in the field of Environmental Engineering,
Environmental Science, Environment Management, Wastewater Treatment and
Horticulture. EMD involves implementation of all necessary measures to protect
environment and monitor various environmental parameters in and around the units.
ACL is the first cement plant in the country to have been conferred Quality System
Certificate License as per IS 9002 by Bureau of Indian Standards in recognition of its
Quality Standards.
It ranks amongst one of the most efficient cement plants in India and comparable with
the best plants in the world. It has clinker manufacturing facilities in Gujarat, Himachal
Pradesh, Chattisgarh, Rajasthan and Maharashtra. Besides, the company has split
clinker-grinding units at Ropar and Bhatinda in Punjab, Surat in Gujarat, Sankrail and
Farakka in West Bengal and Roorkee in Uttarakhand. ACL’s total manufacturing
capacity is 20.0 million tones per annum, which amounts to be around 10% of the total
production share and to meet out the market demand, the company has taken up steps
to enhance the total capacity to more than 25 million tones per annum in next two to
three years. Installation of this cement plant is one more mile stone in this direction.
1.3 Nature, Size and Location
The project activities (Clinkerization and Limestone Mining) falls under Category ‘A’ of
EIA Notification dated 14-9-2006. ACL has obtained environmental clearance from
MOEF for clinkerisation capacity of 1.8 MTPA in the year 2006 for its plant at Rauri.
Since identical plants are easy to maintain and operate, ACL decided to expand the
Rauri plant to 2.6 MTPA.
The mining of limestone and shale will be 7.6 million tones, as per the demand for the
two units (Suli and Rauri, 2 x 2.6 – 5.2 MTPA clinkerisation capacity). Kashlog
Limestone Mine will meet out the requirements.
3
Location - Mining
The Mining Lease area comprises total area of about 488.06 ha falling in Kashlog,
Chakru, Serwala, Banjan, Pati, Banli, Banog, Rathoh, Mangu, Chola, Ghamaru, Serjeri,
Gyana, Rauri, Sangoi villages of Tehsil Arki in Solan District of Himachal Pradesh.
Geographically, the area falls between Latitudes 31o13’50.5” to 31o15’28” North and
Longitude 76 o55’38.5” to 77o9.5” East with elevations in the range of 1280 to 1740 m
above Mean Sea Level (MSL). National Highway, NH-88 connecting Shimla to Bilaspur
passes about 4 km south of the mine. The aerial distance between plant and the mine is
2.8 km while the road distance is 19 km. The nearest railway station is Shimla which has
a narrow gauge rail line from Kalka. Shimla is 45 km road distance from Darlaghat.
Kashlog is 109 km from Kiratpur Sahib Railway Station via Swarghat, Nauni, Darlaghat
and Kararaghat off National Highway 88 and from there partly metalled and partly
unmetalled road links Kashlog over a distance of 10 km. This road is motorable
throughout the year. The mining lease area includes mining area, site office and canteen
for the employees. No additional land is required for the proposed capacity expansion of
the mine.
Location – Cement Plant
The project site is located by the co-ordinates latitude 31o14’ – 31o16’ North and
longitude 76o57’ – 76o59’ East at an elevation of 1505 - 1565 m above Mean Sea Level
(MSL). The project site is located at village Rauri about 500 m from Suli village (existing
cement plant) and it can be approached from Darlaghat by road, which is well connected
by good road network to Bilaspur, Ropar, Shimla, Kalka and Chandigarh. The plant site
is well connected with communication facilities like telephone, fax, wireless, telex and
internet. No additional land is required for expansion of the Rauri plant. The existing land
of 23.35 ha will be sufficient. The salient features of the project and site are given below:
Salient Features Location

1 Elevation of hill ranges (highest) 1740 m in SE direction
2 Nearest National Highway NH-88 connecting Shimla-Bilaspur at 4.0 km
4
by road.
3 Nearest Railhead Shimla at 48 km (by road) and 22 km (aerial)
4 Nearest Airport Jubber Hatti (Shimla) located at about 45 km
(by road) from site
5 Nearest Tourist Place Shimla at 48 km (by road) and 22 km (aerial)
6 Archeological important places None within 10 km radius
7 Wild Life Sanctuaries within 10 Majathal sanctuary
km area of mines and plant site 2.7 km north east of Rauri plant & 1 km north
of Kashlog limestone mine
Piplughat sanctuary
4.0 km south of Rauri plant & 5 km southwest
of Kashlog limestone mines. .
8 Reserved/Protected Forest within 24 Protected forest blocks within 10 km
10 km radius radius
9 Industries in 10 km radius ACL Cement Plant at Suli
10 Nearest major city with 2,00,000 Shimla at about 48 km (by road)
population
11 Nearest Town Arki at about 16 km (by road)
12 Villages within 1 km radius Ghamaru, Ghyana, Chola, Pati, Chakru and
surrounding the mining project Sangoi, Kashlog, Mangu
13 Nearest River Sutlej river at 6.0 km (aerial distance) NE of
mine
14 Nearest Lake Govindsagar Lake at 22.5 km in NNW (aerial)
15 Source of water for existing Pazeena (pagoda) Khud a tributary of River
plants and limestone mine Sutlej located at about 5.5 km (aerial).
16 Source of water for expansion Recycled water supplemented with
plant and mines groundwater
17 Surrounding terrain Hilly terrain
18 Major Crops Maize and wheat
1. The key map showing location of the plant site and mines is shown in Figure 1.1.
2. Map showing the cement plant, limestone mines, Majhathal and Piplughat
Sanctuary along with the distance is shown in Figure 1.2.
3. Google Map showing the features around 10 km area of cement plant and mines
is shown in Figure 1.3.
The lower sub-Himalayan area around Kashlog, is basically hilly, the cultivated area is
negligible, only few farms on the flanks of the hills have been created by terracing. Most
of the high rising hills surrounding Kashlog limestone ridge bear the Chil plantations. The
intervening valleys are habited. Most of the streams flowing through the valley are
seasonal.
5
The origin is young and the hill ranges are severely affected by denudational agencies
like snow in the northeastern parts and by rivers and streams in the rest of the area.
Differential erosion in different rock formations can be noticed in ranges with irregular
indefinite pattern. The ranges are divided by “V” or fan shaped valleys. The drainage of
the area shows dendritic to sub-dendritic patterns. They are generally dry during dry
seasons and water flows in the rainy season on the upper slopes, whereas in the lower
portion, they change into perennial streams.
Sutlej is the major river in the area, which flows in the north direction at about 5.5 km
from the mine site. The area is intersected by various nallahs and other small tributaries
of the Sutlej river. Pazeena khud collects the drainage of the area with a dendritic
pattern of feeder branches. Most of the streams are dry during the non-monsoon period.
Part of the study area is covered with protected forest blocks. The name of forests is
given in Table 1.1. The mining lease area is covered by a thin layer of soil with patches
of stony outcrops. Main crop of the study area is maize. However, people also grow
mustard, wheat for their own use. The soil is of sandy loam variety.
Table 1.1 Name of Protected Forests within 10 km Study Area

Sr. Name of the Direction wrt plant Distance wrt Plant Area(Ha)
No. Protected Forest site site
1 Majathal NE 5.1 1491
2 Harshing ENE 6.5 768.00
3 Skor NNE 7.7 34.80
4 Troht NNE 8.75 74.40
5 Banaula N 6.2 270.40
6 Seri SSE 9.7 48.00
7 Gharakhru SE 6.5 69.60
8 Ser gharkhru SE 5.0 330.40
9 Barall SE 4.5 146.0
10 Manlog Bhagal W 1.1 182.80
11 Darana SE 7.5 25.00
12 Paniharu SSW 8.4 58.60
13 Bari SW 6.3 66.00
14 Bani SW 8.25 41.00
15 Koil SW 6.75 40.00
16 Bahadurpur SW 5.25 45.00
17 Shilru SW 5.6 16.80
18 Shalnu SSW 4.4 47.82
19 Siarli E 8.5 21.52
6
20 Samtiari NNW 9.4 36.20

21 Matrech NNW 6.6 25.60
22 Malen WSW 9.6 44.40
23 Sharma SE 7.7 19.20
24 Baraghat SW 8.8 182.00
(Source: Forest Working Plan and Toposheet)
1.4 Importance of the Project to Country & Region
In India, limestone of cement grade quality is not evenly scattered, but occurs in large
clustered deposits mainly in six states namely Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka, Madhya
Pradesh, Chhattisgarh, Gujarat, Rajasthan and Meghalaya. The result has been that
cement plants have been located in these states, despite markets not being in proximity,
or favorably placed, in relation to location of the plant. Total decontrol on price and
distribution of cement was introduced by the Government in March 1989, and all
subsidies relating to freight equalization were withdrawn. Consequently the cost incurred
on cement transportation has now become an important factor for deciding on the
location of the cement plant.
North Zone is a deficit zone and deficiency in the states of north zone (i.e. Punjab,
Haryana, Chandigarh, Delhi, Himachal Pradesh) is met by supply from Rajasthan. A
large quantity of cement is being fed into these deficit states, and considerable
expenditure being incurred on freight. Around 4 MTPA cement gets transported to deficit
area of north zone from surplus states.
The demand for northern states like Punjab, Jammu Kashmir, Chandigarh, Haryana,
Himachal Pradesh, and Delhi will be met from the proposed plant in Himachal Pradesh.
Due to this, there will be reduction in transportation and as a result there will be
significant reduction in pollution. Thereby the installation of cement plant in the Rauri
village of Himachal Pradesh would be in the interest of the nation as well as for the
states of North Zone. It would also increase the prospects of direct and indirect job
opportunities for the residents of nearby villages and Himachal Pradesh. The project will
improve the quality of life of people living in and around Darlaghat and Kashlog as well
of the entire state of Himachal Pradesh.
7
1.5 Compliance with CREP Recommendations
CREP RECOMMENDATION COMPLIANCE
1 Cement Plants, which are not complying* with notified The proposed clinker unit is
standards, shall do the following to meet the meeting the emission limit of 50
standards: • Augmentation of existing Air Pollution mg/Nm3 from all sources.
Control Devices — by July 2003
• Replacement of existing Air Pollution Control
Devices — by July 2004
2 Cement Plants located in critically polluted or urban The proposed clinker unit is
areas (including 5 km distance outside urban meeting the emission limit of 50
boundary) will meet 100 mg/Nm3 limit of particulate mg/Nm3 from all sources.
matter by December 2004 and continue working to
reduce the emission of particulate matter to 50
mg/Nm3.
3 The new cement kilns to be accorded NOC / The proposed clinker unit is
Environmental Clearance w.e.f. 01.04.2003 will meet meeting the emission limit of 50
the limit of 50 mg/Nm3 for particulate matter mg/Nm3 from all sources.
emissions.
4 CPCB will evolve load based standards by December ACL will comply with the proposed
2003. load based standards
5 CPCB and NCBM will evolve SO2 and NOx emission ACL will comply with the proposed
standards by June 2004. standards
6 The Cement industries will control fugitive emissions ACL has provided elaborate
from all the raw material and products storage and fugitive dust emission control
transfer points by December 2003. However, the systems in its plant. Details are
feasibility for the control of fugitive emissions from described in chapter 2 and 7 of
limestone and coal storage areas will be decided by the EIA Report
the National Task Force (NTF). The NTF shall submit
its recommendations within three months.
7 CPCB, NCBM, BIS and Oil refineries will jointly ACL will comply with the proposed
prepare the policy on use of petroleum coke as fuel in policy
cement kiln by July 2003.
8 After performance evaluation of various types of ACL proposed continuous

continuous monitoring equipment and feed back from monitoring system in major stacks.
the industries and equipment manufacturers, NTF will Details are given in EIA report,
decide feasible unit operations/sections for installation Chapter 6.
of continuous monitoring equipment. The industry will
install the continuous monitoring systems (CMS) by
December 2003.
8
9 Trippings in kiln ESP to be minimized by July 2003 as ACL will comply

per the recommendation of NTF.
10 Industries will submit the target date to enhance the ACL has designed its Kiln to use /
utilization of waste material by April 2003. fire hazardous wastes having
adequate calorific value along with
coal. Two type of burners has
been considered for fuel injection
into the kiln
11 NCBM will carry out a study on hazardous waste As above

utilization in cement kiln by December 2003.
12 Cement industries will carry out feasibility study and ACL is exploring the feasibility of
submit target dates to CPCB for co-generation of co- generating power from its
power by July 2003. plant
1.6 Scope of EIA Study
The environmental impact assessment study has been carried out as per the Terms of
Reference (TOR) communicated by Ministry of Environment & Forests vide letter dated
12-03-2009. Copy of TOR letter and point-wise compliance with the TOR conditions is
provided in Appendix 1.
9
N
Ta
Kalewar Sirali
ng
Damras Kanswala
ru
Kh
Mation kalan
Changar ad Samara
Banli
Kiarty
Biog Chandi
Dhooru Jablu Kashlog Dhar
RAURI Kotla PATI
Auhar Rotaha
Kalata Phagwand Panalog
KASHLOG Pati
Bodag
SULI
Belt Conveyor
Juh Gamaru
Chakau Rauri Banjani
Bil
Naniwala
asp
Sarsnun Chola
Manlog
ur
Gyanu MANGU Sangal

Bhagal PF Dabotan
Dehti Dhor
88
Dori
NH- Darla Majer MATIAN KALAN
Mangu Malaun
Chalyan
Kotla Saguad Nal
Sulaa
Shimla
Badog Hanuman
Badog Sameli BARIAL P.F
Karara
Palani Ghati Suken
Satoti Bombira Kun
Koti Patharagal Seri
SCALE:
Karajyara - Plant Area
Koti Sharla
0 300 600 900 1200 1500
Ladi - Mining Lease Area
Figure 1.1 Locations of Plant Site and Mine
10
Figure 1.2 Map showing the cement plant, limestone mines, Majhathal and Piplughat Sanctuary along with the distance
11
Fig. 1.3 Google Map Showing Features Around 10 Km Area of Mines and Plant
12
CHAPTER 2 - PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2.1 Project Profile
Limestone Mining: Ambuja Cement Limited has obtained Environmental Clearance

from Ministry of Environment and Forest for extraction of 5.5 MTPA limestone and shale.
The requirement of limestone and shale for 5.2 MTPA clinker production (2.6 MTPA at
Suli and 2.6 MTPA at Rauri) is 7.6 MTPA. Exploration results of Kashlog mines have
estimated the total mining reserves of 224.5 MT of limestone and 24.94 MT of shale for
about 32 years in the 488.06 hectares mining lease area. The additional 2.1 MTPA
limestone and shale (1.84 MTPA limestone and 0.26 MTPA shale) would be extracted
from the existing mining lease area.
Clinkerization Unit: The clinkerization plant at Rauri is oprating for production of 1.8
MTPA clinker, which would be increased to 2.6 MTPA. The plant of 2.6 MTPA is found
to be techno-economically feasible. Similar size units are also easy to operate and
maintain. Therefore, ACL decided to enhance the clinkerisation capacity from approved
1.8 MTPA to 2.6 MTPA. The expansion will be done within the land area of 23.35 ha.
2.2 Type of Project
2.2.1 Mining
The maximum and minimum elevations of the mining lease area are 1740 m and 1240 m
above Mean Sea Level. The existing ML area is 488.06 ha. The expansion is related to
additional mining capacity within this 488.06 ML area. 121.49 ha land is agriculture land,
226.95 ha is wasteland and balance 139.62 ha is forest-land. Forest clearance for
139.62 ha has been obtained. Thickness of limestone varies from 20 to 100 m in the
deposit area. Block wise mineable reserves are as follows; Western Block upto 1250
MSL, Central Block upto 1350 MSL and Eastern Block upto 1340 MSL. The mine is
being operated by open cast bench slicing method. Excavations are being carried out by
gradual slicing off from the top of mineralized hill.
13
2.2.2 Clinkerization Unit
In order to ascertain the economic viability and type of plant, the qualitative assessment
of the limestone (surface samples and samples collected from the geological
exploration) were carried. The weighted average analysis of the various areas yielded
the following results, and this is representative of the quality of limestone.
Serial No. Constituents Kashlog Mines (%)

1 SiO2 7.73 – 10.23
2 Al2O3 1.32 – 2.06
3 Fe2O3 0.78 – 0.88
4 CaO 46.56 - 48.79
5 MgO 0.52 – 0.97
The CaO content in the range of 46 to 51 % is suitable for dry process. A suitable raw
mix design can be obtained by blending limestone, shale and iron ore / oxides
approximately in the following proportions:
1. Limestone - 96.8%
2. Shale - 1.0%
3. Iron Ore/Oxides - 1.6%
4. Red Ochre - 0.6%
The ratio of raw mix to clinker production shall be 1.48:1. The quality of limestone
available is suitable for manufacturing clinker, by dry process, using a suspension Pre-
heater and a Pre-calciner. Coal is added as fuel for calcimation.
2.3 Need of Project
Statistics of the data collected with respect to the production of the cement for the last 10
years reveals that there is sharp increase in production because of development of
various infrastructure facilities including demand of houses, road network,
industrialization etc. The cement production in India for the 2005 was 136.67 MT against
the consumption of 131.06 MT. This was an increase of 8.46% cement consumption
over the previous year. The cement production in the financial year 2007-08 was 168.31
MT which has increased to 181.35 MT in the year 2008-2009 against the installed
capacity of over 200 MT. Further, the installed capacity is likely to be around 241 MT by
14
the financial year 2010-11. Even though the rapid increase of the production of the
cement, still the northern zone is cement deficient and the shortage of cement
production is met by the other zones. About 4 MTPA of cement needs to be transported
to deficit area of north zone from surplus states. The proposed plant has enough market
within the distance 300 kms in view of the growing demand in Himachal Pradesh,
Punjab, Haryana and Delhi. The plant shall ease the requirement of the supply of the
cement apart from the easement of traffic congestion due to movement of trucks from
the longer distances as well as significant reduction in air pollution. Therefore it is at
most necessary to install the cement plant at Rauri village near the limestone deposits.
2.4 Layout Maps
The layout map of the clinker project is shown in Figure 2.1. The surface layout map of
mines is shown in Figure 2.2. Land use of mining lease area is given in Figure 2.3.
2.5 Size & Magnitude of Operation
Mining: Expansion of limestone and shale mining from the existing 5.5 MTPA to 7.6
MTPA for its two cement plants at Suli and Rauri in the existing mining lease area i.e.
488.06 ha. The survey has revealed that the total minerable reserves of 224.5 MT of
limestone and 24.94 MT of shale for about 32 years. Expected cost of the project is Rs.
89.50 Crores. About 110 people will be employed during operation of the mines.
Clinkerization Unit: Civil construction of clinker unit at Rauri is under progress covering
land area of 23.35 ha. No additional land will be acquired for the proposed expansion.
Expected cost of the project is Rs.976 Crores. About 344 people will be employed during
operation of project at the plant.
15
Figure 2.1 Layout Map (Clinkerization Unit)
16
Figure 2.2 Surface Layout (Mine Area)
17
Figure 2.3 Land use Map of Mining Lease Area
18
2.6 Schedule for Approval & Implementation
MOEF has already approved the TOR for EIA vide letter dated 12.03.09 and the draft
EIA is hereby placed for Public Consultation. After public hearing final EIA report will be
prepared by incorporating and considering the views and comments expressed during
the hearing.
The total implementation period for the project is about 12 months. The mines
development will be planned and executed independent of the cement plant so that by
the time the plant is ready for commissioning the required quantity of limestone and
shale would be available to the plant.
2.7 Mining Process
2.7.1 Background Information
The Mining Plan of Kashlog limestone mine was approved by Indian Bureau of Mines,
Dehradun (U.P) vide their letter no.614(2)/76-ddn dated 12.04.93. “Modifications in
Mining Plan” were approved vide letter no 614(2)/MP-A-2/96-MCCM (N) DDN dated
5.3.98. First Scheme of Mining for the period 1 April 1999 to 31 March 2004 was
approved vide letter no. 614(2)/MS-A-69/99-DDN dated 14-10-1999. The second
Scheme of Mining for the period 1 April 2004 to 31 March 2009 was approved vide letter
no. 614(2)/MSA-139/2003-DDN dated 21-06-2004. The third Scheme of Mining for the
period 1 April 2009 to 31 March 2014 was approved vide letter no. 614(2)/MPA-
182/2009-DD dated 20-04-2009.
The Kashlog Limestone Mine mainly comprises three blocks viz. Western (Kashlog),
Eastern (Mangu) and Central (Pati). The Western Block is characterized by limestone in
the hanging wall side and shale occurs in the foot wall area besides volcanic trap rock.
Shale also occurs in the northern sub-block of Western Block as separate band along
with some minor limestone intercalations besides some shale occurs in the central
portion of the Western Block as minor bands. The Eastern Block comprises mainly 4
19
limestone bands separated by shale formation. The bands have been numbered from
hanging wall towards foot wall side.
The topography is rugged and the elevations in the area vary between 1250 to 1739
MRLs, the highest point being situated in the Eastern Block. The hillocks are barren or
comprise euphorbia plants at majority of places. Some of the patches are characterized
by Chill plantation. The intervening lower horizons are inhabited in the form of small
villages or hamlets at some locations. The hillocks are characterized by seasonal nallahs
which receive some flow during rainy period and are dry during rest of the time. The
valley portions outside the lease area have a few springs which emerge in the weak
planes. Overall, the area is characterized by dendritic to sub-dendritic drainage pattern.
The indicated reserves of cement grade limestone in existing ML area are over 224.5
million tonnes. The limestone is black to blueish grey and hard, with a medium to fine
crystalline matrix. The appearance is thickly bedded to platy. Occasionally, few
centimeter thick intercalations of shale are sometimes encountered. The thickness of
limestone varies from 20 m to 100 m in the deposit area.
2.7.2 Mining Plan
The limestone of the lease area is hard and is characterized by fine grained matrix.
Limestone comprises fine to coarse grained calcite veins. Shale occurs between
limestone bands in the area besides forming foot wall in Western and Eastern Blocks.
The strata are traversed by numerous joints and fractures. Detailed exploration has been
carried out in all the Blocks and it is in progress in the Eastern Block. The deposit has
been adequately explored and further exploration is in progress to prepare a block model
for the deposit. It is anticipated that exploration shall be completed during next five years
period by 2014.
The mineral production from Eastern Block would commence from third year of
proposed scheme of mining. During first and second years, developmental activities
20
would be continued. About 4.5 km long haul road would be constructed and two
benches would be opened up.
As on 01-4-2009, Western Block is having residual mineable reserves of 76.57 million

tonnes while the Eastern and Central Blocks have mineable reserves of 95.95 and 48.74
million tonnes respectively. Hence, as per current estimates, a total of 221.26 million
tonnes of mineable reserves of limestone are available in the lease. As per the present
expansion plan of the company, the available reserves would last for next 32 years of
company's requirement subject to renewal of existing lease conditions. Lease is due for
renewal in the year 2012.
Table 2.1: Conceptual Plan of Limestone & Shale Production* (In Million Tonnes)
Western Block Eastern Block Central Block Total
Year Lime Lime Lime
Bench MRL Shale Bench MRL Shale Bench MRL
stone stone stone Tonnage
2009-14 1480-1270 24.04 2.67 1730-1650 7.92 0.88 - - 35.51
2014-19 1410-1260 17.1 1.9 1650-1590 17.1 1.9 - - 38
2019-24 1380-1250 17.1 1.9 1590-1540 17.1 1.9 - - 38
2024-29 1350-1250 17.1 1.9 1540-1490 17.1 1.9 - - 38
2029-34 1260-1250 1.23 .1 1490-1440 17.1 3.7 1560-1440 15.87 38
2034-39 1440-1370 17.1 3.8 1440-1390 17.1 38
2039-41 1370-1340 2.53 2.01 1390-1350 15.77 20.31
76.57 8.47 95.95 16.09 48.74 245.82
*Based On Likely Mineable Reserves (as per Mine Plan, beginning 2009)
Hence a total of 221.26 million tonnes of limestone and 24.56 million tonnes of shale
would be raised by the end of the deposit life (Year: 2040-41).
As stated earlier, the mine is being worked by adopting conventional open cast mining
by drilling and blasting. The ultimate pit of Western, Eastern and Central Blocks would
extend to coordinates W100-E800 / N500-S1100, E1500-E3300 / S1000-S2200 and E1000-
E1900 / N400-S100 respectively and will be mined up to 1250 MRL, 1340 MRL and 1350
MRL respectively. The dimensions of ultimate pit of Western, Eastern and Central
Blocks would be approximately 1450m X 550m, 1200m X 1500m and 850m X 450m
respectively. This is as per present envisaged plan and may change with time as the
mining progresses. The bench height will not be more than 10 m and benches would be
21
regularly dressed to prevent overhangs or undercuts. The slope stability investigations

for the mine were carried out by Indian Bureau of Mines, Nagpur and as per the
suggestions, ultimate bench slope would be 450. Further studies are being conducted by
CMRI, Dhanbad. Haul roads will not have gradient more than 1 in 16.
The Western Block has been fully developed and the regular planned production from
this Block shall be @ 3.8 MTPA of limestone and shale except during four years of
proposed scheme when enhanced levels shall be mined from this block. Details of the
mining plan of western block for the next five year (2009-2014) are shown in Figure 2.15
to 2.29 attached at the end of this chapter. Similarly, the Eastern Block will be fully
developed during fifth year (2013-14) of Scheme of Mining period and the planned
production is @ 3.8 MTPA of limestone and shale. Details of the mining plan of Eastern
block for the next five year (2009-2014) is given in Appendix 3. This comprises 3.42
MTPA of limestone and 0.38 MTPA of shale from an individual Block. Hence, the
Kashlog Limestone Mine has been designed to produce a total of 6.84 MTPA of
limestone and 0.76 MTPA of shale from two blocks. The above raw materials will be
used for cement production at existing and proposed (Suli/Rauri) Darlaghat units having
capacities of 2.6 MTPA each.
2.7.3 Mining Methodology
The limestone of the lease area is hard and is characterized by fine to occasionally
medium grains material. The strata are traversed by numerous joints and fractures. Due
to the differential erosion limestone horizon stands out prominently while the shale
occurs in the topographic depressions. The shale formation is also occurring between
limestone bands in the ML area. The mine is being operated by opencast bench slicing
method. Excavations are being carried out by gradual slicing off from the top of
mineralized hill. The operations comprise pre production development stage and the
production stage. During the pre production stage haul roads are laid and the faces are
developed and made ready for raising limestone. Western Block which was earlier
divided in three sub-blocks is today being worked in two sub-blocks since central and
22
southern sub-blocks have been merged. ACL has an approved Mining Scheme by IBM
and the salient features are as given below:
Working Benches:
Height:10 Metres
Width: Minimum 25 meters or 3 times of the width of working equipment when bench is
in operation and 10 Meters at the time of finalization.
Slope: 700 - 900
Primary Blast Holes: Size - 150 mm, Depth -11.0 m, Angle-900
ANFO based slurry explosive will be used along with other accessories. About 2500
kg/day Ammonium Nitrate & Bulk emulsion shall be used.
2.7.4 Mining Plan Details
The mining would be undertaken by the open cast mining method in the Western and
Eastern Blocks during next five years period. Details of proposed mine development in
the two Blocks are discussed below.
The predevelopment plan, development plan and post development plan is shown in
Figures 2.4, 2.5 and 2.6.
2.7.4.1 Western (Kashlog) Block
Haul road and bench development work would be undertaken between section line S100
and N 400 in the northern sub-block and S1000 and S100 in the southern sub-block.
The part of existing road to Kashlog village passing through the northern sub-block
would also be shifted. Apart from this some minor changes would be made to haul
roads passing through both the sub-blocks and benches 1320 to 1270 MRL would be
opened up. The lower benches up to 1270 MRL would be connected with the new road
which has been built up to Crusher.
23
Figure 2.4 Pre Operational Landuse Plan
24
Figure 2.5 Operational Landuse Plan

25
Figure 2.6 Post Operational Landuse Plan

26
Further, a road will also be made to connect office area to 1320 MRL which will serve
the purpose of approach road once the existing road from office to 1400 MRL comes
under mining. All the roads are designed based on geo-technical parameters, shape of
the ore body and size of the equipment plying in the mines. Approach roads to the
working faces have been planned with an aim to minimize traffic congestion and the
number of spots that slow down the traffic flow. The main haul road and arterial roads
approaching the faces would continue to be 8 - 10 m wide. In general, the width of the
haul roads would always be kept more than three times the width of the largest machine
plying in the mines and nowhere the width would be less than the height of the bench. In
general, the roads would be prepared maintaining a gradient not steeper than 1 in 16
except for ramps, where a maximum of 1 in 10 gradients would be observed. All corners
and bends in roads would be made in such a way that the operators and drivers of
vehicles have clear view for a distance of not less than 30 meters along the road. Any
road existing above the level of the surrounding area would be provided with strong
parapet walls made of stones or concrete structures depending on the location and
suitability. It would be around 1 meter wide and not less than 1 meter in height to prevent
any vehicle from getting off the road. Road signs would continue to be placed at
strategic locations to provide guidance to drivers. Adequate drainage would be provided
towards hill side along the roads to prevent accumulation of water and erosion from
runoff water. Roads would be given 10 slopes towards drainage to avoid accumulation of
water.
Presently, all the mined material is supplied to plant while in future there is likelihood of
formation of some sub-grade dumps characterized by shale and sub-grade limestone.
Part of such material will be used for construction of haul roads in the mine. Dumps
would be made from top down by end tipping method in the areas which are stable and
provide a stable foundation. Provision of garland drains all around the dump base would
be made. A retaining rock wall, not less than 1 meter wide and about 1.5 to 2 meter in
height, all along the toe of the dump would be constructed to arrest the washed fines
and rolling boulders. The top of dump as well as slope surface would be vegetated by
hydro-seeding technique or use of pre-seeded geo-textile mats, if so required for
stability. This would prevent erosion as well as dust generation. The individual dump
27
terrace slope will be around 35o equal to angle of repose of the material while the overall
ultimate slope of dumps will not exceed 28o.
Top soil, wherever encountered will be temporarily stacked in separate stock for
plantation. The year wise details of proposed development are given in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2: Details of Proposed Yearwise Development Works-Western Block

Year Location Development Details
I(2009-10) S10o -N30o / E80o-E100o Preparation of road to Kashlog village
I(2009-10) S80o -S60o / W30o -W10o Preparation of haul roads up to 1300 MRL in Southern
portion and alteration of existing haul roads within the
working area, construction of retaining and parapet
walls.
II(2010-11) S80o -S70o / W10o -0o Preparation of ramp /haul road to 1290 mrl bench and
alteration of existing haul roads within the working area,
construction of retaining and parapet walls.
III(2011-12) S95o -S0o / W10o-E80o Face development at 1280 mrl bench and preparation
of ramp /haul road to 1290 mrl bench and preparation
of approach road from office to 1320 mrl bench,
construction of retaining and parapet walls.
IV(2012-13) S95o -N30o / W10o -E80o Preparation / alteration of ramp / haul road to 1270 mrl
bench and alteration of existing haul roads within the
working area, construction of retaining and parapet
walls .
V(2013-14) 0o -N30o / E20o -E85o Face development at 1410 mrl bench and construction
of 2 check dams / filters and alteration of existing haul
roads within the working area, construction of retaining
and parapet walls.
2.7.4.2 Eastern (Mangu) Block
New crusher will be installed in the footwall area of the Eastern Block in the region
E1470/S1220. Further a new overland belt conveyor (OLBC) shall be installed by 2011
from proposed new crusher to existing crusher in the Western Block and from Western
Block to the Suli/Rauri site. A new road of about 4.5 kms length would be constructed
from existing Karara-Kashlog road to top of the hill via proposed crusher near Chola
village. The 2 kms long road from top of the hill to proposed crusher would serve the
purpose of the haul road. This road would have connectivity of feeding roads from 1730
to 1690 MRL benches during the initial development period of first two years. Further,
1730 MRL bench would be chopped off and face would be developed at 1720. About
28
50000 tonnes of limestone obtained during developmental works would be kept at two
stocks/dumps over 1720 and 1710 MRLs. Developmental work would also be
undertaken over 1700 MRL bench in the eastern direction and it would be kept ready for
exploitation. Further, faces from 1720 to 1690 MRL benches would be ready by the end
of second year of development. Drains would be prepared towards hill side along haul
road to avoid accumulation of water. Roads would be given 10 slope towards drainage to
avoid accumulation of water. Benches would be given 10 slope away from the faces
towards road drainage. Further, check dams and check filters would be constructed over
seasonal nallahs on the virgin slopes. A separate area west of proposed limestone
workings (E18-E20 / S12-S15) has been earmarked for shale mining for third and fourth
year of production. The proposed haul road to crusher would be linked to this area
during second year. Apart from this, site office, dormitory, HSD pump and workshop
would also be constructed near to proposed crusher during first two years. In general,
the roads would be prepared maintaining a gradient not steeper than 1 in 16 except for
ramps, where the maximum gradient would be 1 in 10. Appropriate bunding / toe walls
would be made towards valley side of the roads and plantation would be resorted to. The
stockpiled quantity of 50,000 tonnes of development period would be used for trial runs
of crusher and will be sent to the plant from third year onwards. Top soil, wherever
encountered will be temporarily stacked as separate stock for plantation near proposed
plantation areas. Year wise details of proposed development are given in Table 2.3 .
Table 2.3: Details of Proposed Yearwise Development Works-Eastern Block

Year Location Development details
I(2009-10) S150o -S85o / Preparation of road from Karara-Kashlog road to proposed crusher
E107.5o -E225o site
II(2010-11) S165o -S105o / E175o Preparation of haul road from crusher site to 1730 , 1720 , 1700 mrl
-E255o levels, face and working space development at 1730 , 1720 , 1700
mrls for production and creation of 50,000 tonnes limestone stock.
Preparation of approach road to shale mining area. Construction of
4 check dams
III(2011-12) S145o -S115o / E200o Preparation of haul road up to 1690 mrl level , face development at
-E255o 1690 mrl and construction of 4 check dams / filters
IV(2012-13) S150 -S115o / E190o Preparation of haul road / ramp up to 1680, 1670, 1660 MRL
o
-E265o benches. face development at 1680 to 1660 mrl benches and

construction of 5 check dams / filters
V(2013-14) S150o -S107.5o / Preparation of haul road / ramp up to 1650 mrl bench. face
E175o -E265o development at 1650 mrl bench and construction of 6 check dams /
filters
29
Year-wise production proposed for the next five years: The present capacity of the
Suli Cement unit is 2.6 MTPA clinkerisation. The Rauri unit is envisaged to produce
about 0.9 million tonnes of clinker during first year of scheme period and therefore, the
total plant capacity considered for first year is 3.5 million tonnes of clinker while for
second to fifth years period is @ 5.2 MTPA. Accordingly, the total raw material
requirement from the captive mine for the two units would be 7.6 MTPA from second
year onwards.
Limestone is characterized by a Lime Saturation Factor (LSF) varying between 80 and

150 and sometimes even higher while shale and shaly limestone has LSF from 3 to 80.
The general requirement of LSF from the mine is around 108 - 110. Therefore, limestone
around 88 to 90% and shale /shaly limestone in the range of 10 to 12% is regularly
blended at mine face and material is dispatched to crusher for onwards conveying to
stockpile in the cement plant. Considering above blending pattern, the production levels
as per the Table 2.4 have been planned for the next five years period.
Table 2.4: Planned Production for Next Five Years (In Million Tonnes)
Western(Kashlog) Eastern(Mangu)
Year Total
Block Block Total Shale
Limestone
Limestone Shale Limestone Shale
I 4.60 0.51 0.00 0.00 4.60 0.51
II 6.84 0.76 0.00 0.00 6.84 0.76
III 5.04 0.56 1.80 0.20 6.84 0.76
IV 4.14 0.46 2.70 0.30 6.84 0.76
V 3.42 0.38 3.42 0.38 6.84 0.76
Total 24.04 2.67 7.92 0.88 31.96 3.55
It has been planned to raise 90% of total limestone production by controlled blasting and
10% through primary rock breaking in the Western Block. Similarly, it is envisaged to
raise 70% of total limestone production by controlled blasting and 30% through primary
rock breaking in the Eastern Block. Preliminary studies are also underway for
considering utilization of Hydraulic Cutting Head as an attachment for hydraulic
excavator and to use Terrain Leveler for limestone raising in the peripheral areas of the
lease. The entire planned shale would directly be raised by an excavator.
30
Considering 300 mine working days in a year, the planned maximum production is
12000 TPD from a Block once the Eastern Block is fully developed. Hence, a maximum
of 10800 TPD of Limestone and 1200 TPD of Shale from an individual Block and 21600
TPD of Limestone and 2400 TPD of Shale from the entire lease would be raised during
next five years period. However, during second year entire production would be
achieved from Kashlog Block. The bench-wise details of proposed production from the
two areas are described below:
Western (Kashlog) Block (Details of next 5 year plan)
First Year: As discussed above, a total of 5.11 million tonnes of limestone and shale
would be raised during the year. The planned limestone and shale production would
comprise a tonnage of 46 and 5.1 lakhs respectively. Limestone and shale would be
raised both from northern and southern sub-blocks. In the northern block , benches
namely 1470 , 1460 and 1430 MRL would be worked apart from some shale workings
over 1480 MRL bench. The face alignment for the benches would be initially E-W with
advancement in the NE direction and it would gradually change to N-S with
advancement in the eastern direction. Similarly, in the southern sub-block, the face
alignment for the benches would be E-W while the advancement in the north and south
directions. Mainly benches from 1380 to 1300 MRL benches would be operated in the
southern sub-block. Total of 49.70 ha area would have been opened by the end of first
year. 1.58 ha reclaimed area as per suggestions would be worked and 3.48 ha area
would have been reclaimed and used for afforestation purposes by the end of the year.
It has been envisaged to raise 90% of the limestone production through controlled
blasting while 10% would be raised through primary breaker.
Second Year: As discussed earlier, a total of 7.6 million tonnes of limestone and shale
comprise a tonnage of 68.4 and 7.6 lakhs respectively. Limestone would be raised both
from northern and southern sub-blocks while shale would be mainly produced from
northern sub-block occurring in-between two limestone bands. In the northern block
benches namely 1450, 1420 and 1410 would be worked apart from some shale workings
over 1470 MRL bench. The face alignment for the benches would be initially E-W with
31

alignment for the benches would be E-W while the advancement in the north in south
directions. Mainly 1370 to 1290 MRL benches would be operated in the southern sub-
block. Total of 56.27 ha area would have been opened by the end of second year. 1.71
ha reclaimed area would be worked and 2.70 ha area would have been reclaimed and
used for afforestation purposes by the end of the year. It has been envisaged to raise
90% of the limestone production through controlled blasting while 10% would be raised
through primary breaker.
Third Year: As discussed earlier, a total of 5.6 million tonnes of limestone and shale
comprise a tonnage of 50.4 and 5.6 lakhs respectively. Limestone would be raised both
from northern and southern sub-blocks while shale would be mainly produced from
northern sub-block occurring in-between two limestone bands. In the northern sub-block
benches namely 1450 and 1440 would be worked apart from some shale working over
1460 MRL bench. The face alignment for the benches would be initially E-W with
alignment for the benches would be E-W while the advancement in the north and south
directions. Mainly 1360 to 1280 MRL benches would be operated in the southern sub-
block. Total of 60.01 ha area would have been opened up and 3.41 ha area would have
been reclaimed and used for afforestation purposes by the end of third year. It has been
envisaged to raise 90% of the limestone production through controlled blasting while
10% would be raised through primary breaker.
Fourth Year: A total of 4.4 million tonnes of limestone and shale would be raised during
the year. The planned limestone and shale production would comprise a tonnage of 39.6
and 4.6 lakhs respectively. In the northern sub-block benches namely 1440 to 1420
would be worked apart from some shale working over 1460 MRL bench. The face
alignment for the benches would be initially E-W with advancement in the NE direction
and it would gradually change to N-S with advancement in the eastern direction.
32
Similarly, in the southern sub-block, the face alignment for the benches would be E-W
while the advancement in the north and south directions. Mainly 1340, 1300 and 1280
MRL benches would be operated in the southern sub-block. Total of 61.16 ha area
would have been opened up and 4.56 ha area would have been reclaimed and used for
afforestation purposes by the end of fourth year. As being practiced, it has been
envisaged to raise 90% of the limestone production through controlled blasting while
10% would be raised through primary breaker.
Fifth Year: A total of 3.8 million tonnes of limestone and shale would be raised during
the year. The planned limestone and shale production would comprise a tonnage of 34.2
and 3.8 lakhs respectively. The limestone production would be achieved from 1420 to
1410 MRL benches in the northern portion and 1290 to 1270 MRL benches in southern
portion apart from some shale production over 1460 MRL bench . The face
advancement of benches would be from north to north-east to eastern direction. Total of
63.78 ha area would have been opened up and 5.34 ha area would have been
reclaimed and used for afforestation purposes by the end of fifth year. As being
practiced, it has been envisaged to raise 90% of the limestone production through
controlled blasting while 10% would be raised through primary breaker.
Eastern (Mangu) Block: (Details of next 5 year plan)
First & Second Year: As discussed above, no production would be undertaken during
first two years in this block. The 50000 tonnes of material raised during the
developmental activities would be kept in two dumps over 1720 to 1700 MRL benches
and would be sent to crusher during third year. 4.8 ha area would be opened up for
development of infra-structural facilities like haul road, crusher, office, workshop etc. and
0.7 ha will be opened up for development of initial benches.190 tonnes of top soil would
be generated and would be stocked on temporary basis for vegetation in the lease and
surrounding areas. A total of 5.5 ha area would have been opened during developmental
works.
Third Year : The limestone production would be achieved from 1720 to 1690 MRL
benches at two locations over Band-1 and Band-2. Band-1 developed over 1690 MRL
33
bench would produce 0.54 lakh tonnes of limestone while Band-2 developed from 1720
to 1690 MRL benches would produce about 17.46 lakh tonnes of limestone. The
intercalated shale area between two limestone bands would provide .32 lakh tonnes of
shale while 1.68 lakh tonnes of shale would be raised from 1670 to 1630 MRL benches
of separate shale mining area. A total of 18 lakh tonnes of limestone and 2 lakh tonnes
of shale would be sent to crusher during the year. This will comprise .50 lakh tonnes of
limestone obtained during developmental activities from 1730 and 1720 MRL benches
and stocked during first two years. 70 % of the limestone would be raised by controlled
blasting while 30% would be raised through breaker. Entire shale would be directly
raised by an excavator. 758 tonnes of top soil would be generated and would be stocked
on temporary basis for vegetation in the lease and surrounding areas. A total of 12.3 ha
area would have been opened up by the end of third year.
Fourth Year: The limestone production would be achieved from 1690 to 1660 MRL
benches at two locations over Band-1 and Band-2. Band-1 developed from over 1680 to
1660 MRL benches would produce 11.58 lakh tonnes of limestone while Band-2
developed from 1690 to 1680 MRL benches would produce about 15.42 lakh tonnes of
limestone. The intercalated shale area between two limestone Bands would provide .96
lakh tonnes of shale while 2.04 lakh tonnes of shale would be raised from 1630 to 1620
MRL benches of separate shale mining area. A total of 27 lakh tonnes of limestone and
3 lakh tonnes of shale would be raised during the year. 70% of the limestone would be
raised by controlled blasting while 30% would be raised through breaker .Entire shale
would be directly raised by an excavator. 1086 tonnes of top soil would be generated
and would be stocked on temporary basis for vegetation in the lease and surrounding
areas. A total of 19.9 ha area would have been opened up by the end of fourth year.
Fifth Year: The limestone production would be achieved from 1680 to 1650 MRL
benches at two locations over Band-1 and Band-2. Band-1 developed from over 1660 to
1650 MRL benches would produce 5.27 lakh tonnes of limestone while Band-2
developed from 1680 to 1650 MRL benches would produce about 28.93 lakh tonnes of
limestone. The intercalated shale area between two limestone bands would provide 2.92
lakh tonnes of shale while .88 lakh tonnes of shale would be raised from 1660 MRL
34
bench developed in foot-wall area of Band-2. A total of 34.2 lakh tonnes of limestone and
3.8 lakh tonnes of shale would be raised during the year. 70% of the limestone would be
raised by controlled blasting while 30% would be raised through breaker or hydraulic
cutting head. Entire shale would be directly raised by an excavator. A total of 26.2 ha
area would have been opened up by the end of fifth year.
Table 2.5: Co-Ordinates of Proposed Workings – Eastern Block

Year Bench (MRL) Northing(x100m) Easting(x100m)
I&II 1730 S14-S12.8 E19.7-E20.6
1720 S14-S12.5 E19.6-E21.6
1700 S13.3-S12.8 E24-E25.2
III 1720 S14-S12.5 E19.6-E21.6
1710 S14.2-S12.4 E19.5-E21.7
1700 S14.6-S12 E19.3-E22
1690 S14.2-S11.7 E20-E25.6
1670 TO 1630 S14.8-S12.5 E18-20
IV 1690 S14.8-S12.8 E19-E21.6
1680 S14.6-S11.3 E19.2-E26
1670 S13.5-S11.4 E22.2-E26.2
1660 S14-S11.8 E23.2-E26.3
1630 S14.8-S12.5 E18-20
1620 S14.8-S12.5 E18-20
V 1680 S14.8-S13.6 E18.7-E20.3
1670 S15.6-S11.3 E17.8-E22.5
1660 S15.8-S12 E17.8-E26.4
1650 SS14.2-S10.7 E20.8-E25.7
2.7.5 Drilling & Blasting
Drilling in the present mines is fully related to the production requirement. There is 1 No.
of Hydraulic drill machine & these can drill holes up to 36 meters vertically of 150 mm
diameter. Blasting operations are carried out in a controlled manner to minimize fly rock
generation for safety of civil structures, machines and nearby habitation and agricultural
fields. Due care is taken to keep the ground vibrations and air blast levels to the lowest
possible limits to avoid any adverse impacts on the surrounding environment. The
blasting parameters like spacing, burden, depth, sub-grade, charge per hole, delay
pattern, firing pattern etc. have been established as per the guidance and advice from
concerned experts of Universities/Research Institutes viz. IBM , CMRI , etc .The
operations are carried out under the supervision of Assistant Manager (Mines), well
35
versed with technique to ensure quality and safety in the work. The non electric shock
tube initiating system like EXEL & Noiseless Trunkline Delay (NTD) and Ikon (Digital
Electronic System) are regularly used for safety and to reduce noise levels. In this
system of blasting, the detonating cord in the hole is replaced with a non
electric/electronic detonator. During firing of the blast, the explosive charge is
initiated at the bottom of the hole and this ensures that most of the explosive energy is
used in actually breaking the rock, thus reducing the fly rock considerably. In NONEL
system, on the surface of the hole, the delay between different holes is provided by non
electric connectors ensuring correct firing as per the blast design. The process reduces
the maximum instantaneous charge per delay which finally reduces the ground
vibration levels. The 10m deep blast hole comprises bottom, column charge and
stemming zone. The common distribution ratio is 0.4% booster and 99.6% column
charge (ANFO) having a stemming column of 4 to 5 meters.
The i-kon™ Digital Energy Control System consists of two way programmable digital
Detonators and control equipment (i-kon™ Logger and Blaster). The Logger is used
during hook-up to assign the delay sequence and perform testing functions. The Logger
reads and stores the unique Detonator Identification Number (DetID) and required delay
time. The Blaster is used to conduct final system tests, blast programming and firing.
i-kon™ Detonators are fully programmable and have on board digital timing circuits and
energy storage enabling them to function independently once the fire signal has been
sent. Lead wires of ikon detonator end in an easy to use hinged connector. A connecting
harness consists of twin twist copper wire used to hookup the Detonators using hinged
connectors. The harness is connected to a Logger to enable delay assignment and
testing during hookup.
As each Detonator is connected, the i-kon™ Logger checks Detonator functionality,

reads the DetID and then writes along with the delay time to its memory. The user is able
to edit the assigned delay times stored in the Logger upon review of the delay list. 200
Detonators can be logged to a single Logger in delay increments of 1 millisecond (ms)
36
from 0 to 15000 ms. Any delay can be assigned to any detonator, regardless of order on
harness.
Once hook-up is complete, or at any time during logging, the system may be fully tested
by using the Logger test menu. This causes the Logger to communicate with every
detonator individually and determine its’ status. If errors are detected the Logger will
display these in a meaningful way along with comprehenside help information. Current
leakage is continuously monitored during logging and can be measured using the
‘Measure Leakage’ facility.
To fire the blast, the Logger is placed at a safe position from the blast and connected to
the Blaster via a firing line. The Blaster communicates with the Detonators via the
Loggers. Blasters are protected by a digital key to prevent use by unauthorized
personnel. i-kon™ Blasters are available in two sizes. Blaster 400 can fire 400
Detonators on 2 Loggers and Blaster 1600 can fire 1600 Detonators on 8 Loggers.
The i-kon™ Digital Energy Control System complies with the principle of ‘Inherent
Safety’. This means the i-kon™ Logger, used at the blast hole, is unable to fire
Detonators even if the Logger develops faults. This is ensured because Loggers are
unable to produce more than 5 volts r.m.s and the proven, tested No-Fire voltage of
every Detonator is above 10.5 volts. In addition, the Logger does not contain any
circuitry or programming capable of generating program, arm and fire signals. i-kon™
Detonators have protection structures in the electronic circuitry, which give a high level of
protection against stray currents, over-voltage, static and electromagnetic radiation.
The i-kon™ Detonator will directly initiate detonator sensitive packaged explosives and
Primex™ boosters. The steel lead wire of ikon detonators is extremely robust, however if
the insulation is cut or split, moisture may cause earth leakage problems causing testing
and communication errors with the i-kon™ System. Excessive force should not be
applied to the lead wires.
Main advantages of electronic detonators: There are three main characteristics of

electronic detonators which make them different from pyrotechnic delay detonators:
37
a. Accuracy
b. Programmability
c. Testability
Fly rock is controlled by constant monitoring with Minimate (Seismograph) through study
of the peak particle velocity at different distances in all the three axes. The blast pattern
and charging is modified accordingly. The saw dust up to 10-12% by weight is mixed
with ANFO to reduce the bulk density of column. This helps to reduce consumption of
ANFO as well as ground vibration levels.
A well-trained crew under the direct supervision of a Blasting Engineer is carried out in
day-to-day blasting operations. Commonly used boosters are powergel-boost of M/s ICI
and emul-boost of M/s IDL. Each cartridge weighs 125gms. Except in adverse weather
conditions and hole condition prilled ANFO explosives is used as column charge in non-
cartridge form. The non-electric shock tube initiating system viz. EXEL & NTD
(NoiselessTrunkline Delay) are in regular use. It has resulted in maintaining the highest
safety standard and simultaneously decreases the noise level and ground vibrations. We
have three Nos. MINIMATE Model DS-567 for use of monitoring ground vibration and air
blast. These instruments are imported from INSTANTEL, Canada. Based on the results
from records of these instruments further modification in blasting parameters is being
done from time to time. Secondary blasting in the mines has been totally eliminated by
the use of Hydraulic Rock Breaker.
The present 25 tonnes capacity magazine is sufficient to supply the explosive sand even
for new enhanced capacity of 2.6 Million Tonne. During the course of mining in the
peripheral areas to avoid rolling of limestone boulders towards the slope and also
to adopt safe mine practices, the introduction of primary rock breaker with backhoe
combination has been enormously successful. Today, about 10% of material is
disintegrated by this method. The rock breaker is able to break the limestone
continuously and at the same time backhoe enables removal of broken material by
pulling up towards the benches. The raised material is loaded into dumpers through a
wheel loader or excavator. The inner / central portions of the sub-blocks are being
38
worked adopting controlled blasting techniques. Further, secondary blasting was

completely eliminated by using hydraulic rock breaker (Fig 2.6) for primary breaking at
critical places in the mine like peripheral edges. Hydraulic Cutting Head as an
attachment for hydraulic excavator is used. This practically eliminates noise generated
through rock breakers and is very helpful for edge removal Studies are underway for
utilization of Terrain Leveler for limestone raising specially in the peripheral areas for
further restricting blasting. The process helps in avoiding the common problems of
fly rock and noise associated with the secondary blasting.
All the mined material is supplied to plant. No waste rock occurs in between the
limestone which may require formation of dumps. Top soil is manually collected and
stacked in the soil yard and later used for afforestation purpose.
Figure 2.7: Hydraulic Rock Breaker

39
2.7.6 Transportation of Limestone and Shale
The transportation of material from the working area to the crusher is undertaken by 50
tons capacity dumpers. The existing capacity of OLBC is 900 TPH. For 2009 and 2010
the existing OLBC is upgraded to 1200 TPH. Limestone to Rauri plant for first 2 years
will be fed from Kashlog block by working three shifts. Temporarily a crusher is being
installed, near the existing crusher. A crusher will be installed at Mangu block to meet
the requirement of the plant at Rauri. The bigger boulders are crushed to smaller
boulders of size ranges 50mm-70mm. The crushed material is proposed to be conveyed
to the plant via Kashlog block by an Over Land Belt Conveyor (OLBC) system. The
OLBC from Mangu to present crusher and another OLBC Line-II from present Crusher to
new plant site is proposed.
2.7.7 Mining Equipment
It is envisaged to produce 85% limestone production through drilling and blasting and
15% by deploying Hydraulic Rock Breakers mounted on PC-650/PC-1250 machine for
primary breaking. In this context, earlier during the year 2001, HM-2500 primary rock
breaker was successfully introduced at the mine while HB-5800 primary breaker was
introduced in 2007. The Hydraulic Rock Breaker is mainly utilized in peripheral areas of
the mine to avoid rolling down of material down the slope along with backhoe
combination. The same technique would be continued during the coming years.
As per the ongoing practice, benches of 10m height will continue to be adopted for the
two Blocks considering safety and productivity of the machines. Adequate bench width
(minimum 30 m) and working space for easy machine movement would be maintained.
Bench \ Face slope during working time would be 80 degrees to vertical while when the
benches are leftover during closure stage , it will range between 35 to 50 degree in the
Western Block and 35 to 70 degrees in the Eastern Block . Overall, pit slope would be
below 45 degrees in the two Blocks.
The haul roads would be prepared maintaining a gradient not steeper than 1 in 16
except for ramps, where the maximum gradient would be 1 in 10. Appropriate bunding /
40
toe / parapet walls would be made towards valley side of the roads and plantation would
be undertaken. It is proposed to procure HB-7000 hammer mounted on PC-1250
excavator for removal of edges and primary breaking. It will give an average production
of around 150-200 tonnes per hour. Hence one number of Breaker mounted on PC-1250
machine has been considered for eastern block. One no. hydraulic cutting drum
(EARKAT Cutter) ER5500 which can be mounted on PC1250 is also proposed for edge
working. The Hydraulic Cutting Head is a complimentary tool to close the gap between
excavator and breaker/ripper. This equipment would help to further reduce limestone
production through drilling and blasting. Proposed Dozer and Rock Breaker mounted on
PC-200 excavator would be used for developmental works and secondary boulder
breaking.
Figure 2.8 : Working of Backhoe and Dumper
Terrain Levelers: Preliminary studies are also underway for considering utilization of
Terrain Leveler for limestone raising specially in the peripheral areas for restricting
41
blasting. Terrain Leveler produces the mineral in one pass without the need for primary
crushing. The high end 99.8 tonne weight and 600 HP model can cut an area up to 3.7
meters wide and 69 cm deep in a single pass. The greater penetration is achieved
through the use of rotary power headshaft motor and a splined headshaft employing a
top-down cutting system. It also eliminates the need of large loaders and dumpers. The
material generated through this machine can be transported through standard tippers. If
successful, this equipment may help to further reduce limestone production through
drilling and blasting.
Table 2.6 List of Mining Equipment

No. of
Machine Specification Capacity Performance
Machines
PC-650-3 Excavator (BEML make) 410 4.5m3 400 TPH 01
B-35 Rear dump truck (BEML make) 455 35 tons 100 TPH 07
D-355 ripper Dozer (BEML) 410 15m 3
150 TPH 01
PC-220-3, Hydraulic 160 bar
148 30 TPH 01
rock breaker(HM960) pressure
PC-650-3 Hydraulic backhoe-cum- 180 bar
410 100 TPH 01
breaker (HM-2500) pressure
EX-600-V(Tata Hitachi),Rock
370 4.0 m3 120 TPH 01
Breaker(HB-5800)
PC600-LC,KOMATSU Excavator 384 4.0m3 300 TPH 01
PC-1250-7,KOMATSU Excavator 651 6.5m3 600 TPH 01
HD-465-7,KOMATSU Dumper 715 50T 190 TPH 04
ROC L8,Drill M/C 450 - 30 MT/H 01
Motor Grader, Volvo, G710B 179 - - 01
Vibratory Soil Compactor,L&T,1107D 112 - - 01
Table 2.7 List of Miscellaneous Mining Equipment

Machine Specification / Capacity No. of Machines
Water Sprinkler 10 KL 1
HSD Tanker 12 KL 1
Maintenance Van - 1
Ambulance Van - 1
Service Van & Jeep - 2
Explosive Van - 1
Crane 14T 1
42
Table 2.8 List of Proposed Additional Mining Equipment (Expansion)

Machine
Specification Capacity Performance No. of Machines
PC-1250-7,KOMATSU
651 6.5m3 600 TPH 02
Excavator
HD-465-7,KOMATSU
715 50T 160 TPH 06
Dumper
Motor Grader, Volvo,
179 - - 01
G710B
Vibratory Soil
112 - - 01
Compactor,L&T,1107D
HD275A Dozer 01
ROC L8,Drill M/C 450 - 30MTH 01
Hydraulic Cutting Drum Dia.-910 mm
- - 01
Drum(Eraket ER 5500) Drum Width-1600mm
PC-200-3, Hydraulic
50 TPH 01
rock breaker(HB 1700)
PC-1250,With HB-7000
150 TPH 01
Rock Breaker
Table 2.9 List of Additional Miscellaneous Equipment - Expansion

Machine
Specification / Capacity No. of Machines
Water Sprinkler 10 KL 1
HSD Tanker 12 KL 1
Maintenance Van - 1
Ambulance Van - 1
Service Van - 1
Jeep 2
Explosive Van 1
Crane 14T 1
2.7.8 Water for Limestone Mines Expansion
The water demand for the existing plant, staff colony and mines is met through common
water system. Total water demand for the existing Suli Plant and existing Limestone
mines is 1200 KLD. Permission to draw 1200 KLD of water from Pazeena Kund is
available with ACL (obtained from Irrigation and Public Health Department, Government
of Himachal Pradesh). The water demand of existing mines is 100 KLD, for drinking and
dust suppression purpose. Additional 50 KLD water will be required during the
expansion of mines for dust suppression purpose. This water will be met from the
rainwater storage reservoir developed inside the ML area.
43
2.7.9 Power Supply
At the mines office and workshop, required electrical power has been drawn from power
line of State Electricity Board. The power line has been extended from plant area for the
Western Block. This line would also be further extended to meet the demand of Eastern
Block. Power supply of additional 1 MW for the expansion shall be arranged from State
Electricity Board. DG Set of 500 KVA will be used in case of power failure.
2.7.10 Employment
The detail of available manpower is as follows.

1. Highly skilled (Mines Manager, Maintenance Managers: 24
Asst Managers / Engineers)
2. Skilled (Operator, Mechanics, Clerks) : 62
3. Un-skilled (Helpers / Mazdoors) : 24
Additional 110 manpower will be deployed for working the Eastern Block during
expansion.
2.7.11 Infrastructure
Mines Office: A permanent office for the mines staff and a dormitory has been
constructed in the Western Block. First aid station, canteen, drinking water and W.C.
facilities, rest shelter have also been provided near existing crusher besides some
facilities in the operating area. Similar facilities other than dormitory will also be created
in the proposed new office in the Eastern Block. Restroom for truck and dumper drivers
shall be provided at the ground floor of mines office.
Workshop: A full fledged workshop and store has been constructed near mines office in
the Western Block besides creating the facility of a mobile maintenance van. A workshop
on a relatively smaller scale has been envisaged near the proposed crusher in the
Eastern Block. All the required tool and tackles would be provided to attend routine
maintenance / break down jobs. Essential spares for repair works will be housed in a
separate room within the workshop and these spares will be supplied from the existing
44
centralized store located in the Western Block. The existing centralized stores at
Darlaghat and Western Block will maintain the inventory and supply necessary spares to
the workshop in the Eastern Block. An additional mobile maintenance van has also been
envisaged for the Eastern Block.
Training Centre: A Vocational Training Centre (as per statutory requirements) is

functioning at the main mines office located in the Western Block, wherein workers are
imparted basic and refresher training with necessary training aids etc. The workers of
the Eastern Block would also be imparted training at this Centre.
Diesel Supply: High speed diesel for HEMM is supplied deploying a diesel tanker from
the Pump located near Mines office in Western Block. An additional HSD Tanker would
be utilized for supplying fuel to the machinery of Eastern Block. For night working
purpose, mobile light towers have also been put to use besides fixed installations.
Similar pattern has been envisaged for the Eastern Block to ensure proper lighting.
2.8 Description of Mitigation Measures - Mining
2.8.1 Movement of HEMM on Haul Road
The movement of traffic on haul roads would be the cause of fugitive air emissions. In
order to control the fugitive emissions, water sprinklers shall be provided so that the
ambient air quality shall remain under the norms specified under pollution control laws.
Base data for ambient air quality have been collected and discussed in the separate
chapter. Furthermore, the ambient air quality shall be monitored regularly as per the
monitoring plan provided in another chapter. Mining activity is already under progress for
the cement plant (at village Suli) in the western block of the mining lease area for which
water sprinklers have been provided.
2.8.2 Drilling of Holes for Blasting

Drilling is carried out by deploying 150 mm dia. drill (Atlas Copco ROC L8) equipped with
in-built arrangement of water sprinkling for dust suppression and separate dust
45
extraction system and this arrangement makes operations practically dust free. The use
of explosives for blasting is restricted to limestone only. Shale is soft and weathered and
thus it is excavated directly by excavator or backhoe.
Figure 2.9 - 150 mm Drill Machine
Figure 2.10 - 150 mm dia. Hole for Blasting
46
2.8.3 Blasting
Blasting process involves slackening of big blocks of rocks/ore from the mines. This
operation generates maximum dust, which results in the increase of SPM concentration.
It also contributes to emissions of certain gases (Oxides of Nitrogen and Ammonia) due
to the use of explosives like ANFO and Nitroglycerin.
The size of the dust particles emitted into the atmosphere plays a major role in deciding
the distance to which they may be transported. Particles of larger size fall fairly rapidly
and closer to their source, because of gravitational settling. However, the aerosols
because of their small size may be held in suspension for years in the atmosphere and
may be transported on a global scale. Eventually, these smaller particles are collected in
raindrops and fall on Earth. The composition of these particles largely depends on the
composition of the ore being processed.
The continuous ambient air quality monitoring of the area reveals that the smaller
particles are also within the prescribed limits.
Blasting operations are carried out in a controlled manner to minimize fly rock generation
for safety of civil structures, machines and nearby habitation and agricultural fields. Due
care is taken to keep the ground vibrations and air blast levels to the lowest possible
limits to avoid any adverse impacts on the surrounding environment, as per the advice
from concerned experts of Universities/Research Institutes viz. IBM , CMRI , etc. The
non electric shock tube initiating system like EXEL & Noiseless Trunkline Delay (NTD)
and Ikon (Digital Electronic System) are regularly used for safety and to reduce noise
levels.
Fly rock is controlled by constant monitoring with Minimate (Seismograph) through study
of the peak particle velocity at different distances in all the three axes. The blast pattern
and charging is modified accordingly. The saw dust up to 10-12% by weight is mixed
with ANFO to reduce the bulk density of column. This helps to reduce consumption of
ANFO as well as ground vibration levels.
47
2.8.4 Crushing
The crusher house will be completely enclosed. To arrest the particulate matters
generated from the existing limestone crushing plant, baghouse has been provided.
Similarly, the emissions shall be channelized (from crushers, screens and transfer
points) and a well designed baghouse shall be provided. Water sprinkling arrangement
(fixed type with sensor) will be provided at the dumper unloading hopper of the crusher.
2.8.5 Over Land Belt Conveyor (OLBC)
The limestone produced is transported within the mining area for crushing using
dumpers and thereafter the same is transported using OLBC from mining area to cement
plant. A new crusher shall be installed in the foot wall area of the Easter Block (by 2011)
and further a new parallel OLBC shall be installed from new crusher to the existing
crusher in the Western Block by 2011. The OLBC will eliminate the use dumpers to
transport the mined material to cement plant.
To mitigate the fugitive air emissions, the existing OLBC is fully covered and there is no
scope has been left for particles to be air born. The new OLBC shall be covered in the
similar manner to protect the area from the air emissions.
2.8.6 Noise
About 100-120 (at approximately 25 m distance from source) dB(A) noise is generated
during the blasting but the exposure is not continuous. Ear plugs shall be provided to
workers. Noise level from the machinery ranges between 90dB(A) to 100dB(A) (1 m
away from source) and this also does not give continuous exposure to workers. About
90 – 95 dB(A) noise is generated from the crushing plant. 8 hours exposure at 90 dB(A)
is allowed. Noise level shall be monitored regularly as done for the present mining
activity including regular monitoring of vibrations.
48
2.8.7 Solid Waste
The mining method shall not generate any overburden, sandstone, rocks, debris, etc
Shale shall be used in the cement making. Top soil shall be excavated and properly
used for greenbelt development (given in Table 4.7, Chapter 4). Used batteries will be
given back to dealer during the purchase of new batteries under byback arrangement.
Domestic garbage will be segregated. Recyclable materials will be sold to kabadis.
Organic matter will be composted and used as manure.
2.8.8 Wastewater
No waste water is generated from the mining process except domestic effluent from the
site which is sent to septic tanks and spent oil and lubricants from workshop. Oil water
separator tank will be constructed in workshop premises. Used oil, spent oil and
lubricants will be collected and disposed off to the authorized vendors.
2.8.9 Safe Mine Practices
• Retaining toe walls and check dams are constructed to restrict rolling of boulders
towards the slope areas. Check dams / filters are also constructed to control the
surface runoff water carrying silt during monsoon season.
• Secondary blasting has been replaced by the introduction of primary rock

breaker with backhoe combination. This has also been found successful for
mining of Shale and at the loose edges. About 15% limestone/ shale is
excavated by using rock breaker with backhoe combination. All the mined
material is supplied to plant. The top soil is manually collected and temporarily
stacked in the soil yard and used for afforestation purposes.
• Considerable quantity of blasting explosives are saved due to this in addition to

reduction of emissions which otherwise bound to be generated by virtue of
blasting
49
Figure 2.11 – Rock Breaker
Figure 2.12 - Backhoe for Excavation of Limestone
50
• Every effort is and would be made to maintain scenic beauty of the surroundings.
A planned restoration of area surrounding the mines is being taken up and
implemented and would continue the same in future.
• Bench slopes were dressed using backhoe, dozer and rock breaker and a gentle
gradient of about 25 to 30 degrees is maintained. Slope stabilization works in the
form of physical and biological reclamation of mined slopes are also done.
• The area comes under the seismic zone V and highly vulnerable to earthquakes.
Every step has been/ shall be taken for the existing mining area while designing
the site office, check dams for rollover boulders, slope protection by geo jute
cover technology for the protection. Slopes are also protected from soil erosion.
Figure-2.10 shows benches in mining area.
Figure-2.13 - Benches of Mining Area and Haul Road
51
• The mine lease area is not affected by the surrounding catchment basin as it is
located on the hilly terrain and on the contrary, it discharges the rainwater into its
peripheral valleys.
• About 225 ha area would be available for reclamation and rehabilitation at the
end of the deposit life Part of land shall be converted to natural jungles, water
bodies, plantation etc.
• Road gradient shall not be steeper than 1:16.
• Drains shall be laid along the haul road towards hill side to avoid accumulation of
water and damage to haul roads.
• Check dam / check filters shall be provided over seasonal nallahs.
• Variety of species shall be used for enhancement of survival rate of the plants.
Top soil shall be stacked and utilized for plantation.
• No aquifer exists in the mining lease area. Ground water level is below 1200 m
MRL. Therefore, no interception of groundwater will occur while undergoing
mining of minerals.
• Large sized buckets shall be used to reduce the fugitive emissions during loading
of limestone in dumpers.
52
2.9 Clinkerisation Process
The dry process comprises short rotary kiln with a cyclone pre-heater and a pre-calciner.
6 Stage Preheater will be used to save on fuel consumption. Vertical mill for grinding raw
materials and vertical mill for grinding coal has been considered. The process flow
diagram of clinker making is shown in Figure 2.14.
Dry process plants with 6-stage preheaters have a specific fuel consumption of 700-730
kcal/kg of clinker. The pyroprocessing section requires approximately 20-25 unit /ton of
clinker. The specific power consumption is given below:
Serial No. Section Kwh/T Clinker
1 Crushing and Conveying of raw materials 4.0
2 Raw material grinding 21.0
3 Coal grinding 2.5
4 Pyroprocessing 20.0
5 Miscellaneous 2.5
6 Sub-Total 50.0
7 Colony lighting and Bulk Loading 2.0
Total 52.0
The plant will be designed to incorporate the latest in technology and machinery to
obtain optimum results with the minimum input costs in terms of energy, manpower, and
with minimum environmental pollution. The plant will be sized for a rated capacity of
8400 tonnes per day, or 2.6 Million Tonnes per annum (MTPA) capacity of clinker.
The major equipments of the plant e.g. Raw Mill, Kiln, Coal Mill, Cooler have margin in
the capacity to produce 8400 TPD clinker. Precalciner, Preheater Fans, T.A. Duct with
design margin and little enhancement shall be able to support 8400 TPD of clinker.
i. Rated Capacity of Clinker : 8400 TPD
(i.e. 2.6 Million Tonnes per annum)
ii. Design Margin : 10%
iii. Conversion ratio raw meal/clinker :1:1.48
iv. Quality of coal : 4500-5000 kcal/kg
v. Specific fuel consumption : 710 kcal/kg clinker
vi. Specific power consumption : 52 KWH per Ton of clinker
53
Storage of Raw Materials: Clinker will be stored in closed clinker silo / stock pile,
gypsum will be stored in covered shed, coal will be stored in covered sheds and water
will be sprayed surface.
Design of Raw Mix: Stipulations regarding the various moduli required for Quality &
Process Control (QPC) will be maintained. In the calcinations process, almost all the
coal ash is absorbed in the clinker. Therefore, the lower the specific fuel consumption,
lower will be the ash absorption. For dry process kilns with 6 stage preheater and pre
calciner, the specific fuel consumption would be around 710 Kcal/Kg. The calorific value
of coal from the South Eastern Coal Fields, from where coal will be brought, can be
taken as 4500 Kcal/Kg. and ash content around 28-30%. On this basis, ash absorbed in
clinker would be about 4 - 5%. The raw mix composition would be adjusted to allow for
this absorption of ash.
Corrective Materials: The geological investigation shows that shale found in the area
surrounding the deposit is suitable as the correcting material and is being used
presently. Approximately 1% of shale and 1.6% of iron oxide (mill scales) and 0.6% Red
Ochre is needed to be added to obtain a suitable raw mix.
Composition of Raw Mix: A typical chemical analysis of the raw mix is given below:
LOI SiO2 Al2O3 Fe2O3 CaO MgO Na2O K2O LSF SM AM
35.30 13.40 2.75 2.40 43.55 1.00 0.10 0.70 103 2.60 1.15
Additives like shale and iron ore would need to be added to the limestone to prepare a
raw mix of suitable composition, for making clinker. Shale of suitable quality is available
in the Mines. The preliminary raw mix design would comprise of the following:
Lime Stone : 96.8%

Shale : 1.0%
Iron Ore : 1.6%
Red Ochre : 0.6%
54
Transport of Raw Coal, Clinker and Additives: Raw Coal will be transported from
South Eastern Coal Mines to Ropar by rail and from Ropar to Rauri by road. Clinker will
be transported to ACL’s various grinding units by road. Iron oxide will be transported
from Ropar and Red-ochre from Rajasthan by road.
Material Handling Inside the Plant & Mines: The layout has been designed to achieve
energy conservation. The systems requiring high-energy consumption such as
Pneumatic Pumps are avoided wherever possible. Mechanized material handling
systems, like belt conveyors, elevators, airsides etc., will be used to the maximum. Brief
description of the major machinery units is given in the following paragraphs.
1. Raw Mill: It is proposed to install a vertical roller mill for grinding limestone to a
fineness of 2% residue on 212 µ. Considering the moisture in the limestone and the
properties of limestone, this type of mill will be the most suitable. It is also energy
efficient. A roller mill is simple in installation and operation. The Company has adequate
operational experience of operating the vertical roller mills, and has found them to be
very dependable. The hot gas for drying raw materials in the roller mill will be drawn
from the preheater exhaust gases.
Dust Collector for Kiln and Raw Mill: It is proposed to install a Pulse Jet Bag filter as
common dust collector for the raw mill & kiln system. In normal operation, the exhaust
gases from the kiln and preheater will be taken into the bag house via the raw mill. When
the raw mill is not working, the kiln exhaust gases will go directly to the bag filter.
2. Blending System: It is proposed to install a continuous blending system consisting of

on 22,800 T capacity storage silo. The continuous blending system will be integrated
with the kiln feed system, so that a continuously metered raw meal could be fed to the
kiln at the desired rate. The emphasis will be on maintaining the accuracy both in terms
of quality and the rate of feed.
3. A. Pyroprocessing Section: It is proposed to install a 6-stage preheater with pre-

calciner for obtaining maximum fuel economy. The latest design of preheater with a
55
minimum pressure drop will be installed to save energy. The preheater fan will have a
variable speed drive. The fans used will have efficiencies higher than 80%, to conserve
energy. The precalciner will be of a design suitable for firing high ash coal with low
calorific value. Adequate attention will be paid to retention time and the degree of
calculation achieved. Normally, 60% of the fuel will be fired in the precalciner.
The kiln will have three supports and will have seals of the latest designs, for ensuring
fuel efficiency. The kiln drive will be a variable speed motor. The kiln will be designed in
such manner that hazardous or non hazardous wastes with some calorific value could
be used long with coal. The clinker cooler will be a latest generation grate cooler
designed to cool clinker to a temperature at which it can be handled conveniently. The
cooler will be designed to achieve maximum heat recuperation. The exhaust gases
would be vented through an Electro-static precipitator, to restrict the dust emission.
3. B. Coprocessing of Hazardous Wastes in Kiln: Coprocessing of hazardous waste

will be provided in the kiln. Coprocessing refers to use of waste materials (alternate fuel
and raw materials - AFR) in kiln to recover energy and material. Due to high temperature
and long residence time in cement kilns, all type of wastes are effectively disposed
without any harmful effects. ACL is an associate company of Hoilcim, which has
endorsed the global AFR policy. Continous emission monitoring system, waste specific
feeding arrangement and waste processing platforms at different locations has been
considered as sub-unit to this facility. ACL have successfully installed co-processing
facility like using ETP sludge and cream wastes of Colgate-Palmolive Ltd, using food
grade gelatin waste of Ranbaxy Laboratories.
4. Crushing, Storing and Feeding into Coal Mill: Coal will be received by rail, in rake
loads, at the railhead at Ropar. It will be transported in trucks to the plant site. It is
proposed to have a 21 days stock in the plant. In the plant, coal received in trucks will be
crushed and stacked in a stockpile with pre blending facilities, with the help of existing
coal stacker/reclaimer system. Pre blending is considered necessary for coal also, to
minimize the fluctuations in the quality of coal, and thereby to feed the kiln with coal of a
uniform quality, to maintain optimum operating conditions.
56
5. Coal Mill: It is proposed to install a vertical coal mill for supplying pulverized coal to
kiln and precalciner. Inert hot preheater gases shall be utilized to dry wet coal during
grinding from initial moisture of 10-12% to final moisture of 1 to 2%.The dust collector in
the mill system will be designed to have explosion flaps to safeguard against any
possible explosions/ built up pressures. Provision will also be kept for extinguishing fires
if they occur. Two silos will be provided to store pulverized coal. A coal firing system
with metering facilities for coal will be installed for firing coal in the kiln and in the
precalciner. A standby will be provided in the coal conveying system.
6. Clinker Transport: It is proposed to transport clinker by deep pan conveyor to a
clinker storage silo of adequate capacity with proper extraction facility.
7. Clinker Bulk Loading: It is proposed to install 6 nos. truck bulk loaders of 250 tph
capacity each, for bulk transportation of clinker to grinding units.
The process flow chart of clinker making, showing location of various units and stacks is
shown in Figure 2.14.
Performance Norms: The project has been designed so as to ensure that the
performance norms mentioned below are achieved:
Energy consumption : 52 kwh/t clinker
Fuel Efficiency : 710 kcal/kg clinker
Environmental Control : below 50mg/Nm3 in clean air dust emission
Electrical & Automation Systems

i). Receiving power by extra high voltage (EHV) transmission from the State
Electricity Board.
ii). Distributing this power to the various sections of the plant for numerous
drives of machinery with metering system.
iii). Standby captive DG Power.
iv). Electrical Drives & their control gear, Energy conservation measuring.
v). Earthing & Lightening protection and lighting systems.
vi). Automation & Instrumentation.
vii). Instrumentation & Controls.
viii). Telecommunication.
57
Figure 2.14 Process Flow Chart of Clinker Making, Showing Location of Various Units and Stacks
58
2.9.1 Water for Cement Plant
The water demand for the existing plant, staff colony and mines is met through common
water system. Total water demand for the existing Suli Plant and existing Limestone
mines is 1200 KLD. Permission to draw 1200 KLD of water from Pazeena Kund is
available with ACL (obtained from Irrigation and Public Health Department, Government
of Himachal Pradesh). The water demand of Rauri Plant (considering the existing and
expansion activities) is 500 KLD. This water will be met from the groundwater, for which
necessary approval from Ground Water Authority and permission from Local Body has
been obtained.
2.9.2 Power Requirement:
The requirement will be 30 MW with a contract demand of 24 MVA. It will be taken from
state grid. Two new transformers of 28 / 32 MVA, 220 /6.6 KV will be installed in the
switchyard at Rauri Project site. 4 x 6 MW DG sets will be installed to meet the power
requirement during emergency.
Lighting: All the plant buildings and roads inside the plants have been considered for
provision of lighting. The level of illumination has been kept as per BIS standards. The
fixtures have been selected to avoid scatter and glare. Sensors have been considered
for automatic ighting. It has been considered that lighting does not affect the ecology.
Earthing: All the equipment shall be provided with Earthing & Lightening protection,
entirely in conformity with Indian Electricity Rules, IS 304 & IS 2309
2.9.3 Automation & Instrumentation:
Automation and Instrumentation have been considered to protect the equipment to

control the process variables and to provide safety to the working personnel. The
automation system shall also help to achieve process optimization and shall carry out
technical audit, besides helping to produce consistently well guilty of clinker. The
equipment shall be modular in concept to permit system enhancement without any
59
difficulty. It shall also be provided with self-diagnostic facilities, to reduce the incidence of
forced outage and increase plant availability. The automation system is divided into:
a) Sequence Control of drives
b) Measuring of closed loop control
c) Data logging and information processing and retrieval
2.9.4 Instrumentation and Control:
Electronic Weighing
Raw Material Composition Control: Analysis by X-Ray spectrometer.
Pyroprocessing: Sensors for temperature, pressure, draughts and gas analysis. CCTV to
give the operator inside view of the kiln.
2.9.5 Civil Structures
For the purpose of seismic design of plant structures, the considerations will generally
be as per ISI: 893-1975. The proposed plant site lies in Seismic Zone-V. As the
proposed plant site is on a moderately level terrain, leveling & grading of the area would
be required to be done to some extent and has been allowed for in the estimates. The
plinth level of various structures would generally be kept at about 200mm above the
surrounding ground level to prevent surface water from entering the operational areas.
There could be terracing of the plant sections according to the natural slopes available
and the feasibility from the point of view of material handling.
Roads: Paved roads inside the plant shall be made as shown in the proposed layout.
New exit road shall be provided for trucks to move out of the plant and meet the State
Highway – 88. The exist traffic will avoid Darlaghat town and crossing.
Sewerage: Toilet blocks within the plant area provided as per the functional
requirements shall be connected to septic tanks and soak pits. Presently about 150 KLD
of water is received form the colony, which is treated in the Sewage Water Reclamation
Plant (SWRP) of 250 KLD capacity. Due to expansion in plant and colony about 50-100
KLD of sewage is expected. The existing SWRP is adequate to take care of additional
60
load. All the sewage lines shall be of stoneware/cast iron pipes and shall be laid at
adequate slopes for attaining self-cleaning velocities.
Structures in the Plant & Non-Plant Building: The design and construction of plant
structures have to primarily meet the load data conditions and the functional requirement
of various equipment. Due care will be taken of maintenance, erection requirements and
storage facilities. The buildings and structures, housing heavy equipment and subjected
to heavy shock loads, will be designed in RCC framed construction. The use of
structural steel shall be limited to walkways of tall structures, such as Preheater Towers,
grinding mills where flexibility for stage wise construction is involved. GI corrugated
sheets shall do the cladding for all buildings or brick/rubble masonry wall as may be
dictated by the functional requirements. Non-plants structures like administrative
building, canteen, laboratory, engineering office, workshop, will be designed and
constructed as per standard norms.
Residential Colony: It is proposed to expand the existing residential colony to meet the
additional housing requirement of the staff.
2.9.6 Manpower
Total manpower requirement is 344, as per following break-up.
- Management Grade Employees : 117

- Wage Board Employees : 121
- Casual Labour : 106
Casual labour mentioned above shall be deployed for carrying out the activities of
unloading coal, iron ore etc. from trucks. On an average around 2000 to 2500 work force
of skilled and unskilled men are required during the construction of the plant.
.
2.9.7 Pollution Mitigation Measures
1. Air Pollution Control: Following systems will be installed.
61
S. No. Location Air Pollution Control System

01 Stockpiles Covered. Water sprinkling network
02 Raw Mill Hoppers Bag Filter

03 Raw mill & Kiln system Glass Bag House
04 Blending Silo / Kiln feed Bag Filter
05 Clinker Cooler ESP
06 Clinker Storage Bag Filter
07 Coal Mill System Bag House
08 Truck Bulk Loading Machines Bag Filter
09 Transfer Points Bag Filter
All the units have been designed to satisfy the following World Bank Standard as
suggested in the Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook (Effective July 1998)
Pollutant Emission Standard

Particulate Matter 50 mg/Nm3
(In stack gases under full-load conditions)
Nitrogen oxides 600 mg/Nm3
2.9.7.1 Fugitive Dust Emission Control Measures:
• Designing the production system so as to generate minimum dust and

arrest the dust at its source (bag house with suction and ducting system
proposed at transfer points, silos, clinker storage, truck loading machine
(bulk), raw mill hoppers and blending siols.
• Minimizing the number of material transfer points and maintaining
optimum height of fall of materials.
• Providing high efficiency pulsejet bag filters at material transfer points
including mill feed hoppers.
• Covering the belt conveyors including walkways.
• Providing concrete roads inside the plant. Regular cleaning of plant work
areas and road using vacuum cleaners.
• Greenery and greenbelt development inside plant premises.
In addition to above water spraying through permanently mounted water sprinklers for
the suppression of fugitive dust during raw material unloading / handling sections will be
done. Stockpiles will be kept under covered shed. The dust emission from stockpiles viz.
crushed raw material stock pile (viz. limestone, ore, etc) shall be controlled by providing
water spray system. For control of fugitive particulate emissions, ventilation systems
62
should be used in conjunction with hoods and enclosures covering transfer points and
conveyors. Drop distances should be minimized by the use of adjustable conveyors.
2. Water Pollution Control Measures: There will be no waste water generation from
the dry process. Anciliary sources of liquid effluents generation from the plant are as
follows:
i) Waste water generated from cooling tower blowdown.
ii) Waste water generated plant toilets and washrooms
iii) Waste water generated from laboratory & workshop
iv) Waste water generated in colony
i) Storm water run-off from stockpiles yard
The domestic effluent shall be treated in the existing Sewage Water Reclamation Plant
(250 KLD capacity). The reclaimed water from SWRP will be used for gardening. Plant
water will be reused for dust suppression. Spent oil and lubricants will be collected in
drums and sold to authorized reprocessors. Sedimentation basin with oil trap will be
provided in storm water drain. No wastewater will be discharged outside the plant
premises.
3. Solid Wastes Management: The dry process doesn’t generate any solid waste.
Soiled cotton wastes will be burnt in the kiln. Garbage (80 kg food waste and 130 kg
plastic, paper, packaging material, etc) will be collected in containerized system and
sorted out for recyclable metrials, inert and biodedradable materials. Recyclable
materials will be sold to kabadis. Inert materials will be used as landfill. Organic wastes
will be composted.
4. Noise Pollution Control Measures: Noise will be generated from various crushing /
grinding of raw materials & coal and also from transporting machineries. Low noise
equipment will be procured. All work will be done inside shed. Appropriate noise
reduction measures will be provided. Greenbelt and greenery will also attenuate the
noise to considerable extent. Regular maintenance of the equipment will help in reducing
these noise levels. Further, ear plugs shall be provided to the workers to protect from
high noise exposure in the area where noise level exceeds 85 – 90 dB (A).
63
CHAPTER 3 : DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
3.1 Study Area, Period and Methodology
The study area comprises 10 km area around the Rauri Plant and Kashlog mines.
Table 3.1 Components, Study Area, Study Period and Methodology of EIA
Environmental Monitoring Monitoring Period Methodology
Components Location
Meteorology Roof top of Winter Season Met station was established at colony near
Guest House; (1st Dec 2008 – 28th plant site. Wind speed and direction,
above stack February 2009) humidity, and temperature were recorded on
release level. & Summer Season hourly basis. Long-term historical met data
(April to June 2011) was obtained from IMD.
Ambient Air Impacted and Winter Season AAQ monitoring was done at 10 locations by
Quality non-impacted (1st December 2008 following the CPCB methods. SPM, PM2.5,
location due to –28th February 2009) PM10, SO2 and NO2 levels were determined.
the air emission & Summer Season Sampling locations were established at site,
from the plant (April to June 2011) villages around site at various upwind and
and mines downwind directions.
Noise Quality Locations Winter Season Noise level monitoring was done at 10
covering all area (15th January to 30th locations at various area categories using
category January 2009) & integrated sound level meter. Measurements
Summer Season were taken by following the CPCB
(10 - 15th May 2011) procedure.
Surface & Upstream and Winter Season Five samples of surface water and 8
groundwater downstream of (25th - 30th January samples of ground water were collected nd
quality streams and 2009) & analysed using standard methods (APHA).
ground water of Summer Season
nearby villages. (20 & 25th May 2011)
Soil Quality Agriculture fields Winter Season Six soil samples were collected and
3rd February -2009 analysed for all relevant parameters by
& Summer Season following IARI Methods.
(28th May 2011)
Flora & Fauna Study area Secondary data Data collected from Working Plan and
checked during field surveys.
Demography Study area Secondary data Data was collected from District Statistics
and Handbook.
Socioeconomic
64
3.2 Hydrology
The lesser Himalayan history traces back to the late Pre-Cambrian and early Cambrian
All along the low Himalayan belt are found the thick argillaceous formations with some
quartzite and lime stones, which may be of marine origin. The recent discovery of
stromatolitic horizons in the lower Himalayan sections leads evidence to this inference
and also suggests a late Pre-Cambrian to Cambrian age. The geological formations of
the study area are belonging to the outer Shimla Himalayan’s stratigraphy.
The Shimla group is folded as a broad open synform, which is complimentary to the
shale antiform to the east. This synform is a patterned after the folded jutogh cliff lying at
the topmost tectonic level and also the inner krol cliff. The Shimla group wraps around
the shale antiform in the eastern part after going around the Tattapani antiform and
Batwara Synform.
The western limb of the synform particularly along the thrust contact where it has ridden
over the palaeogene bilt, are tightly folded. This is evident in the Basantpur and the
kunihar formations and the folds have north-south fold axis confirming to the Darla
antiform, which occupies a pivotal place in the apex part of the major synform.
The shali orogeni also results in the formation of several divides within the Great Shali
Basin. There is an important north-south polarization due to a main east-west divide
separating the present Shale Ramgarh from the largi-Deoban (Shimla Himalayan). The
divide is rather narrow between the shale and Deonan. There was also sporadic
stromatolite growth, which gave rise to the kunihar formation.
Classification of Shimla rocks by Pilgrim and West is as follows:
Formation Litholoigcal Description Age

Dagshai series Purple sandstone and clay Lower Miocene
Upper Subathu Purple sandstone and grits Upper Oligocene
Unconformity
Subathu series Shale, limestone, carbonaceous bed Middle Eocene
and late rite
Unconformity
Karol series Limestone and red shale
Karol sand stone Sandstone decomposing to sand
65
Infra-Karol beds Shaly slates, with bed and lenticeless

of quartzitic grit
Balini limestone Pale pink magnesian limestone
(=Mundhalis) Lower Gondwana
Balani Bounder bed, slates with pebbles
Conglomerate
Unconformity
Shali Limestone and slate Position uncertain
Shimla series Dark slate, micaceous sandstone Lower Paleozoic
Limestone
Unconformity
Jaunsar series Sub-schistose, slates, micaceous
Slate and phyllite, conglomerate Purana
Green and gray quartzite
Unconformity
Chail Series Light grey and brown schistose
Slates and quartz-schist, talcosic
And quartz-schist, talc schist band, Purana
gray slate with interbedded
limestone.
Jutogh series Igneous rock and olivine dolerite
Quartzite and schist, thrusted and
Banded carbonaceous dolomite, Archaean
Carbonaceous phyllite, mica-schist
The main geological formation of the study area is as follows:

Formation Age
1 Terraces Alluvium Quaternary
2 Shivalik Group Pliocene to middle Miocene
3 Sabathu Middle Eocene to Upper Oligocene
4 Krol Triassic
5 Infra Krol Permian
6 Blaini Upper Carboniferous
7 Sanjauli, Chhaosa Kunihar Lower Paleozoic
8 Shali and Jutog Precambrian
1. Jutog formation: This formation consists of rocks which are oldest in the area.
These rocks rest on younger formation of Shimla Group. The Jutog formation comprises
of highly metamorphosed sediments. The original marine sediments have now been
altered into compact quartizite schists and gneisses. Black carbonaceous schists
66
constitute a significant part of this formation. Instrusions of granite are present in the
extension of these rocks towards the east.
2. Shali Formation: These occur as a narrow NNW to SSE trending belt bounded
on both the western and eastern sides by faults. This formation consists mainly of
calcareous rocks, limestone and dolomite with minor amount of quartzite, shale and
siltstone.
3. Shimla Groups of Rocks: The Shimla slates occur around Domehar, Shangi,
Pandher and Kamlog. The Sjimla slates are dark coloured, with gray blue tints and are
made up to micaceous shales, slates, occasional phyllite sandstone with predominant
gray wakes. A number of limestone bands occur in the lower horizone of the Shimla
slates series. Another band of massive limestone occurs on the ridge at Arki while yet
another overlies sandstone and marl on the Gandhal, Majhatu Baraghat ridge. Different
recognized formations of this group, found in the Kunihar Division are as follows:
A) Kunihar Formation: This formation is developed near Subathu through
Kakarhatti and Kunihar up to Bamol. It consists of shale siltstone with alternating bands
of limestone. It is characterized by general lack of carbonaceous beds and by the
occurrence of limestone inter beds with shale and silt stones showing ripple arks. Some
lime stone bands show algal structures showing water, near shore condition of
deposition.
B) Chhaosa Formation: This formation is well exposed between Danoghat and
Thalog. Its development can also be seen from near Sabathu. The Chhaosa formations
are characterized by a thick rhythmic sequence of well bedded shale, silt stone and
greywacke. The shales are grey olive green and purple in colour. Bands of quartizite are
also present.
4 Blaini Formation: This formation is one of the most important formations of the
Shimla Himalayas because of its significance in fixing the age of the other formation
below and above it. This formation is deposited during upper carbonaceous period when
there was wide spread glaciations in this part of the globe. Glacial boulder beds, shale
and lime stone constitute the different litho units of this formation.
5. Infra Krol Formation: This formation present in a small part of the area SE of
Delgi. It comprises grayish black carbonaceous shale and siltstone. The Infra Krol has
been intricately folded and faulted and shows great variation in the grade of
67
metamorphism. Admixture of Chil and few broad leaved species occur in these
formations.
6. Krol Formation: This formation consists of sandstones, limestone and shale.
Soft slicken sided and crumpled, red and green shale are found above Baran on the Krol
hills. Soft white sandstone and shale occur in nala on the road from Chandi to Badlag.
Chil is the main vegetation on this formation.
7 Sabathu Formation: Rocks of this formation are exposed in the neighborhood of
Sabathu and the area towards north east of it as linear outcrops, trending NW to SSE. It
consists of olive green splintery sales with grey inter bands of limestone. The main crop
of this formation consists of Chil.
8 Shiwalic Groups: These are divided into four different stages as described
below:
A) Kundlu Stage: The name is after the name of village Kundlu. This stage
forms the lower stage of the Shiwalik exposed in the area. This stage occurs
in the anticlinal valleys east of Nalagarh town.
B) Nalagarh Stage: Kundlu stage is overlain by Nalagarh stage which
comprises of sandstone largely micaceous and forms major features, running
north from Nalagarh town. The top zone of this stage consists of maroon
clays and buff sandy clays alternating rhythmically with a few fossil fragments
in places.
C) Sutlaj Stage: it overlies the Nalagarh stage and has exposed sandstones in
NW of Riwalsar. The massive beds of sandstone upto 16 meters and more in
thickness are interbeded with bright clay bands. The sandstone is gray or of
light brown colour forming the topmost horizon of the lower.
D) Middle Shiwalik: These consist of brown to whitish colour sandstones and
bright coloured clays. In the east they are cut by the Gambhar Thrust, which
has brought older rocks over them. Their western boundary is also affected
by a fault in this area.
9. Terraces and Alluvial Deposits: These are encountered in Doon portion in the
south in Kunihar region and on a limited scale all over the tract as flood-plain
traces. The alluvial deposits in Kunihar actually start somewhere in the North of
Arki town and occur in the lesser Himalayan zone.
68
Hydrogeology: The Hydrogeology map of Solan District, obtained from HP Government

Document is given in Figure 3.1.
Figure 3.1 Hydrogeological Map of Solan District

69
Rainfall starts from the end of June and extends till the middle of September with snow
fall in the upper reaches above the elevation of 1700 m AMSL. April, May, June, October
and November are the driest months. The average annual rainfall in the area is about
1425 mm. Due to its altitudes the climate varies from mild to cold. The typical geographic
location of the study area gives rise to variegated climatic zones. The minimum
temperature drops down to 30C during winter and summers the maximum temperature
touches 400C. The relative humidity varies from 28% to 92% through out the year. The
relative humidity is in the higher range between 80 to 90% during rainy season and
during the remaining period of nine months the relative humidity varies from 30 to 50%.
The study area falls under Seismic Zone V. The topography of the area is highly
undulating terrain traversed by hills of height ranging from 480 m to 2360 m. The
minimum and maximum elevation occurs in the north east region of the study area. The
elevations are indicative of the nature of undulating terrain in the study area. The central
part of the study area though presents an undulating topography does not indicate wide
variation in the elevation. The average elevation of the plant site is 1550 m AMSL.
The orogeny is young and the formations are being affected severely by the
denudational agencies. The multi directional stress has affected the formations resulting
in intricate structure. The difference in hardness and composition can be contributed to
the fact that the ranges are not of definite pattern and of no definite formational wise
ranges.
The drainage pattern of the area is dendritic in nature and is traversed by gullies which
carry the excess water during the rainy season from the source to the lower portions of
the hill ranges. The streams in the lower portion of the study area attain the perennial
status discharging the water received from the gullies located on the upper reaches.
These dry seasonal nallas join the Gyana khud, which ultimately meets the westerly
flowing Dhamla khud. The rivers traversing the study area are said to have formed an
antecedent drainage since they were in existence before the formation of Himalayas. As
the mountains grew the rivers continued to excavate their valleys thus maintained their
pre existing course. The drainage of the study area is controlled by River Sutlej. The
tributaries of river Sutlej drain the study area in the NW and North of the plant site. The
70
source of water for the existing and the proposed plant is Pazeena khud (Pagoda Khud),
an out fall point from the river Sutlej located in the NE at a distance of about 8 Kms.
There are sufficient water sources both for drinking and irrigation.
The study area is covered by catchments area of Satluj river. Soil is generally sandy
loam and soil depth is generally shallow except in areas having good vegetative cover. It
is generally dry, shallow and deficient in organic matter. The study area comprises
mostly of alluvial deposits of Quaternary age.
Tropical dry deciduous forests, sub-tropical pine and Himalayan moist temperature
forests predominate in the study area. The main minerals extracted are limestone,
dolomite and gypsum. Stone cutting is also prevalent in the study area. The topography
is represented by steeply rising hills and restricts the mobility to defined routes and
tracks only. However, the hill ranges are aligned in general in northwest - southeast
direction.
The topography of the area indicates that the ground water potential is restricted to lower
reaches, which are recharged by the perennial surface water sources. However from the
topography of the area it is indicated that the occurrence of ground water is restricted
only to the plain. The upper reaches to which most of the villages are confined and do
not have any indication of aquifer and also any catchment to recharge the aquifer if at all
present. The location of bore wells around plant area may have been springs of the past.
The depth to water table in this bore wells is in the range of 15 m to 18 m below ground
level.
However, in the mining area the morphology and the nature of strata give no indication
of possible water bearing horizons and hence any mining will not hamper any water
source. Very little quantity of stream water is used for agricultural purpose on the low
lying areas along the stream. The villagers use tap water supplied through pipelines laid
by State Government for drinking purposes.
From the above it can be observed that the occurrence of ground water is restricted only
to the plain and lower reaches due to the topography. The highly undulating hilly terrain
71
makes the area highly unsuitable for ground water recharge, as the surface flows are
very fast and do not have any retention time for the precipitated water to infiltrate into the
ground. Thus the ground water occurrence is highly localized. Similarly due to the steep
flows the streams in the upper reaches drain away early in to the streams or rivers in the
lower reaches or the plains. The stream in the upper reaches are ephemeral in nature as
they flow only during the monsoon season only and the streams in the lower reaches
and the plains attain perennial status by deriving water drained from the streams of the
upper reaches.
Extract from hydrogeological report prepared by R.P. Agrawal (former Regional Director,
CGWB) of the study area (Rauri clinkerization plant, Suli cement Plant and Kashlog
mine) is attached as Annexure-6.
3.3 Meteorology
The plant is located at 1550 m MSL. Meteorological monitoring station has been
established on roof top of Guest House of Staff Colony, which is located at 1665 m MSL.
Wind speed, wind direction, ambient temperature and relative humidity values were
noted on hourly basis. The wind rose diagram for winter season 2008-09 and summer
season 2011 is given in Figure 3.2 and 3.3 respectively.
3.3.1 Meteorological Observations
Wind Direction: The predominant wind direction at site during winter season is from
east direction. The second most dominant wind direction is from northeast. During
summer 2011 the predominant wind direction is from SEE and SE sector.
Wind Speed: The average wind speed at site during the monitoring period is observed
to be 13.7 kmph (3.8 m/s). The maximum wind speed was found to be 39.6 kmph (11
m/s). During the monitoring period 7.5% time was calm (<0.5 m/s).
Temperature – December and January constitutes winter months. Daily mean minimum
temperature was found to be 2.5oC and daily mean maximum temperature 19.5oC.
72
during summer season 2011 the maximum temperature was 35oC and daily mean
minimum temperature 10.0oC
Figure 3.2 Wind Rose Diagram (Winter Season 2008-09)
73
Figure 3.3 Wind Rose Diagram (Summer Season 2011)
Relative Humidity – The air is generally dry in the region except during monsoon. High
humidity is found during daytime and low humidity during nighttime. During winter 2008-
09 the maximum humidity was 79% and minimum humidity was 18%. During summer
season 2011 the maximum humidity was 88% and minimum humidity was 30%.
74
Rainfall – The annual total rainfall is 1424 mm. Over 80% of the total annual rainfall is
received during June to September. During the study period 212 mm rainfall occurred.
Mixing Height : Mixing Height values of the study area has been obtained from
isopleths given in CPCB Publication “Spatial Distribution of Hourly Mixing Depth over
Indian Region“-PROBES/88/2003-03, which is given below.
Time (IST) Winter Season, in m
7.00 50
8.00 100
9.00 200
10.00 500
11.00 600
12.00 800
13.00 1000
14.00 1100
15.00 1000
16.00 1000
17.00 1000
18.00 700
Stable and calm conditions are observed during night time, after 9 PM onwards till 4 AM.
During day time the wind speeds are higher and the stability class varies from B to C. No
overcast conditions are observed during the day time.
3.4 Ambient Air Quality
The ambient air quality monitoring locations for winter season (Dec 2008 to Feb 2009)
and summer season (April to June 2011) are shown in Table 3.2 and Figure 3.4. The
ambient air quality results for both the seasons are presented in Tables 3.3 and 3.4.
The metelic contents of RSPM are given in Table 3.5 and Table 3.6.
75
Table 3.2 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations:

S.N. Name of Distance Distance wrt Environmental Setting
Location wrt Cement Mine
(winter Season Plant
Dec 2008 to Feb
2009)
1 Rauri village 0.5 km NNE 4.2 km W Rural area (upwind of cement plant &
down wind of mines)
2 Bated village 1.5 km S 5.5 km WSW Rural area
Cross wind direction
3 Pechuri (colony) 0.8 km NW 4.0 km W Residential area
4 Bahan 1.8 km SW 4.0 WSW Rural area (downwind of cement plant

and mines)
5 Darlaghat 1.5 km SE 3.6 km SW Mixed use
6 Khata village 0.5 km NE 3.5 km WSW Rural area (upwind of cement plant)
7 Chandi 5.5 km ENE 1.5 km NE Forests (near Majhthal Sanctuary)

Upwind of mines
8 Dhundan village 3.2 km SW 5.5 km WSW Rural area (downwind of cement
plant)
9 Surajpur 6.0 km 7.2 km SW Forest area (near Piplughat
SSW sanctuary)
10 Gayana village 5.0 km ESE 1.2 km SW Rural area (downwind of mines)
Table 3.3 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results (24-h avg)

(Winter Season Dec 2008 to Feb 2009)
S.N. Location SPM in µg/m3 RSPM in µg/m3 SO2 in µg/m3 NO2 in µg/m3 Free
Silica
µg/m3
Max Min Mean Max Min Mean Max Min Mean Max Min Mean Mean
1 Rauri 160 118 139 55 42 48 9.5 5.8 7.1 13.0 8.6 10.2 8
2 Batel 162 115 135 58 40 47 8.3 6.0 7.0 12.6 9.4 10.5 5
3 Pachuri 156 110 132 52 38 42 5.9 4.0 5.5 <9.0 <9.0 <9.0 4
4 Bahan 132 109 113 42 29 36 7.0 4.0 5.0 10.2 9.0 9.2 5
5 Darlaghat 158 116 136 55 42 46 10.5 5.3 8.2 16.9 9.0 11.2 9
6 Khata 154 112 130 52 37 42 8.8 4.7 7.2 18.2 9.0 11.0 7
7 Chandi 124 98 106 40 33 38 4.9 4.0 4.3 <9.0 <9.0 <9.0 6
8 Dhundan 112 82 94 39 30 37 <4.0 <4.0 <4.0 <9.0 <9.0 <9.0 5
9 Surajpur 102 80 88 38 26 32 <4.0 <4.0 <4.0 <9.0 <9.0 <9.0 3
10 Gyana 115 80 93 41 32 38 <4.0 <4.0 <4.0 <9.0 <9.0 <9.0 4
76
Table 3.4 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results (24-h avg) (Summer Season 2011)
AAQ Monitoring Location

Parameter Unit Test Methods Rauri village Bated village National Standard
Max Min Mean Max Min Mean
40 CFR USEPA Chapter
1 PM2.5 μg/m3 28 18 24 29 17 25 60 (24-hours average)
1-Part 50 AP-L
2 PM10 μg/m3 IS-5182-P-23-2006 58 41 50 62 41 53 100 (24-hours average)
3 Sulpher dioxide (SO2) μg/m3 IS-5182-P-2-2001 9.8 5.0 7.5 9.2 5.6 7.2 80 (24-hours average)
4 Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) μg/m 3
IS-5182-P-6-2006 14.5 9.0 10.8 13.5 9.2 10.2 80 (24-hours average)
5 Free Silica μg/m3 ---- 11 6 8 8 3 5 ----
Continued------
Parameter Pechuri (Colony) Bahan village National Standard
Unit Test Methods
1-Part 50 AP-L
3 Sulpher dioxide (SO2) μg/m 3
4 Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) μg/m3 IS-5182-P-6-2006 10.2 9.0 9.3 10.6 9.0 9.5 80 (24-hours average)
5 Free Silica μg/m3 ---- 10 4 6 9 3 5 ----
77
Continued------

Parameter Darlaghat Khata Village National Standard
Unit Test Methods
1-Part 50 AP-L
5 Free Silica μg/m3 ---- 13 5 9 7 3 5 ----
Continue---
Parameter Dhundan village Surajpur National Standard
Unit Test Methods
1-Part 50 AP-L
2 PM10 μg/m3 IS-5182-P-23-2006 48 36 42 42 31 36 100(8-hours average)
3 Sulpher dioxide (SO2) μg/m3 IS-5182-P-2-2001 5.6 4.0 4.7 4.9 4.0 4.2 80 (24-hours average)
5 Free Silica μg/m 3
---- 8 4 5 6 2 4 ----
78
Continued------

Parameter Gyana village National Standard
Unit Test Methods
Max Min Mean
40 CFR USEPA Chapter 1-
1 PM2.5 μg/m3 26 18 22 60 (24-hours average)
Part 50 AP-L
2 PM10 μg/m3 IS-5182-P-23-2006 49 37 43 100(8-hours average)
3 Sulpher dioxide (SO2) μg/m3 IS-5182-P-2-2001 5.2 4.0 4.4 80 (24-hours average)
IS-5182-P-6-2006 10.4 9.0 9.5 80 (24-hours average)
5 Free Silica μg/m 3
---- 9 4 6 ----
Continued------

Parameter Chandi Village National Standard
Unit Test Methods
Max Min Mean
40 CFR USEPA Chapter 1-
1 PM2.5 μg/m3 24 17 21 60 (24-hours average)
Part 50 AP-L
2 PM10 μg/m3 IS-5182-P-23-2006 45 38 41 100(8-hours average)
6 Free Silica μg/m3 --- 8 3 5 ---
79
Table 3.5 Chemical Characterisation of RSPM (Winter Season 2008-09)

S.N. Location Lead (Pb) μg/m3 Arsenic (As) ng/m3 Nickel (Ni) ng/m3
Max Min Std. Max Min Std. Max Min Std.
1 Rauri <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
2 Batel <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
3 Pachuri <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
4 Bahan <0.1 <0.1 1.0 <0.01 <0.01 06 <0.01 <0.01 20
5 Darlaghat <0.1 <0.1 24 hr <0.01 <0.01 annual <0.01 <0.01 annual
avg. Avg. avg.
6 Khata <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
7 Chandi <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
8 Dhundan <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
9 Surajpur <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
10 Gyana <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Table 3.6 Chemical Characterisation of RSPM (Summer Season 2011)

S.N. Location Lead (Pb) μg/m3 Arsenic (As) ng/m3 Nickel (Ni) ng/m3
Max Min Std. Max Min Std. Max Min Std.
1 Rauri <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
2 Batel <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
3 Pachuri <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
4 Bahan <0.1 <0.1 1.0 <0.01 <0.01 06 <0.01 <0.01 20
5 Darlaghat <0.1 <0.1 24 hr <0.01 <0.01 annual <0.01 <0.01 annual
avg. Avg. avg.
6 Khata <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
7 Chandi <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
8 Dhundan <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
9 Surajpur <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
10 Gyana <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
3.4.1 Observation on Ambient Air Quality

Winter Season (2008-2009): The ambient air quality of all the locations is well within the
national ambient air quality standards. The 24-hour average residential area standards
for SPM, RSPM, SO2 and NOx level are 200, 100, 80 and 80 µg/m3. No abnormal values
have been found with respect to Heavy Metals presence in the dust of ambient air.
80
3.5 Ambient Noise Quality
Ambient noise measurements were done on 10 different locations of different category

during the winter season 2008-09 as well as in summer season 2011. One sample per
station was taken. Measurements were noted at an interval of 5 seconds over a period
of 10 minutes per hour for 24-hours. Noise meter capable of noting Leq has been used,
which is the equivalent continuous sound level measured over the time period. Sound
from noise source often fluctuates widely during a given period of time, hence Leq gives
correct observation of the average sound level. The noise monitoring locations and
results for winter season 2008-09 are presented in Table 3.7. Noise monitoring location
and results for summer season 2011 is shown in Table 3.8.
Table 3.7 Ambient Noise Quality Results of the Study Area (winter Season 2008-09)
Name of Day time National Night National Category
Location dB(A) Leq Standard time Standard
(day time) dB(A)Leq (Night time)
dB(A) Leq dB(A) Leq
1 Rauri village 47.5 55 40.2 45 Residential
2 Cement Plant 65.3 75 61.6 70 Industrial
Gate
3 Pachuri (colony) 52.6 55 43.4 45 Residential
4 Bahan 46.5 55 40.5 45 Residential
5 Darlaghat 61.8 65 53.4 55 Commercial
(Market)
6 Khata village 45.3 55 40.2 45 Residential
7 Chandi 43.1 55 39.1 45 Residential
8 Dhundan village 46.3 55 41.0 45 Residential
9 Near Piplughat 42.3 50 38.6 40 Sensitive
sancturay
10 Near Darlaghat 43.2 50 38.7. 40 Sensitive
sanctuary
82
Table 3.8 Ambient Noise Quality Results of the Study Area (Summer Season 2011)
Standard Standard
Name of Day time Night time
Day time Night time Category
Location dB(A) Leq dB(A) Leq
dB(A) Leq dB(A) Leq
1 Rauri village 49.1 55.0 40.6 45.0 Residential
Cement Plant
2 66.8 75.0 60.8 65.0 Industrial
Gate
3 Pechuri (Colony) 51.8 55.0 42.8 45.0 Residential
4 Bahan village 47.1 55.0 40.8 45.0 Residential
5 Darlaghat Market 61.4 65.0 52.6 55.0 Commercial
6 Khata Village 46.0 55.0 40.8 45.0 Residential
7 Dhundan village 45.8 55.0 40.9 45.0 Residential
8 Chandi village 44.2 55.0 40.2 45.0 Residential
Near Piplughat
9 42.0 50.0 37.8 40.0 Sensitive
Sanctuary
Near Darlaghat
10 42.8 50.0 38.4 40.0 Sensitive
Sanctuary
3.5.1 Observations on Ambient Noise Quality
Winter Season (2008-09): Day time and night time noise level at all the monitoring
location (residential) was observed to be well within the prescribed standard of 55 dB(A)
during day time and 45 dB(A) during night time. Day time and night time noise level at
the commercial location was observed to be within the prescribed standard of 65 dB(A)
during day time and 55 dB(A) during night time. Day time and night time noise level at
the sensitive location (near sanctuary) was observed to be within the prescribed
standard of 50 dB(A) during day time and 40 dB(A) during night time.
Summer Season (2011): It is observed from the Table 3.8 that the ambient noise quality
of all the monitoring locations is meeting the national standards for day time and night
time with their respective catogories.
83
3.6 Surface and Ground Water Quality
Surface and ground water sampling and analysis were done for winter season 2008-09
as wel as for summer season 2011. Surface water and groundwater samples were
collected from several locations within the study area. The name of sampling locations is
shown in Table 3.9 Procedures specified in Standard Methods (APHA) have been
followed for analysis of water samples. The surface water quality analysis result for
winter season 2008-09 and summer 2011 is shown in Table 3.10 and Table 3.11. The
groundwater quality analysis result for winter season 2008-09 and summer 2011 is
shown in Table 3.12 & Table 3.13.
Table 3.9 Water Sampling Locations

Location Code Location (Summer Location (Winter
Season 2011) Season 2008-09)
Surface Water Sampling Locations
1 SW1 Pazeena (Pagoda) Pazeena (Pagoda)
khud khud
2 SW2 Gyana khud Gyana khud
3 SW3 Dumla khud Dumla khud
4 SW4 Chandi nala Chandi nala
5 SW5 Sutluj River Sutluj River
Ground Water Sampling Locations
1 GW1 Khata village Rauri village
2 GW2 Gyana village Dugniyar village
3 GW3 Rauri village Chandi
4 GW4 Darlaghat Darlaghat
5 GW5 Bated Khata village
6 GW6 Surapur Kansawala
7 GW7 Dhundan Giyana village
8 GW8 Bahan village Mangu village
84
Table 3.10 Analysis Results of Surface Water (Winter Season 2008-09)
Parameters SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

1 pH 7.35 7.64 7.55 7.53 7.14
2 Conductivity, μmhos/cm 384 415 230 355 340
3 Temperature, deg C 20 20 20 20 20
4 Dissolved Oxygen 5.6 5.3 5.4 5.2 5.3
5 Turbidity (NTU) 5 4 3 3 5
6 Dissolved solids 254 275 152 232 220
7 Suspended solids 10 11 4 5 11
8 Total Hardness as CaCO3 214 210 124 216 84
9 BOD 0.15 0.14 0.15 0.15 0.12
10 COD 10 12 12 14 8
11 Chlorides as Cl 17 21 14 17 14
12 Sulphates as SO4 6.5 5.8 6.8 4.8 5.4
13 Nitrates as NO3 3.0 3.4 2.5 2.3 2.1
14 Fluorides as F 0.68 0.69 0.75 0.82 0.73
15 Iron as Fe 0.015 0.012 0.04 0.014 0.013
16 Lead as Pb NT NT NT NT NT
17 Copper as Cu NT NT NT NT NT
18 Mercury as Hg NT NT NT NT NT
19 Nickel as Ni NT NT NT NT NT
20 Zinc as Zn 0.13 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.12
21 Chromium ( Total as Cr) NT NT NT NT NT
22 Arsenic as As NT NT NT NT NT
23 Manganese as Mn NT NT NT NT NT
24 Cadmium as Cd NT NT NT NT NT
25 Oil and grease NT NT NT NT NT
26 Total Coliform MPN/100ml 36 42 32 39 23
All parameters are in mg/l unless specified. NT denote not traceable (<0.1 mg/l)
85
Table 3.11 Analysis Results of Surface Water (Summer Season 2011)

Parameters Unit Method SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
1 pH - APHA-4500 7.45 7.22 7.34 7.46 7.28
2 Conductivity μmhos/cm APHA-4500 380 435 265 342 324
3 Dissolved Oxygen mg/l APHA-4500C 3.8 3.8 3.1 4.5 4.2
4 Turbidity NTU APHA-2030B 4 5 3 4 3
5 Dissolved solids mg/l APHA-2540B 262 289 239 219
184
6 Suspended solids mg/l APHA-2540D 9 10 5 6 7
7 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l APHA-2340C 200 196 128 204 104
8 BOD mg/l APHA-5210-B <1.5 <1.5 <1.5 <1.5 <1.5
9 COD mg/l APHA-5220D 12 14 11 13 11
10 Chlorides as Cl mg/l APHA-4500B 15 21 10 15 15
11 Sulphates as SO4 mg/l APHA-4500E 6.1 5.4 6.4 5.2 5.3
12 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l APHA-4500 2.9 3.2 2.8 2.5 2.2
13 Calcium as Ca mg/l APHA-3500B 56 48 41 52 32
14 Magnesium as Mg mg/l APHA-3500B 13.4 18.5 6.2 18.0 5.8
15 Flourides as F mg/l APHA-4500D 0.70 0.71 0.74 0.80 0.75
16 Iron as Fe mg/l APHA-3111B 0.018 0.015 0.03 0.016 0.014
17 Lead as Pb mg/l APHA-3111B <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
18 Copper as Cu mg/l APHA-3111B <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02
19 Mercury as Hg mg/l APHA-3112 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
20 Nickel as Ni mg/l APHA-3111B <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
21 Zinc as Zn mg/l APHA-3111B 0.20 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.14
22 Chromium (as Cr) mg/l APHA-3111B <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005
23 Arsenic as As mg/l APHA-3114 <0.025 <0.025 <0.025 <0.025 <0.025
24 Manganese as Mn mg/l APHA-3111B <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
25 Cadmium as Cd mg/l APHA-3111B <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
26 Oil and grease mg/l APHA-4500D <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
27 Total Coliform MPN/100ml MPN/100 ml APHA-9230 36 46 38 41 32
86
Table 3.12 Analysis Results of Ground Water (Winter Season 2008-09)

Parameters GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4
1 pH 7.32 7.31 7.67 7.25
2 Conductivity, μmhos/cm 432 600 410 460
o
3 Temperature, C 22 22 22 22
4 Turbidity (NTU) 2 3 3 3
5 Dissolved solids 284 281 269 302
6 Suspended solids 6 5 6 6
7 Total Hardness as CaCO3 140 360 132 129
8 Total Alkanity as CaCO3 182 256 170 203
9 Calcium as Ca 44 100 40 38
10 Magnesium as Mg 6..7 24.6 7.1 7.2
11 Chlorides as Cl 21 14 14 21
12 Sulphates as SO4 6.8 6.6 6.5 6.7
13 Nitrates as NO3 1.2 1.2 1.15 1.3
14 Flourides as F 0.65 0.68 0.65 0.72
15 Iron as Fe 0.013 0.015 0.010 0.015
16 Lead as Pb NT NT NT NT
17 Copper as Cu NT NT NT NT
18 Mercury as Hg NT NT NT NT
19 Nickel as Ni NT NT NT NT
20 Zinc as Zn 0.53 0.44 1.10 1.15
21 Chromium (Total as Cr) NT NT NT NT
22 Arsenic as As NT NT NT NT
23 Manganese as Mn NT NT NT NT
24 Cadmium as Cd NT NT NT NT
25 Oil and Grease NT NT NT NT
26 Total coliform MPN/100ml NT NT NT NT
87
Table 3.12 continue ----

Parameters GW5 GW6 GW7 GW8
1 pH 8.27 7.52 7.49 7.38
2 Conductivity, μmhos/cm 380 921 520 384
o
3 Temperature, C 22 22 22 22
4 Turbidity (NTU) 2 4 3 3
5 Dissolved solids 249 604 334 254
6 Suspended solids 5 8 8 5
7 Total Hardness as CaCO3 210 260 230 184
8 Total Alkalinity as CaCO3 160 408 190 168
9 Calcium as Ca 68 48 76 61
10 Magnesium as Mg 9.0 34 8.9 7.8
11 Chlorides as Cl 21 31 21 45
12 Sulphates as SO4 6.0 22 8.9 5.7
13 Nitrates as NO3 1.10 2.0 2.0 1.1
14 Fluorides as F 0.65 0.86 0.69 0.72
15 Iron as Fe 0.010 0.024 0.040 0.020
16 Lead as Pb NT NT NT NT
17 Copper as Cu NT NT NT NT
18 Mercury as Hg NT NT NT NT
19 Nickel as Ni NT NT NT NT
20 Zinc as Zn 0.60 1.20 0.60 0.70
21 Chromium (Total as Cr) NT NT NT NT
22 Arsenic as As NT NT NT NT
23 Manganese as Mn NT NT NT NT
24 Cadmium as Cd NT NT NT NT
25 Oil and Grease NT NT NT NT
26 Total coliform MPN/100ml NT NT NT NT
All parameters are in mg/l unless specified. NT denote not traceable (<0.1 mg/l)
88
Table 3.13 Analysis Results of Ground Water (Summer Season 2011)

Permissible limit
Rauri Darlagh Khata Gyana
Parameters Unit Test Methods for drinking
village at village village
IS:10500:1991
1 pH - APHA-4500-2005 6.5 – 8.5 6.58 6.91 6.78 7.96
2 Conductivity μmhos/cm APHA-2510-2005 - 342 627 351 475
3 Turbidity NTU APHA-2030B-2005 10 4 3 2 3
4 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l APHA-2540B-2005 2000 230 424 252 326
5 Total Suspended Solids mg/l APHA-2540D-2005 - 8 6 5 6
6 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l APHA-2340C-2005 600 180 300 180 250
7 Calcium as Ca mg/l APHA-4500B-2005 200 52 60 44 68
8 Magnesium as Mg mg/l APHA-4500B-2005 100 12.2 36.6 17.0 19.5
9 Chlorides as Cl mg/l APHA-4500B-2005 1000 10 20 10 25
10 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l APHA-4500-2005 100 2.8 7.2 6.4 7.5
11 Fluoride as F mg/l APHA-4500D-2005 1.5 0.65 0.66 0.64 0.66
12 Phosphates as PO4 mg/l APHA-4500C-2005 0.3 0.024 0.032 0.038 0.024
13 Iron as Fe mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 1.0 0.014 0.018 0.014 0.020
14 Copper as Cu mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 1.5 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02
15 Lead as Pb mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
16 Manganese as Mn mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.3 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
17 Zinc as Zn mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 15 0.20 0.94 0.86 0.86
18 Chromium mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.05 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005
19 Nickel as Ni mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
20 Oil & Grease mg/l APHA-5520D-2005 0.03 Nil Nil Nil Nil
21 Cadmium as Cd mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
22 Mercury as Hg mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.05 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
23 Arsenic as As mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.05 <0.025 <0.025 <0.025 <0.025
24 Selenium as Se mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
25 Cobalt as Co mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
26 Total coliform MPN/100 ml APHA-9230B-2005 Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil
89
Table 3.13 Continued …..

Permissible limit
Dhundan Bahan Bated Surajp
Parameters Unit Test Methods for drinking
village village village ur
IS:10500:1991
1 pH - APHA-4500-2005 6.5 – 8.5 7.58 8.13 6.97 6.84
2 Conductivity μmhos/cm APHA-2510-2005 - 199 258 342 722
3 Turbidity NTU APHA-2030B-2005 10 2 2 3 3
4 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l APHA-2540B-2005 2000 148 212 228 482
5 Total Suspended Solids mg/l APHA-2540D-2005 - 5 5 6 7
6 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l APHA-2340C-2005 600 100 130 180 290
7 Calcium as Ca mg/l APHA-4500B-2005 200 28 40 44 48
8 Magnesium as Mg mg/l APHA-4500B-2005 100 7.3 7.3 17.0 41.4
9 Chlorides as Cl mg/l APHA-4500B-2005 1000 10 20 10 20
10 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l APHA-4500-2005 100 5.8 6.2 5.4 7.9
11 Fluoride as F mg/l APHA-4500D-2005 1.5 0.62 0.64 0.58 0.64
12 Phosphates as PO4 mg/l APHA-4500C-2005 0.3 0.026 0.028 0.022 0.032
13 Iron as Fe mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 1.0 0.012 0.016 0.018 0.022
14 Copper as Cu mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 1.5 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02
15 Lead as Pb mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
16 Manganese as Mn mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.3 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
17 Zinc as Zn mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 15 0.82 0.080 0.92 1.0
18 Chromium mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.05 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005
19 Nickel as Ni mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
20 Oil & Grease mg/l APHA-5520D-2005 0.03 Nil Nil Nil Nil
21 Cadmium as Cd mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
22 Mercury as Hg mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.05 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
23 Arsenic as As mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.05 <0.025 <0.025 <0.025 <0.025
24 Selenium as Se mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
25 Cobalt as Co mg/l APHA-3111B-2005 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
MPN/100
26 Total coliform APHA-9230B-2005 Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil
ml
90
3.6.1 Observation on Water Quality of Study Area
The surface water quality of study area did not show any sign of pollution. No metallic or
domestic contamination is observed in the surface water samples. The value of all
parameters in all the samples are well within the limit for drinking IS: 10500:1991. The
ground water quality did not show any evidence of oil, metallic or bacterial
contamination.
3.7 Soil Quality
Six soil samples were collected for determining the physical and chemical characteristics
of the soils of the study area. At each location, soil samples were collected from three
different depths, 1-5 cm, 10-20 cm and 40-50 cm below the surface. The samples were
homogenized and the quantity was reduced using the coning and quartering method.
The samples were packed in polyethylene bags and analyzed for relevant for physico-
chemical parameters. The soil sampling locations is shown in Table 3.14. The analysis
result is shown in Table 3.15 and Table 3.16.
Table 3.14 Soil Sampling Locations

Location Code Location
1 S1 Rauri village
2 S2 Kaslog Mine
3 S3 Bahan
4 S4 Darlaghat
5 S5 Khata village
6 S6 Dhundan village
91
Table 3.15 Soil Quality Analysis Results (Winter Season 2008-09)

Parameters S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
3
1 Bulk Density; g/cm 1.14 1.42 1.19 1.23 1.26 1.21
3 Organic matter; % 0.55 0.54 0.52 0.56 0.52 0.59
4 Water Holding 33 34 33 37 32 35
Capacity %
5 pH (20% slurry) 7.09 8.61 6.8 7.4 6.85 6.71
6 Colure Light Brown Light Brown Brown Brown
brown Brown
7 Texture Clay Sandy Sandy Clay Sandy Clay
Loam Loam Loam Loam Loam Loam
8 Infiltration rate, 6.1 6.0 6.2 4.1 6.2 4.5
cm/hour
9 Bicarbonates, % 0.0030 0.0488 0.0146 0.0438 0.0128 0.0122
10 Chlorides, % 0.0046 0.0071 0.0056 0.0084 0.0044 0.0042
11 Conductivity, 112 78 105 118 56 57
μmhos/cm
12 Potassium, % 0.138 0.142 0.139 0.137 0.122 0.026
13 Phosphorus, % 0.023 0.021 0.025 0.021 0.023 0.025
14 Nitrogen, % 1.51 1.55 1.50 1.53 1.54 0.56
Table 3.16 Soil Quality Analysis Results (Summer Season 2011)

Parameters S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
1 Bulk Density; g/cm3 1.18 1.32 1.22 1.28 1.29 1.19
2 Organic matter; % 0.57 0.57 0.49 0.60 0.54 0.60
Water Holding
3 31 31 30 36 32 36
Capacity, %
4 pH (20% slurry) 6.85 7.68 6.92 6.9 7.23 6.94
Light Light Brow
5 Colure Brown Brown Brown
brown brown n
Sandy Clay Sandy Sandy Clay
6 Texture Clay loam
loam loam loam loam loam
Infiltration rate,
7 5.7 5.6 4.8 4.7 5.2 5.4
cm/hour
8 Bicarbonates, % 0.0040 0.048 0.140 0.030 0.030 0.025
0.004
10 Chlorides, % 0.0035 0.007 0.056 0.007 0.046
0
Conductivity,
9 98 102 64 140 138 84
μmhos/cm
10 Potassium, % 0.20 0.19 0.21 0.48 0.22 0.24
11 Phosphorus, % 0.024 0.022 0.23 0.026 0.021 0.026
12 Nitrogen, % 1.44 1.50 1.46 1.47 1.48 1.20
92
3.7.1 Observation on Soil Quality
The soil quality of study area is sandy clay loam to sandy loam. Organic matter and NPK
are found in moderate amount. The fertility of the soil is Moderate. The soil of Kashlog is
found to be sandy texture.
3.8 Ecology
3.8.1 Flora
The forests of the study area fall under Kunihar Forest Division. The geographical area
of Kunihar Forest Division is 546.572 sq. km. Kunihar Forest Division comprises Arki,
Kunihar, Darla and Kuthar ranges. Range wise forest area of the Kunihar Forest Division
is given below.
Ranges of Kunihar Demarcated Un demarcated Total Forest

Forest Division Protected Forest Protected Forest area (hectares)
1 Darla Range 1856.80 3603.60 5460.40
2 Arki Range 2237.00 2004.40 4241.40
3 Kunihar Range 1097.60 1982.00 3079.60
4 Kuthar Range 850.80 4194.40 5045.20
The altitude difference and biotic influences have caused diversity in vegetation type in
Kunihar Forest Division. The climate is tropical in lower elevation and sub-tropical in
higher elevation. This results in development of following types of forests.
1. Tropical dry deciduous forest : Khair, bamboo (Dendracalamus strictus) with other
broad leaved species like chhal (Anogeissus latifolia), simbal (Bombax ceiba), jhingan
(Lannea coromandelica), bel (aegle marmelos), amaltas (Casia fistula) and many shrub
species like dhavi (woodfordia fruticosa), gandhela (Murraya keonigii), karounda (Carrisa
opaca) etc. are commonly found.
93
2. Sub tropical pine Forest: This type of the forest covers the major tracts of Kunihar
forest division. In this type forest the top canopy is Chil (Pinus roxburghi) only, and there
are very few scattered trees like kainth (Pyrus pashica), kamal (Mallotus phillipinensis)
and daru (Punica granatum) forming second canopy. Ground flora consists of
woodfordia floribunda, chhota jhunjra (Myrsine africana), barberis and grasses like
chrysopogon pulvus, cymbopogon spp. etc.
3. Tropical euphorbia scrub forest: The degraded Chirpine forest fall under this
category. These are the results of adverse biotic influences which are much beyond the
endurance of the forest. Their distribution is related to dry rocky ridges. The list of flora
found in the Kunihar Forest Division, which lies within the 10 km study area around the
mining site and clinker plant site is given in Table 3.17.
Table 3.17 List of Flora found in Kunihar Forest Division

A- Trees
1 Aam Mangifera indica

2 Amaltas Cassia fistula
3 Anwala Emblica officinalis
4 Bahera Terminalia belerica
5 Ban Quercus incana
6 Bans Dendrocalamus strictus
7 Bar Ficus bengalensis
8 Barnasi Feronia limonia
9 Bel Aegle marmelos
10 Beli Limonia acidissima
11 Chamror Ehretia laevis
12 Chhal Anogeissus latifolia
13 Chil Pinus roxbhurghii
14 Darek Melia azadiarchta
15 Dauri Toona serrata
16 Deodar Cedrus deodara
17 Dhak Butea monosperma
18 Dhamman Grewia oppositifolia
19 Dhaul Erythrina suberosa
20 Dhauri Lagerstromia parviflora
21 Fafura Ficus palmate
22 Fagura Ficus recemosa
23 Ganhar Trewia nudiflora
24 Harhar Terminalia chebula
25 Jamun Syzygium cumini
26 Jhingan Lannea coromendelica
27 Kachnar Bauhinia variegata
94
28 Kahu Olea cuspidate

29 Kail Pinua wallichiana
30 Kaimb Mitragyna parviflora
31 Kakar Piatacia integerrrima
32 Kala siris Albizzia odoratissima
33 Kamela Malotus philippinensis
34 Kangu Flacurtia indica
35 Kath ber Zizyphus mauritiana
36 Khair Acacia catechu
37 Khajur Phoenix humilis
38 Khaksa Cornus macrophyla
39 Kharik Celtis ostralis
40 Kusum Schelicher oleosa
41 Major phalli Holarrhena antidysentreica
42 Palang Acer oblongum
43 Pandhyan Ehretia serrata
44 Phaldu Mitragyna parviflora
45 Papal Ficus relegiosa
46 Popular Populus ciliate
47 Pula Kydia calycina
48 Ritha Sapindus mukurossi
49 Safed siris Albizzia lebbek
50 Safeda Eucalyptus sps.
51 Sain Terminalia tomentosa
52 Sandan Ougenia oojenensis
53 Sanjana Moringa oleifera
54 Saru Cupresus torulosa
55 Semal Bombax ceiba
56 Shahtoot Morus alba
57 Shisam Dalbergia sissoo
58 Tittri Rhus punjabensis
59 Toon Cedrela toona
Shrubs & Herbs
1 Alai Caesalpinia decapetala

2 Anchhu Rubus ellipticus
3 Ban nimbu Glycosmis pentaphylla
4 Ban gulab Rosa moschata
5 Ban chemeli Jaminum humile
6 Ban tambaku Solanum indicum
7 Bans Bambusa arundinacea
8 Banwan Myrsine africana
9 Basuti, Arusa Adhotoda vasica
10 Bekhal Prinsepia utilis
11 Bhang Cannabis sativa
12 Binda Colebrookia oppositifolia
13 Charmer Artemisia vulgaris
14 Chilla Casearia tomentosa
15 Dhatura Dhatura suaveolens
16 Dhau Woodfordia fruticosa
95
17 Gendhela Murraya koenigii

18 Harshingar Nyctanthes arbortristis
19 Kali kathi Indigifera hirsuta
20 Karaunda Carissa spinarum
21 Kashmal Berberis lyceum
22 Keor Holarrhena antidysenterica
23 Kingora Barberis asiatica
24 Lantana Lantana camara
25 Mithiari Hedera helix
26 Panibel Vitis parviflora
27 Panwal Cassia tora
28 Safed kathi Desmodium tiliaefolium
29 Saun Crotolatia albida
30 Taur Bauhinia vahlii
31 Thor Euphorbia royleana
32 Trimal Zanthoxylum alatum
33 White jasmine Jasminum officinale
34 Ramban Agave americana
Grasses
Local Name Botanical Name
1 Bhabhar Eulaliopsis binata
2 Dhaulu Chrysopogon fulvus
3 Dub Cynodon dactylon
4 Kans Saccharum spontaneum
5 Lamb Heteropogon contortus
6 Makora Cymbopogon martini
7 Munj Saccharum munja
3.8.2 Flora of the Mining Site
The flora of the mining site is shown in Table 3.18 to 3.22
Table 3.18 Phyto-Sociological Studies Near Chandi Village

Name of the Plant Species R.B R.D R.Fr IVI
Abutilan indicum 0.06 0.48 1.16 1.70
Acacia marsinii 1.08 0.97 1.73 3.78
Achyranthes aspera 0.01 4.68 3.47 8.15
Albizzia amara 2.34 0.65 2.31 5.30
Albizzia lebbeck 5.20 0.81 2.31 8.32
Berberia lycicum 4.33 3.87 4.05 12.25
Boerhaevia diffusa 0.04 0.97 2.31 3.32
Caesalpina pulcherima 0.12 0.65 1.73 2.49
Carissa carandus 1.36 2.74 3.47 7.57
Cassia tora 0.43 2.42 2.31 5.16
Cedrella toona 6.12 1.13 3.47 10.71
96
Ceiba Pentandra 1.17 0.32 1.16 2.65

Cleome viscose 0.20 4.52 5.20 9.92
Croton bonplandinum 0.40 24.68 4.62 29.70
Dalbergia sissoo 9.08 3.71 4.62 17.42
Euphorbia royleana 1.42 0.65 1.16 3.22
Ficus carica 9.62 5.97 4.62 20.21
Jatropha sp 0.01 0.32 1.16 1.49
Juglans regia 2.08 0.32 1.16 3.56
Lantana camara 0.46 2.58 4.62 7.67
Leucena lecucophloe 3.97 1.13 1.73 6.83
Murraya Koenigii 1.04 1.45 2.89 5.38
Parthenium hesterophorus 0.08 10.48 2.89 13.45
Prunus ceroides 4.15 3.71 5.78 13.64
Prunus domestica 2.38 1.77 3.47 7.63
Punica granutum 4.25 1.94 3.47 9.65
Pyrus communis 5.50 5.97 5.78 17.25
Ricinus communicus 0.75 1.29 2.89 4.93
Rosa moschatus 7.28 4.52 5.78 17.57
Sesbania sp 18.75 1.29 3.47 23.47
Vitex neguno 6.38 4.03 5.20 15.61
Table 3.19 Phyto-Sociological Studies Near Giyana Village

Name of the plant R.B R.D R.Fr IVI
Abutilan indicum 0.04 6.25 2.65 8.94
Acacia mearsiii 1.75 0.66 2.12 4.53
Albizzia amara 8.73 2.47 5.29 16.48
Berberis lycicum 5.02 2.63 3.70 11.36
Blumea lacera 2.33 13.32 3.17 18.82
Capparis aphylla 1.03 1.48 2.12 4.63
Carandus carandus 2.02 4.11 5.29 11.42
Cassia tora 1.29 7.40 2.65 11.34
Cedrella toona 10.63 1.64 4.76 17.03
Ceiba Pentandra 4.06 0.66 2.12 6.83
Euphorbia cambelabrum 2.07 1.97 3.70 7.75
Ficus carica 7.24 4.61 5.29 17.13
Ficus retusa 4.98 2.30 4.76 12.05
Ficus tringularis 3.65 0.82 2.65 7.12
Juglans regia 3.82 0.66 2.12 6.59
97
Leucas aspera 0.98 5.59 5.29 11.86

Parthenium hesterophorus 0.08 11.84 5.29 17.22
Prunus ceroides 4.39 2.30 4.76 11.45
Punica granutum 5.85 2.63 5.29 13.77
Pyrus communis 2.33 1.48 1.59 5.39
Rosa moschatus 2.39 1.97 2.65 7.01
Sesbania sp 7.27 0.66 2.12 10.05
Table 3.20 Phyto-Sociological Studies Near Banli Village

Name of plant R.B R.D R.Fr IVI
Abutilon indicum 0.01 7.52 4.3 11.90
Albizzia amara 6.01 1.96 4.92 12.89
Cassia tora 0.20 1.31 1.64 3.14
Cedrella toona 5.96 1.31 1.64 8.93
Ceiba pentandra 2.62 0.82 2.73 6.17
Croton bonplandinum 0.14 10.29 3.28 13.71
Ficus carica 4.01 2.94 3.28 13.71
Jatropha sp 0.04 1.47 2.19 3.69
Juglans regia 7.42 0.82 2.73 10.97
Lantana camara 0.47 3.10 4.92 8.49
Parthenium hysterophorus 0.09 14.54 3.28 17.91
Prunus ceroides 4.33 4.58 3.28 17.91
Punica granutum 6.24 3.27 4.37 13.83
Pyruscommunis 6.46 5.23 5.46 17.15
Rosa moschatus 3.48 3.10 3.83 10.41
Sesbania sp 16.02 1.31 3.28 20.61
Table 3.21 Phyto-Sociological Studies Near Mangu Village

Name of Plant R.B R.D R.Fr IVI
Acacia marsinii 1.97 4.50 4.71 11.18
Albizzia amara 0.68 0.48 1.5 2.74
98
Berberia lycicum 2.67 6.11 4.71 13.49

Blumera lacera 0.01 0.64 1.57 2.22
Cassia tora 0.38 5.47 4.19 10.04
Cederlla toona 1.36 0.64 1.57 3.57
Ceiba pentandra 2.60 1.61 3.14 7.35
Delonix regia 0.68 0.48 1.57 2.74
Ficus carica 2.53 4.02 4.71 11.26
Juglans regia 0.81 0.32 1.05 2.18
Lantana camara 0.16 2.25 3.14 5.55
Murraya koenigli 0.85 3.05 3.66 7.57
Pinus roxburgli 56.63 11.58 2.62 10.36
Prunus ceroides 1.19 2.73 2.62 10.36
Punica granutum 2.76 3.22 4.19 10.16
Pyrus communis 1.62 2.57 3.66 7.867
Rosa moschatus 4.35 6.91 5.24 16.50
Sesbania sp 5.49 0.96 2.62 9.07
Vitex neguno 0.28 4.02 5.24 9.54
Wood fordia 1.19 2.73 4.19 8.12
Table 3.22 Phyto-Sociological Studies Near Dhar Village

Name of Plant R.B R.D R.Fr IVI
Abutilon indicum 0.02 4.07` 2.37 6.45
Albizzia amara 2.65 1.22 3.55 7.42
Cassiafistula 1.85 1.22 2.37 5.44
Cassia tora 0.89 8.33 5.33 14.55
Cedrella toona 5.28 1.63 4.14 11.05
Delonix regia 1.63 0.81 1.18 3.07
Euphorbia cambelabrum 7.19 6.50 5.92 19.61
Ficus carica 6.48 6.71 5.33 18.51
Jatropha sp 0.01 0.41 1.18 1.61
Juglans regia 20.44 2.64 5.33 9.15
Lantana camara 0.37 3.46 5.33 9.15
99

Prunus ceroides 1.36 2.03 3.55 6.95
Punica granutum 5.41 3.86 5.33 14.59
Pyruscommunis 3.76 7.11 5.92 16.79
Ricinus communicus 0.05 0.20 059 0.84
Rosa moschatus 2.54 3.25 4.14 9.94
Sesbania sp 14.14 2.03 4.73 20.91
[RB= Relative Basal Area RD= Relative Density R.Fr= Relative Frequency IVI= Importance Value
Index]
3.8.3 Fuana
The variation in altitude in the region provides variety of vegetation and due to this
variety of fauna is found in the study area. Fauna occurs mostly in Pipulaghat and
Majhathal sanctuary. No wildlife has been seen in the mining lease area. The name of
species of Schedule I animals found in the study area are given below.
Mammals
1. Hymalayan black bear (bhalu) - Selenarctos thibetanus :- It is found inhigh
hills of Arki range. During maize season, it comes down to lower elevation and
often seen in the region.
2. Panther (bagh, tendua) - Panthera pardus : - Occasionally seen in the region. It
generally remains in the neighborhood of village, carrying off sheep, goat and
dogs etc.
3. Ghoral – Nemorhaedus goral :- It is generally found in rugged grassy hill sides
or rocky ground in the forest. It is a goat like herbivores animal.
4. Barking Dear (Kakar - Muntiacus muntjac):- It is common and occurs in
Kashlog and forest along the Pipulughat.
5. Indian wild bore (Jungli suar - Sus scrofa):- It is an omnivorous animal
inhabiting grassy, busky and thicky wooden ares. It causes lot of damage to
agricultural crops, forest and plantations.
Besides this the common species of wild animals seen in the forest are monkey
(Presbytes entellus and Macaca mulatta), Lepus nigricollis, Hystrix indica, Vulpus
benghalensis, Neula, Canis aureus, and Felis chaus. Canis aureus are quite common in
100
forest area and black bear are found in the forests. Common peafowl, grey partridge and
white crested kaleel pheasant are numerous. The red jungle fowl is often found in the
forest tracts. The doves and pigeon group is common residents of the area. The aquatic
birds like jal murgi and white breasted water hen are frequently met around the water
bodies. The non games category birds like crows, kign crows, tree pies, magpies, jays
and nut crackers are found commonly in the region. Vultures, eagles, kites and falcon
are the common scavengers found in the area. In addition to this the owls, thrushes,
babblers, flycatures, finches, sparrows bunting, woodpeckers, barbet and hill myna are
also commonly seen in the study area. Some bird like jungle fowl, teetar and Indian
moorhen are captured by local poachers and sold to public in market. The list of fauna
distributed in the Kunihar Forest Division, which lies in the entire study area is given in
Table 3.23
Table 3.23 List of Fauna in Kunihar Forest Division (Source: Forest Working Plan)
Mammals
Zoological name Local / English Name Distribution
1 Selenarctos thibetanus Himalayan black bear Rare
2 Panthera pardus Panther/tendua Rare
3 Nemorhaedus goral Goral Rare
4 Muntiacus muntjac Barking dear / kakar Rare
5 Sus scrofa Wild bore / jungle suar Rare
6 Lepus nigricollis Indian hare/ khargosh Frequent
7 Hystrix indica Porcupine / sayal Frequent
8 Vulpus bengalensis Fox Frequent
9 Canis auries Jackal /gidhar Frequent
10 Macaca mulata Langur Frequent
11 Presbytis phyarei Monkey / bandar Frequent
12 Felis chausaffinis Ban biradi /Jungal cat Frequent
13 Herpestes edwardsi Mangoose Frequent
14 Rattus norvegicus Musa /Field mouse Frequent
Reptiles:
Zoological name English Name Distribution
1 Varanus monitor Common Indian Monitor Common
2 Gecko hemidactalus Common house lizard Common
3 Naja naja Naga / Cobra Common
4 Ancistrodon himalayanus Himalayan pit viper Common
5 Ptyas mucosus Rat snake Common
6 Bungarus candidus Rana / Krait Common
101
Amphibians:
1 Rana hexadactyla Frog Common
Birds:
1 Ploceus philippines Baya /Weaver bird Common
2 Pyonotus cafer Bulbul Common
3 Corvus splendens Kaua / House crow Common
4 Corvus corvus Jangli kau / Jungle crow Common
5 Acridotheres tristicus Myna Common
6 Uroloncha striata Spotted munia Common
7 Passer domestica House sparrow Common
8 Coculus micropterus Koyal / kooku Common
9 Megalaima merulinus Indian kooku Common
10 Pisttachula krammeri Rose ringed parakeet Common
11 Merops orinetalis Bee eater Common
12 Microfus affnis House swift Common
13 Caprimulgus asiaticus Indian jar Common
14 Haliasturindus Brahmni kite Common
15 Milvus migrans Pariah kite Common
16 Columba livia Blue rock pigeon Common
17 Streptopelia spp. Dove (ghughi) Common
18 Francolinus francolinus Black Partridge (kala teetar) Common
19 Perdicula asiatica Jungle bush quail (Bater) Common
20 Gallinula chloropus Indian moorhen (Jal murgi) Common
21 White breasted water hen Amaurornis phoenicurus Common
22 Anus acuta Common teal Common
23 Bulbucus ibis Little egret Common
24 Egretta garzetta Cattle egret Common
25 Milyus migrans Kite Common
26 Targos calvus King vulture Common
27 Bubo bubo Indian owl Common
28 Colombus livibus Rock pigeon Common
29 Pavo cristayus Common peafowl Common
3.8.4 Wild Life Sanctuary
1. Piplughat Wildlife Sanctuary
This sanctuary is situated in the mid Himalayan region of the Solan district. The
sanctuary is famous for Chikor species. The total area of the sanctuary is 6.284 sq. km.
The sanctuary is located at the distance of about 8-10 km (aerial) on the link road
originating from Piplughat on Darlaghat - Mandi National Highway. The list of Flora and
Fauna found in the sanctuary is given in Table 3.24 and 3.25.
102
Table 3.24 List of Flora found in Piplughat Wildlife Sanctuary

Local name Botanical name
3 Biul Grewia oppsitifolia
5 Bamboo Dendrocalamus strictus
9 Jharinoo Olea glandulifera
11 Kainth Pyrus pashia
13 Kamal Mallotusphilippinensis
14 Kangu Anogeissus latifolia
15 Kachnar Bahunia verigat
16 Lasuda Cordial dichotoma
17 Parang Acer oblongum
20 Toon Cedrela toona
21 Kashmal Berberis aristata
22 Tirmar Xynthoxylum armatum
Table 3.25 List of Fauna found in Piplughat Wildlife Sanctuary

Zoological name Local / English Name
Mammals
1 Felis bengalensis Leopard cat
2 Panthera pardus Panther/tendua
3 Hystrix indica Porcupine / sayal
4 Macaca mulata Langur
5 Presbytis phyarei Monkey / bandar
6 Petaursita spp Flying squirrel
7 Selenarctos thibetanus Himalayan black bear
8 Nemorhaedus goral Goral
9 Muntiacus muntjac Barking dear / kakar
10 Sus scrofa Wild bore / jungle suar
11 Crevus unicolar Sambhar
12 Lupesruficandatus Hare
Birds
13 Catraus wallichii Cheer Pheasent
14 Polyplectron bicalearatum Peacock
15 Pucrasia macrolopha Koklass
16 Lophura leucomelana Kalij
103
2. Majhathal Wildlife Sanctuary: Majhathal wild life sanctuary is situated in the Sub
Himalayan range covering part of Arki subdivision of Solan District and part of the
sanctuary is also falls under the jurisdiction of Sunni subdivision of Shimla District. This
area was declared as majhathal wild life sanctuary under Wild Life Act 1972 as
notification vide H. P. Government notification No.5-11/70 of dated 23-10-1999 for the
significance of its ecological, fauna, flora, natural and zoological considerations. The list
of flora & fauns is given in Table 3.26 and 3.27.
Table 3.26 List of Flora in Majhathal Wildlife Sanctuary

Common Name Scientific Name
3 Biul Grewia oppsitifolia
5 Bamboo Dendrocalamus strictus
9 Jharinoo Olea glandulifera
11 Kainth Pyrus pashia
13 Kamal Mallotusphilippinensis
14 Kangu Anogeissus latifolia
15 Kachnar Bahunia verigat
16 Lasuda Cordial dichotoma
17 Parang Acer oblongum
21 Kharik Celtis ostralis
22 Kusum Schelicher oleosa
23 Major phalli Holarrhena antidysentreica
24 Palang Acer oblongum
25 Pandhyan Ehretia serrata
26 Phaldu Mitragyna parviflora
27 Papal Ficus relegiosa
28 Kashmal Berberis aristata
29 Tirmar Xynthoxylum armatum
30 Binda Colebrookia oppositifolia
31 Charmer Artemisia vulgaris
32 Chilla Casearia tomentosa
33 Dhatura Dhatura suaveolens
34 Dhau Woodfordia fruticosa
35 Gendhela Murraya koenigii
104
Table 3.27 List of Fauna in Majhathal Wildlife Sanctuary

Zoological name Local / English Name
Mammals
1 Felis bengalensis Leopard cat
2 Panthera pardus Panther/tendua
3 Hystrix indica Porcupine / sayal
4 Macaca mulata Langur
5 Presbytis phyarei Monkey / bandar
6 Petaursita spp Flying squirrel
7 Selenarctos thibetanus Himalayan black bear
8 Nemorhaedus goral Goral
9 Muntiacus muntjac Barking dear / kakar
10 Sus scrofa Wild bore / jungle suar
Birds
11 Scatraus wallichii Pheasent
12 Polyplectron bicalearatum Peacock
13 Alectoris gracea Chikor
14 Gallur fenugincue Red jungle fowl
15 Lophura leucomelana Kalij
Detailed biological study of the study area [core zone and buffer zone] has been been
carried out by Dr. M. R. Borkar and provided in Annexure 7.
3.9 Land use Pattern
Total area of the Arki Tehsil is 39403 hectares out of which 20% area comes under net
cultivated area, 17% covered forests, 48% of the area is covered under pastures/grazing
land and the rest area fall under barren, cultivable west, and other agricultural use. The
land utilization pattern of Arki Tehsil and Solan District is given in Table 3.28.
Table 3.28 Land use Pattern (As per census records)

Classification Arki Tehsil Arki Tehsil Solan Solan
(ha) (%) district (ha) district (%)
1 Forest area 6939 17.6 20300 11.22

2 Barren and unculturable land 1255 3.19 12400 6.85
3 Land put to non-agricultural use 1406 3.60 11900 6.58
4 Culturable waste land 1290 3.28 14800 8.18
5 Permanent pasture / grazing land 19127 48.5 77300 42.7
6 Land under misc. trees and crops 37 0.09 400 0.22
7 Current fallows 908 2.30 4900 2.70
8 Other fallows 278 0.70 600 0.33
105
9 Net sown area 8163 20.7 38300 21.17

10 Total area 39403 100 180900 100
Land use as per the Satellite Imagery
Land use as per the Satellite imagery of the 10 km study area of Plant site and Mine site
is given separately in Table 3.28 a and 3.28 b and Figure 3.5 and 3.6 respectively.
Table 3.28 (a) Land use as per the Satellite Imagery (10 km Radius of Plant)
Sr. No. Description Area in % Area in Ha.
1 Buitup Residential 0.75 236.62
2 Builtup Industrial 0.19 59.04
3 Mine/quarry 0.34 107.25
4 Agricultural Land 14.76 4636.94
5 Open Scrub 13.80 4335.83
6 Very Dense Forest 11.89 3735.02
7 Dense Forest 25.78 8099.68
8 Open Forest 32.06 10070.58
9 Water Harvesting 0.00 0.10
Structures
10 River 0.43 134.44
Total 100.00 31415.51
Table 3.28(b) Land use as per the Satellite Imagery (10 km Radius of Mine)
Sr. No. Description Area in % Area in Ha.
1 Buitup Residential 0.69 292.29
2 Builtup Industrial 0.14 59.89
3 Mine/quarry 0.16 68.89
4 Agricultural Land 13.22 5634.6
5 Open Scrub 15.56 6633.71
6 Very Dense Forest 10.97 4675.91
7 Dense Forest 29.87 12736.1
8 Open Forest 28.78 12269.18
9 Water Harvesting 0.00 0.1
Structures
10 River 0.61 261.75
Total 100.00 42632.42
106
Figure 3.5 Satellite Imagery 10 km area around Plant Site
107
Figure 3.6 Satellite Imagery 10 km area around Mine Site
Agriculture: The area and production of principal crops in terms of coverage and
importance are given in Table 3.29 and Table 3.30.
108
Table 3.29 Area under Principal Crops (area in ha)

Crop name Year 2003-04 Year 2004-05 Year 2004-05
Cereals
1 Wheat 363400 369800 358600
2 Maize 298500 298600 295400
3 Rice 81400 79500 79600
4 Barley 24300 23400 25000
5 Millets & other cereals 12800 8900 8700
Pulses
6 Gram 1300 1300 1340
7 Other pulses 27500 28000 26400
Oil seeds
8 Rape & mustard 8900 9300 9630
9 Linseed 1500 1200 1000
10 Sesamum 4700 4100 3810
Other crops
11 Sugarcane 2600 2500 2590
12 Ginger 2100 2100 2180
Table 3.30 Production of Principal Crops (in tons)

Crop name Year 2003-04 Year 2004-05 Year 2004-05
Cereals
1 Wheat 496930 687450 365880
2 Maize 729570 636290 543060
3 Rice 120630 109130 112140
4 Barley 28140 33720 29360
5 Millets & other cereals 7420 5700 5670
Pulses
6 Gram 1210 1320 720
7 Other pulses 9800 9590 18910
Oil seeds
8 Rape & mustard 3240 4370 2800
9 Linseed 380 340 100
10 Sesamum 2210 1900 1520
Other crops
11 Sugarcane 26960 24630 25100
12 Ginger 14660 14570 16210
3.10 Socio-Economic Features
Demographic Pattern: Solan district, one of the twelve districts of Himachal Pradesh,
came into existence on September 1, 1972. The district for administrative and
development purposes has been divided into five Tehsils Solan, Arki, Kandaghat,
Nalagarh, Dharampur and Kasauli, and five development blocks – Solan, Kandaghat,
109
Nalagarh, Dharampur and Kunihar. Solan district is bounded by Shimla district in the
North, Ropar district of Punjab and Ambala district of Haryana in the South, Sirmour
district in the East and Bilaspur district in the West. The study area falls in Arki Tehsil of
Solan district. Based on 2001 Census, there are 15474 households in Arki Tehsil. Total
population of the Tehsil is 83230. Male female ratio of the Tehsil is 1005:1000, which is
very healthy with respect to the district. The details of the population of district Solan and
Arki Tehsil is shown in Table 3.31 to 3.33.
Table 3.31 Population Figures in Arki Tehsil and Solan District

District / No of Total Total Total Females /
Tehsil Households Population Male Female 1000 male
Solan 852
District 99317 500557 270291 230266
Arki Tehsil 15474 83230 41509 41721 1005
Table 3.32 Rural and Urban Population Arki Tehsil and Solan District
No of House Total Total Total
District / Tehsil holds Population Male Female
Solan (Rural) 77086 409362 214150 195212
Solan (Urban) 22231 91195 56141 35054
Arki (Rural) 14791 80353 39981 40372
Arki (Urban) 683 2877 1528 1349
Table 3.33 SC and ST Population in Arki Tehsil and Solan District:

SC population ST population
District
/Tehsil Total Male Female Total Male Female
140642 73016 67626 3542 1952 1590
Solan District
Arki Tehsil 23436 11635 11801 109 75 34
Occupational Pattern: Agriculture is the main occupation of the people and has an
important place in the economy of the district. As regards occupational distribution of the
work force, there were 22200 main workers in the Tehsil, according to the Primary
Census Abstract of 2001. About 41% of the workers are cultivators and agricultural
110
labour. Table 3.34 shows the occupational pattern of the workforce in the district and
Arki Tehsil. Classification of main workers is shown in Table 3.35.
Table 3.34 Occupational Pattern of the Workforce

Total Main Marginal Non
District /Tehsil workers workers workers workers
Solan 263445 172274 91171 237112
Arki 44780 22200 22580 38450
Table 3.35 Classification of Main Workers:

District /Tehsil Main workers
Agricultural Worker in Workers in
Cultivators labour house hold other field
Solan Tehsil 65255 3385 2506 101128
Arki Tehsil 10405 371 390 11034
Most of the villages are connected with by road network. The villages in the area are
very small. They are also scattered and several of them are perched on hilltops. To
reach in such villages, one has to walk up the sloppy terrain of a couple of kilometers
from the roadside. Most of the villages have electricity and drinking water facility. All the
centrally sponsored rural poverty alleviation and national social assistance programmes
are being implemented in the Tehsil. Besides, a number of State Government’s rural
development and social security programmes are also under implementation.
111
CHAPTER 4: ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION

MEASURES
4.1 Identification of Impact
The construction and operation phase of the proposed project comprises various
activities each of which have been considered to assess the impact on one or another
environmental components. Impact predictions are based on conceptual notions on how
the universe acts that is intuitive and/ or explicit assumptions concerning the nature of
environmental processes. In most cases the predictions consists of indicating merely
whether there will be degradation, no change, or enhancement of environmental quality.
In other cases, quantitative ranking scales are used. Significant environmental impacts
have been categorized as long term or short term and reversible or irreversible impacts.
4.2 Impact Assessment
Mining: Drilling, blasting, extraction, transportation of limestone to stone crusher site,

crushing and transportation of limestone boulders to clinker plant are the main activities
involved in mining. Mining operations create adverse impact on the environment if
appropriate and planned measures are not taken to mitigate the pollution generating
sources.
Cement Plant: Stockpiles, Raw mill, Kiln system, Blending Silo/Kiln feed, Clinker
Cooler, Clinker Storage, Coal Mill, Truck Bulk Loading Machines, D.G.Sets, etc. are the
main activities on generation of pollution. These activities would have adverse impact on
the environment health if not controlled adequately.
4.2.1 Construction Stage Impact
The proposed project is for expansion of the capacity of clinker production from 1.8
MTPA to 2.6 MTPA. No additional land shall be acquired. Therefore, there is no
additional impact on topography of area. Civil work construction of the plant is already
under progress and impact due to this is reflecting in the ambient air quality and ambient
112
noise quality monitoring conducted near the plant and in the village Rauri. The data of
the monitoring conducted are provided in Chapter 3. The values are well within the limits
specified under the Environment protection Act1986.
4.3 Operation Stage Impact
4.3.1 Impact on Landform
The mining is being operated by opencast bench slicing method. Excavations are being
carried out by gradual slicing off from the top of mineralized hill. The operations
comprise pre-production development stage and the production stage. During the pre
production stage haul roads are laid and the faces are developed and made ready for
raising limestone. The maximum and minimum elevations of the mining lease area are
1240 m and 1740 m above Mean Sea Level. The existing ML area is 488.06 ha. The
expansion is related to additional mining capacity within this 488.06 ML area. 121.49 ha
land is agriculture land, 226.95 ha is wasteland and balance 139.62 ha is forest-land.
Forest clearance for 139.62 ha has been obtained in 2002. Thickness of limestone
varies from 20 to 100 m in the deposit area. As on today, Western Block has been
opened up and the dimension of the present pit is approximately 1280m X 400m and the
excavation has reached up to 1310 MRL. In the north side of the pit, length of the faces
from 1460 MRL to 1420 MRL ranges from 400m to 500m while the bench width varies
from 25 m to 150 m. Average height of the benches is 10 m. Similarly, in the south side
of the pit, length of the faces from 1380 MRL to 1320 MRL ranges from 400m to 700m
while the bench width varies from 30 m to 130 m. Average height of the benches is 10 m
and face slope is 80-900 during excavation. The slope stability investigations for the mine
were carried out by Indian Bureau of Mines, Nagpur and as per the suggestions, ultimate
bench slope much less than 450 shall be maintained (around 300 to be precise). Further
studies are being conducted by Central Mining Research Institute.
Overburden like interstitial waste material are not produced, therefore, there is no waste
dump formation in the area. The top soil occurring at scattered places is scrapped
separately and is directly used for plantation activity.
113
The operations comprise pre production development stage and the production stage.
Haul roads have been designed based on geo-technical parameters, shape of the ore
body and size of the equipment plying in the mines. Approach to the working faces has
been planned with an aim to minimize traffic congestion and the number of spots that
slow down the traffic flow. The main haul road and arterial roads approaching the faces
are 8 to 10 m wide and it increases at the curves. In general, the width of the haul roads
has been kept more than three times the width of the largest machine plying in the
mines. No road has a gradient steeper than 1 in 16 at any place. All corners and bends
in roads have been made in such a way that the operators and drivers of vehicles have
clear view for a distance of not less than 30 meters along the road. Where any road
exists above the level of the surrounding area, it has been provided with strong parapet
walls, made of stones or concrete structure, around 1 meter wide and not less than 1
meter in height to prevent any vehicle from getting off the road. Road signs have been
placed at strategic locations to provide guidance to drivers. Adequate drainage has been
provided along the roads to prevent erosion from runoff water. Expansion of the mines
will be done by following similar approach.
The topmost leftover bench in the northern sub-block has 1490 MRL while in the
southern sub-block the operations have reached up to 1310 MRL .The benches are
advancing in northern and southern directions in the southern sub-block while in north -
easterly and eastern direction in northern sub-block. During the last five years, the
operations were confined between benches 1490 MRL to 1310 MRL in the Western
Block. The benches up to 1490 MRL were completely exploited in the earlier scheme
period. The process of leaving the ultimate benches commenced from 1490 MRL but
now it has been planned to mine up to 1470 MRL and start leaving benches there after.
In the northern sub-block, benches from 1470 MRL will be left and reclamation as well
as slope stabilization work will be undertaken afterwards once the level reaches around
1450 MRL. Similarly, in the southern sub-block benches from 1400 MRL to 1310 MRL
are left and reclamation activities are in very primitive stages.
The hillocks are barren or comprise euphorbia plants at majority of places. Some of the
patches are characterized by Chil plantation. The intervening lower horizons are
114
inhabited in the form of small villages or hamlets at some locations. The hillocks are
characterized by seasonal nallahs which receive some flow during rainy period and are
dry during rest of the time. The valley portions outside the lease area have a few springs
which emerge in the weak planes. Overall, the area is characterized by dendritic to sub-
dendritic drainage pattern.
It is not possible to restore the mined out land to its pre-mining natural conditions since
initially the benches are chopped off from the top and gradually the benches are leftout
in the non-mineralized portions of the lease. The topography of the area will completely
change at the end of the project. However, the present project of mining is for increasing
the capacity of mining and no additional land shall be taken. Therefore, due to expansion
of project, there is no additional impact on the topography of the mining lease area.
View of Mining in Western Block
115
A total of 225 ha area comprising 81, 117 and 27 ha respectively from Western, Eastern
and Central Blocks would be available for reclamation and rehabilitation at the end of
deposit life. The majority of the rehabilitation would be in the form of plantation /
afforestation over leftover benches in the three Blocks while the lower benches and
bottom most bench floor will be used for creating water bodies in the Western and
Eastern Blocks. It has been envisaged to convert 16 ha reclaimed area of Western
Block and 13 ha of Eastern Block to water bodies. Rest of the reclaimed areas of the
three Blocks (196 ha) would be rehabilitated in the form of afforestation and orchards.
Further, plantation would continue to be carried out along haul roads, near office,
magazine, crusher, below OLBC and over barren slopes in the acquired areas to
achieve density @ 1000 plants/ha so that a dense green canopy is developed in the
environs. At the end of mine life, out of the balance 263.06 ha area which is not
amenable for excavation for mineral raising, roads and built up area would cover 7 ha
and 3 ha area respectively. Besides, plantation would be carried out in phases over
43.06 ha of this area while 210 ha area would remain undisturbed and shall form a part
of safety zone and other statutory barriers.
4.3.2 Impact on Natural Resources
Limestone and shale shall be extracted from the mining lease area. The limestone and
shale will be used for clinkerization unit at Suli and Rauri. Therefore the limestone
mining and cement production will happen at same place. This way the mineral resource
and its utilization are optimized. However the limestone deposit will get exhausted after a
period of time. The impact on the natural resources (mining of raw materials) will be long
term and irreversible in nature.
The area under mining lease is not affected by surrounding catchments as it is located
on the hilly terrain and on the contrary, it discharges the rainwater in to its peripheral
valleys. During the initial drilling done for the purpose of ore reserve calculation indicated
that no water table exists on the deposit hill. A number of traverses made longitudinally
and across the limestone deposits and studies of local geological features also inferred
that no aquifer exists in the mining area. The limestone deposits are underlain by shally
116
limestone and shales and are extensively fractured and jointed at surface, but
disappears almost at depths. These deposits permit little water retention due to high
slopes and limited depth of fracturing. Most of the precipitation is lost as run off and
there is no seepage due to recharge received by shales and limestone. So mining in
acquired area has practically no impact on hydrology and water sources.
4.3.3 Impact on Climate
Cement production generates carbon dioxide, which is a greenhouse gas. In this project
the transportation is done by conveyor, which will directly eliminate the emission of
carbon dioxide and other gases due to diesel buring. The clinker making technology also
meets the BAT in terms of energy consumption. The company is giving substantial fund
to the State Forest Department to meet the compensatory afforestation targets. The
company is also creating greenery in 33% land area. Mined out area will be revegetated.
In this manner carbon dioxide sink will be created. The impact will be long term and
irreversible in nature.
4.3.4 Impact on Ambient Air Quality
Drilling, blasting, excavation, transportation, crushing etc are the air polluting activities at
the mining site. Grinding, blending, calcinations and clinker cooling are the air polluting
activities at the cement plant. To reduce the impact of air pollution, best available
measures have been taken at the mining site and cement plant: Ambient air quality
monitoring has been conducted at 18 locations including mine office and near the
cement plant to know the background level of ambient air quality. Although, adequate
measures have been taken to put all the parameters of source emissions well within the
prescribed limits under the Environmental Protection Act, The impact during the cement
plant and limestone mining project expansion operation on the ambient air quality of the
study area has been predicted using mathematical modeling by following the guidelines
developed by CPCB (“Assessment of Impact to Air Environment : Guidelines for
Conducting Air Quality Modeling” Probes/70/1997-98). The Model TOR developed by
117
the Ministry of Environment & Forests, Govt. of India prescribes use of ISCST3 model
for mining projects.
Atmospheric dispersion models are mathematical expressions, which attempt to

describe the following processes in the order of emission release rate to atmospheric
concentrations. Upon discharge to atmosphere, the air emissions from stationary
sources are subjected to following physical and chemical processes:
1. An initial vertical rise, called plume rise, due to initial buoyancy and momentum of
discharge,
2. Transport by wind in its direction,
3. Diffusion by turbulence, and
4. Gravitational settling of particles, chemical reaction, transformations and

decomposition, deposition on vegetation and other surfaces, washout due to rain and
other complex physical and chemical process.
Gaussian Plume Model has been followed for the study. Modeling was carried out using
the software ISCST3 developed by the US-Environment Protection Agency. The
software meets the requirement of CPCB and calculates worst-case 24-hour average
values (Short Term). The modeling procedure is described below:
Methodology
The Industrial Source Complex Short Term (Version 3) dispersion model provides option
to model emissions from a wide range of sources. The basis of the model is the straight-
line Gaussian plume equation, which is used with some modification point source
emission from isolated and multiple stacks, isolated and multiple vents, storage piles,
conveyor belts and the like. Emission sources are categorized into three basic types of
sources; point source, volume source and area source. The volume source may also be
used to simulate line sources. The input parameters vary depending upon the source
type. For point sources, building dimensions for nearby structures that cause
aerodynamic downwash can be considered. For certain group of sources the model will
combine the results.
118
ISCST3 model accepts hourly meteorological data records to determine the conditions of
plume rise, transport and diffusion. The model estimates the concentration value for
each source and receptor combination for each hour of input meteorology and calculates
user selected short term averages. The model also calculates the averages for the entire
period of input meteorology.
The model uses a virtual point source algorithm to model the effects of volume sources.
Therefore the basic equation is also used to calculate concentration produced by volume
source emission. If the volume source is elevated the user assign the effective emission
height. The user also assigns initial lateral and vertical dimensions for the volume
source, which are actually added to the downwind distance for the calculation of
dispersion coefficients. There are two types of volume sources; surface based sources
which can be modeled as area sources, and elevated sources.
The area source model is based on the equation for a finite crosswind line source.
Individual area source have the normal east-west and north-south dimensions. The
effect of an area source with an irregular shape can be simulated by dividing the area
source into multiple squares that approximate the area of the area source. The only
requirement is that each grid must be square.
Point Source Emissions: ISCST3 dispersion model uses a steady state Gaussian
plume equation to model emission from point sources that are elevated and continuous.
For each source and each hour, the origin of the source’s coordinate system is placed at
the ground surface at the base of the stack. The X axis is positive in the downwind
direction. The Y axis is crosswind to the X axis (normal). The Z axis extends vertically.
The fixed receptor locations are converted to each sources coordinate system for each
hourly concentration calculation. The hourly concentrations calculated for each source at
each receptor are summed to obtain the total concentration produced at each receptor
by the combined source emission.
Volume and Area Source Emissions: The volume and area sources options of the
ISCST3 model are used to simulate the effects of emissions from a wide variety of
119
emission sources. The model is used to simulate the effects of emission from sources
such as building roof monitors, line sources, conveyor belts and continuously moving
vehicles. The model is also used to simulate the effects of fugitive emissions from
sources such as storage piles (stockpiles, overburden, etc) and slag dump.
The ISCST3 model typically follows the CPCB guidelines : (“Assessment of Impact to Air
Environment : Guidelines for Conducting Air Quality Modeling” Probes/70/1997-98).
CPCB guidelines (1998) on dispersion modeling states that the area sources which do
not emit into a wake region should be treated as either point source with initial crosswind
spread or as non-buoyant volume source with initial vertical and cross wind speed.
If an area source is treated as an effective point source modeling may proceed as it

would for a point source located at the centre of the area. Area sources treated as point
sources may have release heights which are above the ground level but usually these
sources are emitting into a structure wake.
If a non buoyant area source is treated as a volume source, it is assumed to be located

at the centre of the area and have initial spreads in the vertical and crosswind direction.
Emission Inventory of Clinkerization Unit: Emission inventory for clinkerization plant

has been prepared based on the details provided in Project Report and the Layout Plan.
The stack emission inventory is shown in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1 Cement Plant Stack Emission Inventory

Name of Unit, Control Stack Stack Stack Stack Stack Emission Rate
Equipment With height top temp, velocity (g/s)
Location coordinates (m) dia, m (K) (m/s) SPM SO2 NOx
1 Raw Mill & Kiln Stack 100 7.5 431 8.5 13.0 3.0 156
Bag House
120, 0 m
2 Coal Mill Stack 80 2.0 358 12.0 4.3
Bag Filter
0, 35 m
3 Clinker Cooler Stack 80 4.6 533 15.0 6.3
ESP
0, 0 m
4 DG sets 55 1.3 573 10 0.7 13.8 9.7
430, -65 m
120
Emission Inventory of Limestone Mines: The limestone production in the existing

limestone mines is increased by 2.1 million tons per annum, which corresponds to 900
tons per hour, on average basis. The generation of overburden is practically negligible
because the rock are exposed at several places. Emissions factors recommended in
USEPA’s AP42 have been followed to prepare the emission inventory of limestone
mines. The emission inventory of limestone mines is shown in Table 4.2.
Table 4.2 Emission Inventory of Limestone Mines

Sources, Location Emission Factor Emission Release rate g/s
Coordinates and (TSP) Kg/h
Type of Source
1 Limestone crushing 0.0027 kg/ton ore 2.43 0.68

(Point)
2 Fines crushing 0.0195 kg/ton ore 17.55 4.9
(Point)
3 Screening 0.0125 kg/ton ore 11.25 3.1

(Point)
4 Junction Points (Point) 0.0015 kg/ton ore 1.35 0.4
Other Sources
5 Drilling (wet) 1.3 lb/hole 1.5 0.4

30 holes/day, (Volume)
6 Topsoil removal by scrapper, 0.058 lb/ton 2040 tons 0.1

(Volume) of top soil
7 Scrapper loading 0.012 lb/ton handling
(Volume) generates
8 Scrapper unloading 0.04 lb/ton traces of
(Volume) dust/sec
9 Blasting (controlled), 0.0005A1.5 lb/blast 7.0 2.0
(5170 feet2, 2 blast/day
Volume)
10 Limestone loading in dumper, 0.028 lb/ton 11.5 3.2

6.5 tons per bucket
(Volume)
11 Wind erosion of exposed 0.38 ton/acre-year 2.8 (3 x 10-6 g/s/m2)

areas (stripped cover) (Area,
121
65 acres/year)
Vehicular Movement
12 General Traffic Movement 4.83 (S/45)1.5 lb/vmt 10.2 2.8

Transportation length
300 km; 20 kmph
(Volume with centre to centre
distance divided by 2.15 for
lateral dimension)
13 Haul Trucks Movement 22 lb/vmt 156 43.3
Vehicle trips for transfer of
limestone from phase to
crusher by dumper of 54 tons
capacity
600 km, 20 kmph
(Volume with centre to centre
distance divided by 2.15 for
lateral dimension)
Note 1 : A = area blasted in square feet, M = moisture content in %, S= mean vehicle
speed in miles per hour, lb=pounds, vmt =vehicle miles traveled
Note 2 : Crusher has been assumed as 00, 00 (Absolute Reference Point) for mines.
Raw Mill + Kiln Stack has been assumed as ARP
Meteorological Data: Meteorological file comprising wind direction, wind speed,

ambient temperature, stability class and mixing height has been prepared for modeling
purpose. Surface meteorological data for wind speed, wind direction and ambient
temperature has been generated at the project site. Historical (seasonal) data on
stability class and mixing height were obtained from published document of CPCB
(“Spatial Distribution of Hourly Mixing Depth over Indian Region” Probes/88/2002-03). F
Class stability during night time and B and C Class stability were assumed during day
time. Mixing height value considered for modeling was 50 m at 7 AM, 150 m at 9 AM,
500 m at 11 AM, 600 m at 12 noon, 800 m at 2 PM, 1000 m at 3 PM, 1000 m at 5 pm
and 700 m at 6 PM.
Default Values: The ISCST model by default does the extrapolation of wind speed
(Irwins exponents) to the effective height of release and calculates final plume rise as
per Briggs equation. Since 50% of land inside a circle of 3 km radius around the site
does not have considerable build-up area, rural dispersion coefficient is considered for
modeling. The model used regulatory default options for stack tip downwash, buoyancy
122
induced dispersion, calm processing routines, default wind processing exponents,

vertical potential temperature gradients.
Results and Discussion: The model was set up for calculation of 24-hour average
values within 10 km of study area, so that the values could be compared with the
baseline levels and national ambient air quality standards. Cartesian Grid with varing
spacing were applied to calculate the GLC. Significant GLC values were observed within
2.5 km area of the mines and 5 km area of the clinker unit. Hence the ground level
concentrations (GLC) were plotted as isopleths for following scenarios.
The worst incremental glc value of TSP due to expansion of limestone mines inside the
mines boundary is 178.6 μg/m3, close to the blasting and dumper loading site. Since the
wind is blowing from east side, downwind west side showed higher values. The Isopleths
showing the incremental TSP level at various places within the mine boundary is shown
in Figure 4.1.
The worst incremental glc value of TSP due to expansion of limestone mines at the
mines boundary is 33.2 μg/m3 on the west boundary The Isopleths showing the dust
level at various places along the mine boundary is shown in Figure 4.2.
The worst incremental glc value of TSP due to expansion of limestone mines outside the
mines boundary is 11.7 μg/m3 at 1 km east side. Since the wind is blowing from east
side, downwind west side showed higher values. At 5 km distance the incremental dust
level is as low as 2 μg/m3. The Isopleths showing the dust level at various places
outside the mine boundary is shown in Figure 4.3.
The worst incremental glc value of TSP due to expansion of clinker unit is 1.7 μg/m3 at
1.25 km east side of the clinker cooler stack. Since the wind is blowing from east side,
downwind west side showed higher values. At 5 km distance the incremental dust level
is as low as 0.5 μg/m3. The Isopleths showing the dust level at various places within 5
km of the clinker plant is shown in Figure 4.4. The Isopleths showing the dust level at
nearby places within 2.5 km of the clinker plant is shown in Figure 4.5.
123
The worst incremental glc value of SO2 due to expansion of clinker unit is 1.5 μg/m3 at
1.5 km east side of the kiln stack. Since the wind is blowing from east side, downwind
west side showed higher values. At 5 km distance the incremental SO2 level is as low as
0.4 μg/m3. The Isopleths showing the SO2 level at various places within 5 km of the
clinker plant is shown in Figure 4.6.
The worst incremental glc value of NO2 due to expansion of clinker unit is 7.6 μg/m3 at
1.5 km east side of the kiln stack. Since the wind is blowing from east side, downwind
west side showed higher values. At 5 km distance the incremental NO2 level is as low as
2.3 μg/m3. The Isopleths showing the NO2 level at various places within 5 km of the
clinker plant is shown in Figure 4.7. The maximum incremental GLC is superimposed
over the maximum baseline ambient air level of the area and the resultant values are
shown in Table 4.3 and 4.4. Figure 4.8 depicts the final air quality scenario with GLC
isopleths at various distances around the limestone mine.
Table 4.3 Impact of Air Emissions of Mines on Baseline Environment

(24 - hour average in μg/m3)
Parameter Incremental Background Superimposed National National
glc (max) Level (max value Standard Standard
in d/w side) (residential) (sensitive)
SO2 0.1 <4 <4 80 30
NOX 0.1 <9 <4 80 30
RSPM 11.7 41 53 100 75
Table 4.4 Impact of Air Emissions of Clinker Unit on Baseline Environment
(24 - hour average in μg/m3)
Parameter Incremental Background Superimposed National National
glc (max) Level (max value Standard Standard
in d/w side) (residential) (sensitive)
SO2 1.5 7.0 8.5 80 30
NOX 7.6 10.2 17.8 80 30
RSPM 1.7 42 44 100 75
The ambient air quality of study area around the mines site and clinker unit site will
remain well within the residential and sensitive area national standards. There will be no
instance of violation of national standards.
124
125
126
127
4.3.5 Impact on Ambient Noise
Ambient Noise Quality Data has been collected from the 18 locations of the study area
which comprises of the village in the study area, main roads, mine office and cement
plant. The data is provided in chapter 3. It would be appropriate to reveal that a cement
plant is already in operation at village Suli and this plant is under construction in the
village Rauri which is adjacent to the cement plant at Suli. The noise monitoring data
indicates that the existing day time and night time residential noise level at all the
locations were well within the prescribed standard Noise generating sources during the
mining activity and the intensity of the noise generated by these sources, monitored is
shown in Table 4.5.
Table 4.5 Monitored Noise Levels [ dB(A)] for Mining Machinery
Machines Conditions Monthly Avg.

At source At 10 m
DUMPER B-35 TRAVELLING WITH LOAD 86.5 82.0
TRAVELLING WITHOUT
LOAD 84.5 79.9
DUMPER HD-465 TRAVELLING WITH LOAD 81.8 79.1
TRAVELLING WITHOUT
LOAD 75.3 72.4
EXCAVATOR PC-600
(KOMATSU) RUNNING IDLE 72.6 78.6
RUNNING ON FULL LOAD 80.9 84.4
EXCAVATOR EX-600 RUNNING IDLE 79.0 83.5
EXCAVATOR PC-650 RUNNING IDLE 75.9 72.7
EXCAVATOR PC-1250 RUNNING IDLE 73.0 79.7
DOZER D-355 RUNNING IDLE 84.5 84.4
DRILL ATLAS COPCO ROCL-8 RUNNING IDLE 70.1 74.8
EXCAVATOR DUMPER DURING LOADING 91.5
IBH DRILL DURING OPERATION 92.0 88.7
The standards for occupational exposures reveals that tolerable level is 90 dB(A) for 8
hrs. 90 dB(A) noise level is generated from the activity of drilling and the rock breaker.
The noise generated from other machines involved in the mining activity is in the range
of 80-85 dB (A). About, 80-90 dB(A) noise level is generated from the stone crushing
129
activity. If the difference of noise levels of two sources is 10 dB(A) or more, impact of
lower noise generating source will be negligible. Even the multiple noise source
generating sources of low intensity would have insignificant impact. The resultant of
noise reaching to the person /worker would be much lower because of the distance from
the source of generation of noise. The noise level reduces with distance as per formula
Lp2 = Lp1 – 10 LogS
S = 4 x 3.14 x r2
Where r is distance between source and receiver.
Noise due to Blasting: Noise due to blasting increases the peak level graph since very
high level noise generated for short duration say for 5 seconds. It ranges between 120
dB(A) to 130dB(A) at distance about 50 m to 200m. 100 dB(A) noise level intensity is
achieved at 300 m from source.
With increasing distance from the source the noise level decreases due to wave
divergence. Additional decrease also occurs due to atmospheric effects and interaction
with objects in the transmission paths. For hemispherical sound wave propagation
through homogeneous medium, one can estimate the noise levels at various locations
due to different sources using a model based on the following principle:
Lp2 = Lp1 – 20 Log (r2/r1), where Lp1 and Lp2 are the sound levels at points located at
distance r1 and r2 from the source. Combined effect of all the sources (A, B, C… etc)
can be determined at various locations by the following equation:
10 Log (10lpa/10 +10lpb/10 + 10lpc/10), where lpa, lpb and lpc are noise pressure levels at a
point due to different sources.
Based on the above principle a Noise Model “Dhawani” has been developed by National
Environmental Engineering Research Institute (India). This model is recommended by
the Ministry of Environment & Forests in the EIA Manual. The details of model are:
i. Maximum number of sources that can be modeled is 25.
ii. Noise levels can be predicted at any distance from the sources.
iii. Model is designed for flat terrain or topography.
iv. Coordinates of the sources with respect to locations can be fixed
v. Isopleths can be drawn.
vi. Attenuation factors are not applied hence the modeled results are overestimate.
Input to the Model: Ambient noise level near the mine office was 67.6dB (A) during the
time and 64.3dB (A) during the night time. Noise level near the mine office has been
130
considered as background noise for prediction of impact. Figure 4.9 shows the noise
levels at distance 100 m, 200 m, 300 m, 400 m, 500 m from the source of generation
that is drilling & excavation site. Figure 4.10 shows the noise levels from the crusher site
and the Figure 4.11 shows the noise levels from the blasting site. At the crusher site, the
noise levels are recorded maximum upto 90 dB(A) whereas at the blasting site, at about
50 m, the noise levels were recorded maximum upto 100 dB(A).
Figure 4.9: Predicted Noise Level– Drilling & Excavation
Figure 4.10 : Predicted Noise Level around the Crusher Site
131
Figure 4.11: Predicted Noise Level around the Blasting Site
Figure 4.12 : Predicted Noise Levels from Clinker Plant
132
Noise levels recorded at 18 locations around the site is given in chapter 3. The noise
levels were within the permissible limit. Table 4.6 provides noise generated by the
various units of clinkrization plant. Mathematical modeling proved that noise level at
plant boundary would vary between 58.3 dBA to 59.6 dBA. Noise attenuation effects due
to natural barriers, greenbelt (shrubs, bushes and trees) absorption by air, wind, and
humidity, were not considered for modeling, hence the values depict worst case
scenario. If these are also considered the net impact would be much lower.
Table 4.6 Monitored Noise Level in Cement Plant

S. No. Location Noise level in dB(A)
1 Raw mill / Kiln system 86 -100
2 Blending silo / Kiln feed 84 – 88
3 Clinker cooler 84 – 86
4 Clinker storage 80 – 85
5 Coal mill 88 – 90
6 Truck Bulk Loading Machines 78 – 79
7 Transfer Points 75 – 80
8 Compressors 82 -100
9 Induced draft fans 85 -100
4.3.6 Impact Due to Blasting, Vibrations and Flyrock
Ground vibration, fly rock, air blast, dust and fumes are the deleterious effects of
blasting on environment. The explosive energy sets up a seismic wave in the ground,
which can cause significant damage to structures and disturbance to human occupants.
It causes major damages to the pit configuration too. When an explosive charge is fired
in a hole, stress waves propagate radially in all directions and cause the rock particles to
oscillate. This oscillation is felt as ground vibration. The existing and the proposed
increase in mining operations using deep hole drilling and blasting using delay
detonators are bound to produce ground vibrations. The ground vibration are measured
as the peak particle Velocity (PPV), which are compared vis-à-vis the circular no.7,
issued by Director General of Mines Safety for safe level criteria.
Blasting in addition to easing the hard strata generates ground vibration and
instantaneous noise. Ground vibration from mine blasting is expressed by amplitude,
frequency and duration of blast. The variables, which influence ground vibrations, are
133
controllable and non-controllable. The non-controllable variables include general surface

terrain, type and depth of overburden and wind. Similarly, the controllable variables
include type of explosives, charge per delay, delay interval, direction of blast
progression, burden, spacing and specific charge and coupling ratio.
To minimize the effect of blasting, Ground Vibration studies were conducted and proper
blast hole design was evolved with the help of Department of Mining Engineering KREC,
Suratkal and the same has been adopted. Use of noiseless trunk delays started to
minimize the noise due to air blast, use of non-electric system of blasting for true bottom
hole initiation use of muffling mats to arrest the dust and fly rock, regular monitoring of
magnitude of ground vibrations and air blast by ‘’Minimate’’ is carried out.
In order to know the impact due to vibrations, event report was prepared on 10.12.2008
and 24.02.2009 was assessed. These reports are placed at Appendix 4. The recording
was done at 1310 MSL and the blasting was done at 1350 MSL. 1100 kg ANFO was
used for 20 holes having average depth 9 m. The results have been compared with the
permissible ground vibrations specified for industrial buildings, domestic houses /
structures, sensitive structures. It has been observed that the actual vibrations are much
below the limits specified by DGMS.
The permissible peak particle velocity (ppv in mm/s) is as follows:

Type of structure Frequency
<8 Hz 8-25 Hz >25 Hz
1 Building / structure not 5 10 15
belonging to owner
Domestic house (kutcha/
brick/ cement)
2 Industrial buildings 10 20 25
(cement/ RCC / Concrete)
The DGMS recommended limit for airblast due to blasting is 115 dB Linear (measured at
any premises or public place). The maximum tolerable level is 120 dB Linear.
134
Impact due to Fly Rock: To minimize the effect of blasting, ground vibration studies
were conducted and proper blast hole design was evolved with the help of Department
of Mining Engineering, KREC Suratkal. ACL management has adopted various
measures including bottom hole initiation, proper blast design, control, effective
supervision etc. to control fly rock so that the village existing at the foot hill side remain
environmentally safe. The management, as an additional safety measure, desired to
adopt muffled blasting wherever necessary.
The Central Mining Research Institute, Nagpur designed the blast mat for muffling
purpose. The criteria like weaving facility ease in handling and repeated use, flexibility,
durability, economics, resistance to blast damage and overlapping facility were also
considered while designing. Six blast mats, each of 6 m x 6 –m size and made of 6 –mm
wire rope, were fabricated by M/s. Macment India Limited for the trial purpose.
The mats were manually woven in 30-45 mm mesh size and the ropes passed through
each other to avoid individual rope sliding or displacement during handling.
The conventional blasting practice without blast mat and some blast muffled by the mats
were monitored by the CMRI scientists. Sophisticated equipment like high speed video
camera and VOD probe were used to capture the minute blast details. Air deck blasting
and top column charging by cartridge explosive were also tried.
No fly rock was observed in any blasting. This was also confirmed from the high-speed
photography. Both high speed photography and the VOD probe confirmed perfect
bottom initiation. As a result the bottom rock moved initially to reduce the vertical
component of the throw. Consequently, the resultant throw was less. The throw was
limited within 5 and 15 m and the scatter was very small. The blast mat did not allow any
fragment to pierce through and fly. No damage was observed in the blast mat. The
blasting helpers were able to unfold and place the mats with great ease.
Based on the monitored blast event the following additional measures are suggested in
the existing practice to further minimize the chance of fly rock.
135
• To use a powder factor of not more than 0.35 kg/m3

• To blast small round of 10 - 12 holes to minimize ground vibrations.
• To adopt extensive supervision and adopt exhaustive control measure
wherever blasting is conducted within 150 m of the habitat.
• 10-15 percent of the column charge at the top of the hole can be loaded in
cartridge form to reduce the chance of fly rock. The cartridge diameter should
be 100-125mm. This should reduce the maximum rock throw and scatter by
about 30-40 percent.
4.3.7 Impact on Drainage and Waterbodies
The mine is being operated by opencast bench slicing method. Excavations are being
carried out by gradual slicing off from the top of mineralized hill. The slicing will be done
till 1250 m AMSL. The area is not affected by the surrounding catchments since it is
located on the hilly terrain. The nallahs / drains are dendritic in nature. No water body is
located in the mining area. Water table lies below the planned mining depth. The
drainage pattern of this area is of dendritic type and the gullies formed out of drainage
extend over all the flanks and converging joints in different places with the main stream
called Dhamla khad. The mine lease area is not affected by the surrounded catchments
basin as it is located on the hilly terrain and on the contrary, it discharge the rain water
into its peripheral valleys. There are no perennial sources of water in the area and all the
above reffered preferential paths/gullies will have water flow during the monsoon rains.
These gullies join a narrow stream called Dhamla khad on the southeastern and
southwestern valley of the mining area.
The deposits permit little retention of water due to high slopes. The morphology and the
nature of strata did not provide any indication of possible water bearing source upto
proposed mining depths. The mining lease area is categorized as dissected hill range as
per the hydrogeo-morphological survey report and hence very poor in ground water
occurrence. Hence any mining activity will not hamper the existing resource.
136
Two numbers springs noticed on the eastern and western slope at 1300 m and 1390 m
MRL respectively are away at a distance of about 300 m from the active mining area and
the lithology of the said location does not coincide with that of the mining area. The
referred stream has a very little flow of water during dry season, whereas, the flow is
high in monsoon period. The total length of the stream in the valley surrounding mining
lease is about 1.6 km measured from village Chakru. The average width and depth of
the stream is 10.5 x 1.1 m respectively. The gradient of the stream is 1 in 15 on the
eastern side where as it is 1 in 38 on the western side of the deposit. The height of water
flow was measured to be 0.2 to 0.3 m in dry season and 0.9 to 1.1 m in the peak
monsoon season. The total catchments zone for this stream works out to around 595
Ha. From the above, it can be observed that the occurrence of ground water is restricted
only to the plains and lower reaches due to the topography. The highly undulating hilly
terrain makes the area highly unstable for ground water recharge, as the surface flows
are very fast and do not have any retention time for the precipitated water to infiltrate in
to the ground. Thus the ground water occurrence is highly localized. Similarly, due to the
steep flows the stream, in the upper reaches drain away early in to the streams or rivers
in the lower reaches or the plains. The stream in the upper reaches are ephemeral in
nature as they flow only during the monsoon season and the streams in the lower
reaches and the plains attain perennial status by deriving water drained from the
streams of the upper reaches. Adequate control measure like retaining walls and
plantation in the gullies will be implemented to reduce the adverse impact if any on the
drainage pattern.
Generally the water quality is affected by the mining operation as the surface runoff
carries silt along with it resulting in high TDS, SS and pH. The natural springs and
aquifers are also affected by mining activities in the neighborhood. All the paths, gullies
have water flow during monsoon rains which ultimately join to a narrow stream called
Gyanakhud. However the storm water in mines working area and in area already worked
will carry soil wash off in the gullies located on both the flanks.
The storm water due to rainfall over the active mining area will get polluted with wash off
from the mining faces, roads etc. which will ultimately follow the preferential path on both
137
the flanks of the hillocks. The storm water quantity in different nallahs is monitored by
ACL. The surface water runoffs will flow through the seasonal gullies (Mangu nallah,
Chandi nallah, Mines runoff and Chakhru spring) in the mining and surrounding area and
ultimately reach the local stream Gyanakhud.
The limestone deposits are underlain by shaly limestone and shales, which are
extensively fractured and jointed at surface, but disappears almost at depths. These
deposits permit little water retention due to high slopes and limited depth of fracturing.
Most of the precipitation is lost of runoff and there is no seepage due to recharge
received by shales and shally limestone. Further, the maximum and minimum velocity of
water is observed in this area varies from 0.047 m/sec to 1.0 m/sec in accordance with
the season, rainfall and gradient. With velocity of flow less than <0.0470 m/sec, the solid
particle will settle down and will not be carried away by water. Thus, it is expected that
sufficient quantity of the water may contain the particle while flowing through the gullies.
The rainy season covers five months in a year during which the flows are observed to be
high and the balance seven months in a year where in all the gullies confluencing with
the stream (Gyanakhud) will have low flows. In case of surface runoffs coming in contact
with the mine working areas the parameters that are expected to be altered are namely,
pH value, suspended solids, dissolved solids, In order to assess the contamination due
to surface water run-off into the local stream Gyanakhud, regular monitoring of water
quality is being carried out and the results are observed to be well within the prescribed
norms even when mining in the existing lease is in progress.
Clinkerization Plant: The dry process for the manufacturing of the clinker has been
adopted for this plant. ACL has taken permission to draw ground water. Cooling tower
blowdown water will be recyled / used for dust suppression. Domestic effluent shall be
treated and reused for development of greenery. Spent oil and lubricants will be
collected in drums and sold to authorized reprocessors. These measures will mitigate
the adverse impact.
138
Retaining Toe Walls to Check Siltation, Erosion and Falling Boulders
139
4.3.7.1 Protection and Conservation of Water Bodies
ACF CSR wing of Ambuja Cement Limited has one of the major thrust area on Water
shed Development Programme and construction of Rooftop water rain harvesting
Programme in the area. ACF is implementing the Integrated Watershed Programme
in1192 Hectare of land with the support of Sir Rattan TATA Trust, Mumbai and
NABARD. Under the watershed project integrated approaches has been adopted to
ensure the treatment of every portion of the land in which Water Harvesting and
recharging of water in the main component.
S.N. Name of Watershed Watershed Village Populations

Area (Hec.) Covered (Benefited)
(no.)
1 Alikhad watershed 478 5 1255
2 Dhundan 714 16 3475
3 New Dhundan watershed( 2100 38 9218
sanctioned in principle by
NABARD)
4 Rauri-Pachhyur drainage water 240 7 935
/ sewage treatment project
Trenches: - The top of the hill straggler trenches are constructed to recharge the ground
water and retention the moisture in the
land to increase the productivity of the
grass as well as recharge the ground
water. These trenches having the
normal dimension of 10 feet in length
and 1.5 feet in width and 1 feet in
depth. The trenches are constructed
only pasture land. ACF has constructed 46105 rmt trenches in the watershed area. The
storage capacity of the trenches shall be 6224 cumt. The structures are only used for
recharge the ground water only.
Water Storage Pond: - The water storage tanks are constructed having small
catchments area 5000-10000 sqmt. The catchments are linked with the pond with
140
construction small trenches/channels. ACF has constructed 03 nos pond having the
storage capacity 38.51 cumt.
Check Dams: - Check Dams are constructed across small streams having gentle slope.
The site selected should have sufficient thickness of permeable bed or weathered
formation to facilitate recharge of stored water within span of time. The water stored in
the structure is mostly confined to stream course and the height is normally 3-4 mt and
excess water is allowed to flow over the wall In order to avoid scouring from excess run
off, water cushions are provided at downstream side. The Structures are constructed at
lower end of the stream and upper treatment like trenches; gully plugging and crate weir
has been constructed. ACF has constructed one number of Check Dam having the
capacity of 78.19 cumt. The water stored in the check dam is also linked with a storage
tank constructed in the village for field irrigation.
Roof Rain Water Harvesting Structures: - The artificial structure constructed near the
house and the rain water collected from Roof Top. The design of the structure will
depend upon the catchments of the roof top. The first rain should not entertainment due
to dust and other particles available in the roof top. The structure is completely covered
and must save from sun raise. ACF has constructed 37 nos Roof top water harvesting
structure. The capacity of the structure is 855 cumt. These structure are storage the rain
water and will be used in lean season for bathing/kitchen gardening and vegetable
promotion.
Gabion structure:
Gabion structures are rock and wire dams
constructed across the drainage lines with a
catchment area of 30-150 ha. This structures help in
reduction in soil erosion. Total 27 gabions were
constructed in this watershed project
141
Staggered Trenches:
Staggered contour trenches are
constructed in the ridge area of a
watershed. Rainwater, which falls in the
area, flows unchecked carrying with it
eroded soil into the flatter portion of the
watershed referred to as the “Valley”. The
area covered under this activity is 31 ha.
of running meter
Irrigation storage tank (New):
Four irrigation tanks were constructed in
the Samana and Newri villages. These
tanks are used to collect water from
natural resources. The repair and
maintenance is done by the concerned
user group.
Irrigation storage tank (Repair)

The repair of 3 damaged irrigation tank in the watershed development project was
repaird in the villages Sera, Samana, Kaldwar. The repair and maintenance is done by
the concerned User group. Each beneficiary contributed towards the maintenance
expenses.
Irrigation Channel:
Total 1500 Rmt of kuhl is constructed in
the watershed area in which 500 Rmt of
irrigation channel is constructed in the
Sera village. Total 27 families were
benefited from this activity. 600 Rmt. of
irrigation channel is constructed in Newri
village in which 22 families benefitted.
Total 400 Rmt of irrigation channel is
constructed in Samana village. Total 40
142
families will be benefited from this kuhl construction.
Bawri (Natural Spring):

Total 4 new bawri is constructed in Sera, Samana,
Newri and Kashlog villages for the drinking water
needs of the community. One Bawri was repaired at
Kaldwar village. The 10% contribution was deducted
from these works and will be used by the committees
for the maintenance of the structure.
Drinking water tank: One drinking water tank constructed at Sera village so as to solve
the drinking water problem to a great extent.12 beneficiaries benefited from this activity.
Khal: 3 Khals were constructed at
Kardwar, Sera, Samana villages
respectively. These Khals will solve the
drinking water problem of animals to a
great extent. All villagers are equally
responsible for its maintenance.
4.3.8 Impact of Solid Waste Disposal
No solid waste / hazardous waste is generated from the mining activity. Further, no solid
waste shall be generated from the clinker manufacturing process. However, some shale
and sub grade shaly limestone in the Western Block may need to be dumped and
therefore provision is being made for separately stacking them. Dump would be made
from top down by endlipping method in areas that provide a stable foundation.
The subgrade dumps are proposed near N200-N300/W100-E50 and 0-N100/E700-E900

co-ordinates and spread over 6700 sq. m and 7900 sq. m area respectively. Dumps
would be made from top down by end tipping method in the areas which are stable and
143
provide a stable foundation. Provision of garland drains all around the dump base would
be made. A retaining rock wall, not less than 1 meter wide and about 1.5 to 2 meter in
height, all along the toe of the dump would be constructed to arrest the washed fines
and rolling boulders. The top of dump as well as slope surface would be vegetated by
hydro-seeding technique or use of pre-seeded geo-textile mats, if so required for
stability. This would prevent erosion as well as dust generation. The individual dump
terrace slope will be around 35o equal to angle of repose of the material while the overall
ultimate slope of dumps will not exceed 28o. No wastes / sub-grade material generation
is anticipated from Eastern Block.
Containerized system of garbage collection will be practiced. The garbage will be

segregated into recyclable materials, inerts and organic matter. The recyclable materials
will be sold to kabadis. Inerts will be used as landfill or land leveling. Organic matter will
be converted to compost.
4.3.9 Impact on Soil Quality
The soil of mine area is of few centimeter depths, neutral and the texture is sandy loam.
It is sufficient in nitrogen and phosphorus content. The top soil occurring at scattered
places is scrapped separately and is used for plantation activity. A quantity of about 6
tonnes of top soil from the Western Block and 2034 tonnes from Eastern Block is
envisaged to be generated during the developmental works planned for next five years.
Year-wise likely quantities to be generated are given in the Table below.
The stacking would be for a temporary duration and the soil thus stacked will be used in
re-vegetation / plantation schemes. The soil would be stacked near N300 / W120 co-
ordinates (Dump Size: 15 m x 8 m) in Western Block and S860 / E2060 co-ordinates
(Dump Size: 25 m x 15 m) in Eastern Block. These locations are near magazine area.
Since the likely volume of soil to be scrapped is not significant, it would follow the natural
angle of repose. The soil will be temporarily stacked in the soil dumps and the dump
height will vary between 1 and 3 meters.
144
About 6 tonnes of top soil from the Western Block and 2034 tonnes from Eastern Block
is envisaged to be generated during the developmental works planned for next five
years. Year-wise likely quantities to be generated are given in Table 4.7.
Table 4.7 : Top Soil Utilization During First Years

Western Block Eastern Block Total
Year
(Tonnes) (Tonnes) (Tonnes)
I 0 50 50
II 1 140 141
III 2 758 760
IV 2 1080 1082
V 1 6 7
Total 6 2034 2040
The top soil would be used for plantation schemes and would also be re-spread in those
areas requiring reclamation. Before spreading top soil, it would be ensured that erosion
and sedimentation control structures such as diversions, berms, waterways and
sediment basins have been established.
4.3.10 Impact on Ecology (Flora and Fauna)
There are 24 blocks of the protected forest and two wildlife sanctuaries in the 10 km
radius study area. Piplughat sanctuary (Darlaghat) is 4 km away from the plant and
Majathal sanctuary is about 5 km from the plant. Details of the flora and fauna are given
in the chapter 3. Conservation plan has been provided in chapter 5. The impact on the
surrounding ecology during the operation of the project will mainly occur from the
deposition of air pollutants. Air pollution affects the biotic and abiotic components of the
ecosystem individually and synergistically with other pollutants. Chronic and acute
effects on plants and animals may be induced when the concentration of air pollutants
exceeds threshold limits.
The incremental emission level of air pollutants due to this project is not likely to induce
any significant changes in the ecology because the national ambient air quality
standards will remain within the limits. However deposition of small amount of pollutants
may also affect the surrounding ecosystem. The project is therefore planned with most
145
efficient air pollution control systems for achieving 50 mg/Nm3 dust emission level from
all the stacks, compared to national standard of 150 mg/Nm3 so that the impact on
nearby ecosystem are minimized. Most of the fugitive dust emission generation points
are also fitted with efficient air pollution control systems (Plant dedusting systems).
Water sprinkling type system will be used at material handling points to suppress the
generation of fugitive dust. These measures are adequate to minimize the adverse
impact on nearby forest.
USEPA air quality criteria for SO2 stipulates 0.2 ppm (524 μg/m3) level when visible injury
to sensitive vegetation in humid regions after 3 hours exposure is observed. In another
case, level 0.5 ppm SO2 level (1310 μg/m3) for 1 hour exposure results in visible injury to
sensitive vegetation in humid regions. At higher SO2 concentration of 10 ppm (26214
μg/m3), visible injury to vegetation in arid regions is observed. Such high ambient air
concentration of sulphur dioxide, is not likely to occur in the area.
USEPA air quality criteria for NO2 stipulates 2 ppm (3760 μg/m3) level when foliar injury
to vegetation at 4 hours exposure is observed. At a lower NO2 concentration of 0.25 ppm
(470 μg/m3) during the growing period, decrease of growth and yield of tomatoes and
oranges are observed. Such high ambient air concentration of nitrogen dioxide is
unlikely in the study area.
4.3.11 Impact on Occupational Health
Exposure problems to noise, dust and heat are the major occupational hazards. Noise
induced hearing loss and dust related problems are the notified occupational hazard.
The employees working in dusty environment will be subjected to regular health check-
up. The workers will be diagnosed for respiratory functions at periodic intervals and
during specific complaints for lung function test, sputum test, X-ray test, etc. Hospital
equipped with medical and paramedical staff, medicines, ambulance and other medical
equipment is available. The Hospital provides first aid services in the event of an
accident. The workers will continue to be periodically checked for any clinical complaints
and abnormal symptoms by the in-house medical department.
146
Silicosis: Workers involved in raw material handling activity and those working close to
the mines and crusher are exposed to high dust levels. Over a long period of time such
exposure is likely to result in respiratory problems like silicosis. Measures will be
implemented to reduce the dust generation at the originating point by installing
appropriate control devices. Plant personnel working in dust prone areas will wear
personnel protective equipment like air filters over their nose. Job rotation schemes will
be practiced for over-exposed persons (Those exposed to high dust levels)
It will be ensured that workers are not exposed above the threshold noise limits
prescribed by OSHA and Factories Act through suitable administrative controls.
Personal Protective Equipment like earplugs and muffs will be provided and
administrative pressure applied for using them. Auditory examination by qualified doctors
upon the first employment and thereafter periodic examination will be conducted which
include determination of auditory threshold for pure tones.
4.3.12 Impacts due to Accidents
Fire in coal yard: This is the most common accident known to occur in any plant storing
and handling coal. Since such incident takes sufficient time to get widespread, enough
response time is available for plant personnel to get away to safer distance. An
elaborate fire hydrant network and fire fighting system comprising of trained crew and
facilities will mitigate the risk of such incidents.
Ammonium Nitrate Fuel Oil (ANFO): The accidents can occur due to mishandling on
ANFO. By adopting good engineering design and quality equipment and regular
maintenance, trained manpower has eliminated the risk completely. No accident
occurred in the past which reveals the effective measures taken by the ACL.
Mechanical injury to body parts: The places are workshop, during mechanical repair
work in different units, during construction work, road accidents due to vehicular
movement, etc, etc.
147
Workers exposed to mechanical accident-prone areas will be given personal protective

equipment i.e. safety helmets, ear plugs, ear muffs, gum boots, safety shoe with toe
protection. All safety and health codes prescribed by the BIS will be implemented. Fire
hydrants will be located at all convenient and strategic points along the major drains and
checked for water availability on regular basis. Fire extinguishing equipment, water
sprinklers and water hoses will be provided at all convenient point. Fire, heat, smoke and
hydrocarbon detection alarms will be installed in the coal yard.
4.3.13 Impact on Public Health and Safety
Significant impact of air emissions during the project operation will occur within 2.5 km
radius of the clinkerization unit and mines boundary. People living in these villages will
be exposed to air pollution generated from the plant, sometimes or the other, as per the
prevailing wind direction. The national ambient air quality standards prescribe level of air
pollutants that will protect public health and other adverse affect on environment.
Exposure to dust SO2 and NO2 is likely to affect public health if the ambient
concentrations are above the stipulated criteria. Air quality dispersion modeling predicted
that the ambient air quality would remain within the national standards. The factual
position is validated by referring to the prescribed ambient air quality criteria (AAQC)
developed by USEPA. AAQC are cause-effect relationships, observed experimentally,
epidemiological, or in the field, of exposure to various ambient levels of specific
pollutants as shown below.
Level in Level in Exposure Observed human symptoms

ppm μg/m 3
Time
For Particulate Matter (Dust)
- 2000 2 hour Discomfort
- 1000 10 min Direct respiratory mechanical changes
- 110 24 hour Increased respiratory disease risk
For SO2
15 4000 1 hour Decreased mucociliary activity
10 26200 10 min Bronchospasm
5 13100 10 min Increased airway resistance in healthy adults at
rest
1 2620 10 min Increased airway resistance in asthmatics at rest
and in healthy adults at exercise
148
0.5 1310 1 hour Visible injury to sensitive vegetation in humid

regions
0.19 500 24 hours Aggravation of chronic respiratory disease in
adults
0.07 180 365 days Aggravation of chronic respiratory disease in
children
For NO2
5 9420 15 min Impairment of normal transport of gases between
blood and lungs in healthy adults
2.5 4710 2 hour Increased airway resistance in healthy adults
2 3770 4 hour Foliar injury to vegetation
1.0 1890 15 min Increased airway resistance in bronchitis
Wastewater from the project will not be discharged outside into any streams. The noise
will be confined within the plant and mines boundary. Liquid fuel will be stored inside the
plant and layout and design of the storage tanks will conform to OISD specifications and
necessary fire risk mitigation measures will be provided. Approval to locate this storage
tanks will be obtained from the Chief Controller of Explosives. Therefore the impact of
the project on the health and safety of surrounding public will be insignificant in nature.
4.3.14 Impact on Traffic Movement
During the study period (2009) maximum traffic in study area was recorded at Darlaghat
crossing. The movement of trucks is higher than other type of motor vehicles. Maximum
traffic movement was observed during day time. Less traffic movement is found during
night time. Traffic congestion on the plant entry and exit common road was always seen.
With the operation of second Rauri plant the traffic volume would increase further.
Additional 600 trucks and 300 cars would aggravate the problem.
ACL developed alternate cement concrete road (after 2010) at a cost of Rs.22 crores
from Suli and Rauri Plant to Chhamla on NH88, which reduced the traffic congestion at
Darlaghat crossing. ACL introduced efficient and safe traffic management practices. It
introduced 3-rigid axles / multi axle trucks of 9 and 16 tons capacity to reduce the traffic
volume and breakdowns.
149
Traffic Modeling Studies: The extent of impacts due to increase in traffic, at any given
time, will depend upon the rate of vehicular emission within a given stretch of road and
the prevailing wind speed, wind direction and stability class. The impacts will have strong
temporal dependence as both these factors vary with time. The modeling has been done
for traffic of 600 trucks, 200 passenger vehicles and 400 two and three-wheelers.
CALINE4 model developed by California Department of Transportation has been used.
The model is based on Gaussian dispersion equation and uses a mixing zone concept to
characterize pollutant dispersion over the roadway. Given the source strength,
meteorology, site geometry, the model predicts pollutant concentration for receptors
located within 150 m of the roadway. This is important region for estimating the impacts
due to low level emissions. The averaging time of the model is 60 minutes to account for
hourly variation. 60 minutes averaging time is selected because the wind speed and
direction do not remain steady for more than an hour and the receptor targets are
maximum 300 m.
Due to averaging time of 60 minutes, the impacts on the ambient air quality will be
mostly for CO where hourly standard is available (NAAQS-1994). The plying of vehicles
has been distributed over 12 hours of the day. The carriageway of 6 m, including
shoulders of 1.5 m on either side, has been considered for modeling.
Emission standard: The emission standard for Indian vehicles has been used to
provide the emission factors. The emission factor for CO is 11.2 g/km/vehicle for
dumpers/trucks, 8.68 g/km/vehicle for passenger cars and 6.75 g/km/vehicle for
scooters/ three wheelers [EPA Notification GSR 609 E, 15-9-1993].
Meteorology: Air quality predictions were developed for all stability class using the
representative wind speed. For Stability Class A, B, C, D, E and F the wind speed
considered are 1.0 m/s, 2.0 m/s, 3.0 m/s, 4.0 m/s, 2.0 m/s and 2.0 m/s.
Conclusion: The hourly peak results for CO in μg/m3 are shown in Table 4.8.
150
Table 4.8 Results of Traffic CO Modeling (all 1-hr-avg values in μg/m3)

Distance Stability Stability Stability Stability Stability Stability
from road Class A Class B Class C Class D Class E Class F
center
50m 25.5 23.3 21.3 20.8 30.5 30.1
100m 19.6 18.1 14.5 8.3 22.1 22.2
The ambient air quality of background CO levels will have insignificant impact. The
national standard of hourly CO level in ambient air is 4000 μg/m3 compared to the
incremental value of 30.5 μg/m3 maximum due to the increase in traffic flow. Positive
impact will be there on account of increasing traffic because of extra job opportunity as
drivers, attendants, technicians, workshop, etc of the vehicles (dumpers and trucks).
This will negate the adverse impact on account of vehicular pollution. Implementing the
pollution emission rules prescribed under Motor Vehicles Act by the transport authorities
will minimize the negative impact.
Positive Impact due to Installation of OLBC

OLBC is an integral link between the mining areas to cement plant which keeps the
management free of any burden to transport the raw material to cement plant. Road
length is 19 km whereas the length of existing OLBC is 3 km. New 7 km OLBC from
Eastern Mangu Block to Plant is also proposed. The OLBC replaced the annual
movement of 380000 trips of dumpers to and fro from mining area to cement plant.
OLBC eliminated the contribution to the green house gases. CO emissions come out to
be 80864kg per annum for the 19km road length.
ACL engaged Central Road Research Institute to conduct a detailed study on the“Traffic
and Air Polluton Survey, Estimate Air Pollution Load along the Road Network connecting
Darlagha – Ropar – Nalagarh” and suggest Recommendations for efficient and safe
traffic management. The Conclusion and Recommendation of Central Road Research
Institute (Report titled “Trafiic and Air Polluton Survey of Road Network connecting
Darlagha – Ropar – Nalagarh”) is provided in Annexure-8.
151
Existing OLBC for Transporting Limestone
Covered Conveyor
152
4.3.15 Social Impact
Agriculture is the main occupation of the people and has an important place in the
economy of the district. As regards occupational distribution of the work force, there
were 22200 main workers in the Tehsil, according to the Primary Census Abstract of
2001. About 41% of the workers are cultivators and agricultural labour. It is anticipated
that this project will improve the socio economic status in the study area by way job
opportunities to near by villagers in the mining as well as in the cement plant.
The residential area of Chakru has been acquired for existing mines and the residents
were rehabilitated and resettled as per the Rehabilitation and Resettlement Scheme of
Himachal Pradesh Government. During expansion of mines, 3 families in new Dhar of
village Mangu will be rehabilitated and 4 families in old Dhar of village Sanghoi will be
rehabilitated as per the Rehabilitation and Resettlement Scheme of Himachal Pradesh
Government. The literacy level of the area will increase with the inflow of educated
people in the area for operation of mining and cement plant. ACL shall contribute for
upliftment of education level of its workers.
The social impact during the operation stage of the project will be of beneficial nature.
Local people will be preferred for employment and depending upon their skill and
experience they will be allotted suitable jobs.
Demographic profile of the area will undergo significant changes after this project. More
and more people will come from other places in search for business and employment.
There will be significant positive impact on the overall socio-economic pattern of the
area. More and more amenities like educational facility, health centers, recreation
centers, etc. will come up in the area along with several other infrastructure facilities.
Large beneficial impacts in terms of gross economic yield will accrue on account of the
project. The gross economic yield will increase through increase in high economic group
and subsequent market multiplier effect. The benefits accrued will be obviously
tremendous in local as well as in regional context.
153
4.3.16 Impact of Change of Land Use
For expansion of Rauri Plant and Kashlog Mines no additional land shall be acquired.
The expansion activity shall be carried out within the mining lease area. Hence there will
be no change in landuse, particularly on agriculture land and gaucher / grazing land.
4.4 Assessment of Significance of Impacts
Environmental impact evaluation of the proposed project has been conducted by

evaluating various environmental parameters, namely physical, biological, aesthetics
and human interest. Overall impact of the proposed project is likely to be beneficial to
the society. The peripheral beneficial impacts are community welfare activities in the
field of education, health, transportation and infrastructure facilities. The positive
economic output will improve the overall quality of life of people living in the region.
There will be negative impact due to dust generation. The socio-economic environment
will have positive impact because of direct and indirect employment opportunity.
Topography of the mining area will be changed at the end of the project. The majority of
the rehabilitation would be in the form of plantation / afforestation over leftover benches
in the three Blocks while the lower benches and bottom most bench floor will be used for
creating water bodies in the Western and the Eastern Blocks. A total of 225 ha area
comprising 81, 117 and 27 ha respectively from Western, Eastern and Central Blocks
would be available for reclamation and rehabilitation at the end of deposit life. It has
been envisaged to convert 16 ha reclaimed area of Western Block and 13 ha of Eastern
block to water bodies. Rest of the reclaimed areas of the three Blocks (196 ha) would be
rehabilitated in the form of afforestation and orchards. Further plantation would be
carried out along haul roads, near office, magazine, crusher, below OLBC and over
barren slopes in the acquired areas to achieve density @ 2500 plants/ha so that a dense
green canopy is developed in the environs. It has been envisaged to convert mined out
afforested area into natural jungles. Activity of mining of limestone, construction of
cement plant and operation of cement plant will contribute the greenhouse gases. The
combustion of coal and calcinations of limestone produces CO2, a gas that is linked to
global warming through the greenhouse effect. Intense greenery will be developed to act
154
as sink for the CO2. Ambient air quality and ambient noise quality of study area will be
well within the limits. No adverse impact on the water bodies of area will occur.
The deficiency of the cement generation in the northern zone shall be decreased by
installation of this plant. This will eliminate the movement of trucks for long distances
otherwise required for transportation of deficiency of cement in the states of northern
region. Installation of OLBC will eliminate the movement of trucks between mining area
to cement plant which is 19 km road distance. The installation of cement plant close to
the resource of limestone will minimize the impact of contribution to the GHG.
The area falls in seismic zone V and is highly prone to the earthquakes. Safety
measures have been taken while designing the structure of the cement plant. Retaining
toe walls and check dams shall be constructed to restrict rolling of boulders towards the
slope areas. Check dams / filters are also constructed to control the surface runoff water
carrying silt during monsoon season.
Best production technology as described in chapter 2 fitted with best available pollution
control devices will reduce the impact of environmental pollution. Adequate community
development measures and rehabilitation and resettlement of the oustees will reduce the
impact on social environment. Compensatory afforestation measures and contribution to
conservation efforts of flora and fauna will reduce the impact on forest ecosystem
including that of the two wild life sanctuaries.
155
CHAPTER 5 : ADDITIONAL STUDIES
5.1 Risk Analysis
Thorough examination of the project report of facilities and P&I, together with
consultation with ACL, all accident or spill scenarios has been identified that could result
in environmental consequences. Following scenarios feel under Maximum Credible
Accident Scenario
• Fire due to spill of 500 KL FO / HSD from storage tank

• Fire in coal yard and gallery
• Injury to body and body parts (mechanical)
a) Fire in Fuel Tanks: Furnace Oil / HSD is a mixture of aromatic hydrocarbons with
flash point and auto ignition point higher than naphtha, petrol and kerosene. It is
flammable and needs source of ignition to catch fire. Its vapour pressure is also higher
than its other counterparts. Hence, fire risk due to storage and handling of Oil is less
compared to naphtha or petrol. FO / HSD has boiling point above the ambient
temperature and therefore stored in tanks under normal atmospheric pressure and
temperature. Continuous release of such non-boiling liquids from vessels due to leaks
will form a contained pool inside the dyke area of the Tank. Upon ignition the liquid pool
will result in pool fire. In case of ignition of the hydrocarbon vapour-air mixture present
near rim seals and rim vents of storage tanks, tank fire will result in tank fire. Pool fire
and Tank fire falls under MCA scenario. The heat radiation effect distances for the
largest tank combination are described below.
1st degree burn - 4.0 KW/m2

1% fatality - 12.7 KW/m2 for 20 seconds exposure [EIA manual of MOEF prescribes
thermal limit of 12.7 for 20 seconds exposure]
50% fatality - 25.0 KW/m2
99%fatality - 37.5 KW/m2
The following assumptions have been considered during modeling:
156
1. Steady state burning has been assumed.

2. A surface radiation flux of 120 KW/m2
3. The flame is cylindrical in shape with the diameter based on the hydraulic
diameter of the spillage area.
4. The flames maintain a constant and uniform surface heat flux. No account is
made for the pulsation effects.
5. The effect of wind speed on the flame length is considered insignificant.
Computer Aided Management of Emergency Operations (CAMEO software) and USEPA

guidelines (Central Federal Register - CFR 40, Part 68, 1998 titled "Chemical Accident
Prevention Provision") have been followed for end-point distance calculation. Wind
speed affects the flame parameters in two ways, namely flame length and flame tilt. At a
low wind speed, the flame length is more, which reduces with increase in wind speed,
whereas the tilting of the flame in the direction of wind increases with higher wind speed.
Hence a largely tilted flame intensifies radiation at any point in the direction of wind and
on the contrary large flame length poses greater threat at any point from radiation point
of view. For similar fire sizes the effect distances under 3 m/s wind speed is significantly
larger than those distances under 1.5 m/s wind speed. This is due to tilting of flame
under higher wind speeds (21 to 47 degrees tilt). For 1.5 m/s stable atmosphere (F class
stability), 5 degree tilt has been considered in the cases of pool fire.
Consequence of Fire: The summary of the consequence modeling results for Pool fire is
shown below: Endpoint distance [1% fatality - 12.7 KW/m2 for 20 seconds exposure]
In case of pool fire pertaining to total 500 KL fuel, the thermal damage for 1% fatality
under 3 m/s wind speed, B class stability is 23.4 m.
In case of pool fire pertaining to 500 KL fuel, the thermal damage for 1% fatality under
1.5 m/s wind speed, E class stability is 20.6 m.
Maximum Consequence Tank Fire: The fire consequence of tank fire is less than that
of pool fire; hence endpoint distances are not of any significant because risk
management measures for pool fire consequence will be adequate for this scenario.
The probability of ignition of flammable vapours is given below:
157
Probability of Ignition of Flammable Vapours (Source DNV)

Continuous Instantaneous Ignition Ignition Ignition
release rate release rate probability probability probability
(kg/s) (kg) Immediate Delayed No Ignition
< 10 < 1000 0.2 0.05 0.75
10 to 100 1000 to 10000 0.5 0.1 0.4
> 100 > 10000 0.7 0.2 0.1
Fire in coal yard: This is the most common accident known to occur in any plant storing
and handling coal. Since such incident takes sufficient time to get widespread, enough
response time is available for plant personnel to get away to safer distance. An
elaborate fire hydrant network and fire fighting system comprising of trained crew and
facilities will mitigate the risk of such incidents. In case of bunkers / tunnel, alarm system
and smoke detectors should be installed.
Mechanical injury to body parts: In cement plant there are several places where
workers are likely to be involved with accidents resulting in injury to body parts. The
places are workshop, during mechanical repair work in different units, during
construction work, road accidents due to vehicular movement, etc, etc.
Workers exposed to mechanical accident-prone areas will be given personal protective

equipment. The non-respiratory PPE includes tight rubber goggles, safety helmets,
welders hand shields and welding helmets, plastic face shields, ear plugs, ear muffs,
rubber aprons, rubber gloves, shoes with non-skid soles, gum boots, safety shoe with
toe protection.
All safety and health codes prescribed by the BIS will be implemented. Safety data
sheets of the hazardous chemicals will be displayed at specific locations. Fire hydrants
will be located at all convenient and strategic points along the major drains and checked
for water availability on regular basis. Fire extinguishing equipment, sand buckets, water
sprinklers and water hoses will be provided at all convenient point. Fire, heat, smoke and
hydrocarbon detection alarms will be installed.
158
On-site disaster management plan will be prepared after the construction is over and
considering the actual inventory of stored hazardous materials. The plan will contain the
name and contact number of plant personnel, district officials, police station, fire station,
and hospitals.
The likelihood of accidents and hazards has been assessed. In the absence of
documented failure frequency data for this type of plant, a qualitative relative likelihood
band of ‘high’, ‘medium’ or ‘low’ was assigned. The assessment of the potential
likelihood of each scenario concluded that three of the scenarios pose a likelihood of
‘low’, and the three scenarios pose a likelihood of ‘medium’. This was primarily as a
result of following considerations:
• The chemical or material released not reaching an off-site receptor, due to the
nature of the chemical or some form of on-site containment;
• The chemical not being sufficiently toxic, or present at a particular environmental
receptor for a sufficient period of time, or at a sufficient level, to have an adverse
effect on that receptor; and
• The absence of any significant environmental receptors in the vicinity of the site
that could be affected by a release of any of the chemicals and materials
released.
5.1.1 Emergency Response Plan
The quantum of risk posed by an industry depends not only on the hazardous chemicals
being used, stored, handled or manufactured, but also on the industry management,
level of safety awareness among employees and the safe practices and preventive
measures followed while handling these chemicals. The main areas considered for
management capability are as follows:
Compliance with existing Rules and Regulations: The following statutory provisions to be
complied by ACL:
159
1. The MSIHC Rules, 1989/2000 notified under the Environment Protection Act, 1986.
2. Rules on Emergency planning, Preparedness and Response for Chemical Accidents,
1996.
3. Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling Rules) 2000
4. Factories Act, 1987 (Amended)
5. Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991
6. Air Act, 1981 and Water Act, 1974
Engineering Aspects: This includes the factory layout and following general features of
the facility.
1. Demarcation with proper boundary wall
2. Green belt and buffer zone
3. Segregation of process and utility blocks
4. Access for emergency vehicle movement
5. Adequacy of exit and entry points
6. Ventilation of process area
7. Dyking of hazardous material storage tanks
8. Source of process knowhow and documentation
9. Use of codes and standards
10. Third party inspection
Process Aspects: This include the process safety angle like reaction characterization (is
the reaction well characterized in terms of runaway potential, exotherms, heat of
reaction, etc.), existence of high temperature pressure alarms, back up indicators,
annunciate panel, etc. and existence of process control through PLC, single loop
controls, interlocks, etc.
Emergency response: It includes the emergency preparedness of the installation like

1. Working on-site emergency plan
2. Fire protection system in terms of fire water storage, hydrant, sprinkler, foam, fire
alarms, smoke detectors and gas detectors
3. Emergency power
4. First aid, emergency vehicle and medical provisions
5. Back-up communication
6. Training and mock drill
7. Personnel Protective Equipment and Self contained breathing apparatus
Management System: It includes the management commitment within the organisation.

1. Existence of professionals in key factory positions
2. Safety, health and environment function
160
3. ISO 14000 and ISO 9000 certification, Occuptional Health & Safety Policy ( OHSAS
18001-2001)
4. System for recording near miss and accident investigation
5. Workers awareness of hazards involved
Operation and Maintenance System: This includes

1. Existence of SOP for all critical operations
2. Inerting systems used for reactors, tanks, pipelines, etc.
3. Earthing system
4. Preventive maintenance system
5. System for implementing plant modifications
The aim of hazard control and disaster management is concerned with preventing
accidents through standard design and efficient operation, preventive maintenance,
inspection and proper usage of safety measures by which it is possible to reduce the risk
of an accident. ACL should coordinate with the District Administration and adopt all
measures to minimize the effect of disaster. The objective should be to localize the
emergency and, if possible, eliminate it and minimize the effects of the disaster on
workforce and surrounding community. This EMP formulates a procedure for controlling
disaster with minimum damage to men, material and machines, evacuating the victims to
safer places, rescuing the victims and providing them medical treatment, rehabilitating
the affected areas, delegating specific tasks to staff (avoid overlapping of activities within
various groups) and preserving relevant records as evidence in any subsequent inquiry.
Elimination of hazards will require prompt action by operators and emergency staff and
mobilizing fire-fighting equipment, emergency shut-off valves and water sprays. To
minimize the effects of a disaster, prompt operation for providing rescue, first aid,
evacuation, rehabilitation and right information to people living in nearby areas is
necessary.
Emergency team leader is called site main controller (SMC) who should be the plant
manager. He should lead the emergency response team. In his absence the senior most
person available at plant should act as emergency team leader. Besides the top officials
described above, rest of the employees should be divided into three action teams
namely A, B, C. Action team A consists of staff of section in which accident has
161
occurred. Action team B consists of staff of non-affected section and maintenance

department. Action team C consists of supporting staff i.e. security supervisor, shift
supervisor and ancillary people comprising of contractor, labour, etc.
Team A should initiate action in case of an emergency. Team B should help team A by
remaining in their respective sections and preparing to comply with specific instructions
of SMC. Team C consisting of supporting staff should help Team A as and when
required and receive direction from Team B to act. Team C should help in evacuating
the affected personal to safer place, under the supervision of Team B. A multi-channel
communication network should connect Site Emergency Control Room (SECR) to
control rooms of various other departments and the nearest fire station, medical centre
and district hospital.
The onsite emergency will in all probability commence with fire or burns and the victims
will be the members of operational staff on duty. In case a staff member on duty spots
the emergency, he (as per site emergency procedure of which he is adequately briefed)
should go to nearest emergency (fire) alarm location. He should try his best to inform the
exact location and nature of emergency to the fire fighting station. In accordance with
work emergency procedure, the following key activities should immediately take place to
control the emergency.
On site crew should arrive at the site of incident with fire extinguishers and necessary
equipment.
Emergency security controller should commence his role from main gate office.
Incident controller should arrive at SECR with members of his advisory and
communication team and assume absolute control of the site. He should receive
information continuously from incident controller and give decisions and directions to the
following:
a) Incident controller
b) Plant control rooms
c) Emergency security officer
162
d) Site or shift medical officer
8. After all the key emergency personnel have taken up their respective positions, the
incident controller should use communication system to convey and receive the
messages. At the site of incident the incident controller should directly handle the
emergency with the help of specific support group such as Team C and fire fighting
personnel. At the main gate, the Emergency Security Controller and Personnel
Manager will contact external agencies. At the site medical center / first aid center,
the Medical Officer will take control of medical support services. Site Main
Controller should direct and decide all issues and direct the following aspects:
a. Whether the incident controller requires reinforcement of manpower and

facilities.
b. Whether the plant operation should be shut down or kept in running
condition.
c. Whether the staff in other locations should be kept indoors or evacuated
and assembled at predefined safe areas.
d. Whether the missing staff members should be searched or rescued.
e. Whether off-site emergency plan should be activated and message to that
effect should be sent to the District Headquarter / Administration.
f. Whether and when outside emergency services should be called.
g. Respond to any large size complaints from outside public and to assess
an off-site impact arising out of the on-site emergency.
9. On receiving the message of Disaster from site main controller (SMC), fire control
room attendant should sound siren ‘wailing type’ for 5 minutes. Incident controller
should arrange to broadcast disaster message through public address system. On
receiving the message of ‘Emergency Over’ from incident controller the fire control
room attendant should sound alarm ‘All Clear Signal’ straight for two minutes. The
features of alarm system will be explained to one and all to avoid panic or
misunderstanding during disaster.
10. On receiving the signal following actions will be taken:
a. All the members of advisory committee, personnel manager, security

controller, etc. shall reach the SECR.
b. The process unit persons will remain ready in their respective units for
crash shutdown on the instruction from SECR.
c. The persons from other sections will report to their respective officer.
163
d. The concerned section will take immediate action to remove contractor’s

personnel outside the plant gate.
11. When the incident has eventually been brought under control as declared by the
incident controller, the SMC will send two members of his advisory team as
incident site for the following purpose:
a. To conduct an on-the-spot assessment of total damage and prevalent

condition with particular attention to possibility of recurrence of the
emergency situation, which may be temporarily under control.
b. To inspect other parts of site which might have been affected by impact of
incident.
c. To inspect the personnel collection centers and roll call centers, to check
if all persons on duty have been accounted for.
d. To inspect all the control rooms of the plant in order to assess and record
the status of respective plants and to supervise any residual action that is
deemed necessary.
12. Once the emergency situation comes under control, the advisory team should
return to SECR with their observations, report and submit the findings in writing to
SMC. Based on the reports, SMC should communicate further directives to all
emergency management sub-centers and finally declare and communicate
termination of emergency and authorize step by step restoration of normal
operation of the affected plant. Emergency security controller and personnel
manager should deal with all the members of public and other local bodies from the
main gate office. During the entire period of emergency, the site should remain out
of bounds to external visitors except for the following officials:
a. District fire personnel

b. District hospital ambulance staff
c. Civil/ Defence personnel
d. District administration
e. Factory Inspectorate Officers and Labour Commissioner
f. Officers of State Pollution Control Board
g. Insurance authorities.
13. Effective working of rescue team is essential during the disaster. In order to make
the services of rescue team more effective following equipment will be provided to
the team.
164
a. Self rescue type gas filters (with oxygen cylinder or compressed air)
b. Mechanical filters
c. Fire proximity suits, asbestos aprons or aluminized asbestos suits)
d. Safety helmets
e. Face shields (Asbestos or PVC)
f. Petromax lamp/Torches
g. Axes/hand saw
h. Fire entry suits
i. Fire blankets
j. Gloves (PVC, asbestos, special rubber make)
k. Ropes
l. Ladders
m. Rubber glove (tested upto 25000 volt.)
n. Blanket
o. Rubber sole shoes and gum boots
p. Safety shoes with toe protection
q. Shoes with non-skid soles
r. Safety belt with life line (leather, hard rubber or neoprene)
14. In view of vulnerability to fire, effective measures have been considered to

minimize fire hazard. Fire protection is envisaged through hydrant and sprinkler
system, designed as per the recommendation of Tariff Advisory Committee of
Insurance Association of India / Loss Prevention Association of India.
15. For detection and protection of the plant against fire hazard, any one or a
combination of the following systems will protect susceptible areas:
a. Hydrant system
b. Portable fire extinguishers
c. Fire alarm system
16. Fire hydrant points should be provided at all necessary places. Medium velocity
spray system should be provided for protection of transformers, cable galleries and
coal storage areas. Water for hydrant, spray and sprinkler systems should be
supplied from the fire-water pumps located in water pump house. The hydrant
system should be designed as an ordinary hazard class. Adequate number of
portable and mobile chemical fire extinguishers (Carbon dioxide, dry chemical
powder, foam types) should be provided at strategic locations throughout the plant.
165
Fire detection, heat detection, hydrocarbon detection and alarm system should be
provided to detect fire/heat/smoke/hydrocarbons in vulnerable areas of the plant.
5.1.2 Risk Mitigation Measures
1. Appropriate storage facilities should be provided for special requirements such as

for substances that are flammable should be kept separate.
2. After constructing the plant and based on actual inventorization of hazardous

chemicals that are stored inside the premises, their exact location and appointment
of O&M staff, ACL project management team should carry out a detailed risk
analysis. Based on the results of consequence analysis and end-point distances,
On-site and Off-site Disaster Management Plan should be prepared as per the
guidelines of Factories Act. The Plan should be prepared in consultation with the
district administration and got approved by the Hazard Control Cell of the district.
Name and contact numbers of plant personal, concerned government officials,
police station, fire station, ambulance, district hospital staff should be mentioned in
the plan.
3. Passive mitigation measures that should be considered are dyke walls around the
liquid fuel storage tanks, enclosures, drains, sumps, etc, wherever necessary.
Adequate capacity dyke wall around the tank to contain the entire volume of tank in
case of spill should be made.
4. It is recommended to locate the fuel tanks at least 25 m away from the plant
boundary so that societal risk is avoided.
5. Active mitigation measures that should be considered are water sprinkler system,
isolation valves, emergency shut down system, etc.
6. In case of spill or leaks in storage tanks leading to containment of flammable liquid,

vaporisation should be avoided by placing fume suppression chemicals over the
surface of liquid [they provide a curtain over relevant sections]. Water spray
166
systems or foaming systems should be used over storage tanks, and storage
vessels.
7. Emergency isolation valves at critical locations on equipments / pipings should be

placed to isolate high inventory of hydrocarbons.
8. Nitrogen / steam purging facilities should be provided on critical equipment /

system for driving out hydrocarbons.
9. In case of fire, the cooling of adjoining tanks should be started immediately. It is

also necessary to cool the tank on fire.
10. Non-essential plant personnel (office staff, administration and accounts staff)
should be located away from the storage area outside the zone of 4 KW/m2
radiation intensity.
11. All hazardous storage systems should be designed with safety features as
appropriate and recommended to enhance the safety against design failure.
12. Pumps of reliable quality should be installed. Arrangements should be made

around the pumps so that leaks from glands, valves or joints can be contained
locally.
13. Earthing of road tankers carrying flammable chemicals should be made before
unloading to eliminate possibility of static sparks.
14. All lighting and electrical equipment in the unloading area and flammable
chemicals storage area should be suitable to the area classification approved by
Competent Authority.
167
15. Pressure detectors should be installed for oil & gas pipelines, the indication of
which should be seen in the control room. This would enable the control room to
detect any leakage in the pipelines forwarding fuels / products.
16. Hydrocarbon detectors should be provided at strategic locations.
17. Minor leaks could occur in routine operations, like pump seal failure, flange leak,
sample point valve left open or drain valve left open. These should be checked
regularly by a preventive maintenance program and rectified immediately.
18. Corrosion protection methods for pipelines should be done. All locations where the
above ground pipelines are close to traffic movement, protection like crash guards
should be provided.
5.2 Wildlife Conservation Plan
Pipulghat Wildlife sanctuary and Majhathal Wildlife Sanctuary is present within the 10 km
study area of mines and clinker unit. Both the sanctuaries falls under Kunihar Forest
Division. The name of flora and fauna found in the sanctuary is listed in Chapter 3.
Conservation Plan for the Sanctuary : The long term goal of management of wild life
sanctuaries is ”Rehabilitation of the Degrading Habitat” with a view to conserve the
biodiversity available within the sanctuary on long term basis. Discussion with Wildlife
officials of Kunihar Forest Division revealed that conservation efforts can be done by
following measures
1. Improving the habitat for wild life by improving stocking.

2. Increasing the availability of palatable grasses by eradicating weeds
3. Improving water regime
4. Stabilizing various slopes and streams to reduce and ultimately minimize the soil
erosion
5. Reducing the adverse factors like illicit lopping, grazing, poaching and hunting.
168
6. Maintenance and improvement of the path for potential areas available in the
sanctuary from tourist cum education point of view.
Specific Objectives of Conservation Plan:
a. To conserve wildlife by developing their natural habitats keeping in view the

requirements of animals in habiting the sanctuary.
b. To undertake the forest and wild life management practices as per the
requirement of habitat of wild life.
c. To improve the biotype according to sound principal of conservation in order to

provide safe breeding areas from where animals can spread to surrounding
forest.
d. To ensure the preservation of viable wild life population for scientific, economic,
aesthetic, cultural and ecological values.
e. To preserve and propagate the existing wild life by eliminating the decimating
and limiting factors.
f. For education of the people and making them aware about the significance
consorting wild life and about the importance of peace full co-existence.
Ambuja Cement Limited has also contributed to the conservation efforts in following
manner. ACL is further committed to contribute towards the conservation efforts through
whatsoever means the State Government and the Forest Department asks.
ACL has adopted black bear, ghoral, cheel, red jungle fowl, monal and kalij for
conservation. For this cause donation of Rs.2.5 lakhs per year is made to Himachal
Pradesh Zoo Conservation Society.
169
For construction and conservation of water bodies inside the Majhathal Wildlife
Sanctuary, ACL has contributed financial assistance of Rs.75000/- to State Forest
Department.
ACL engaged the services of Himalayan Forest Research Institute.for reclamation and
rehabilitation of mined out area. 2500 saplings of native species were planted. ACL
made a donation of Rs.3.0 lakhs to Himalayan Forest Research Institute.for this cause.
Rs.2.85 crores has been deposited with the State Forest Department towards
compensatory afforestation, Net Present Value and forest produce against the entire
diversion of forest land to ACL for the purpose of mining, alternative roads and OLBC.
5.3 Reclamation and Rehabilitation Plan
In the hilly terrain, water table is not well defined and occurs at varying depths. The
water table is encountered from 50 m to 100 m depth in the valley portions. The highest
flood level in the vicinity of the mining lease area is 1241.6 MSL. The mining operations
would be far above the existing surface water regime of surroundings in both the blocks.
Hence, surface and ground water regime would not be intercepted during mining
operations.
Restoration of the land to its original pre mining ground conditions is not possible as the
mining in this hilly terrain is carried out by gradual slicing off from top of the hillock.
Further, reclamation of mined out areas is not possible by back filling or dumping since
no pit would be formed in the coming years which may be utilized for filling. Additionally,
no waste material was generated which can be used for such purposes. Thereby, actual
and full fledged reclamation will be feasible only after complete exhaustion of minerals.
However, part of the left-over shale area measuring 1.75 ha over 1490 and 1480 MRL
benches and slopes has been brought under reclamation between Sections 00 / N300
and W100/E200 till date but this area may also come under mining in the coming years.
170
Apart from this 2.46 ha area has been reclaimed over 1410 to 1380 MRL benches. The
majority of the rehabilitation in future would be in the form of plantation over leftover
benches.
5.3.1 Proposals for next five year scheme period: As discussed earlier,
reclamation of mined out areas will not be possible by back filling or dumping since no
pit shall be formed in the coming years which may be utilized for filling. Moreover, in the
hilly terrains once the benches are chopped off, it may not be possible to bring them
back to pre-mining condition. Further, no waste material is generated which can be used
for such purposes. Due to hill deposit, actual and full fledged reclamation will be feasible
only after complete exhaustion of minerals. However, part of shale mining area in the
form of leftover benches would be brought under reclamation in the northern and
southern sub-blocks of Western Block. The area would be developed with right mix of
plant species of the interest to the locals in future. Such type of vegetation shall also
have positive micro climatic effects..
The majority of the rehabilitation in the next five years would be in the form of plantation /
afforestation over leftover benches. About 4.67 ha area in the western block in the form
of leftover benches is likely to be additionally available in the southern sub-blocks of
Western Block for reclamation. Further, 3.54 ha of earlier reclaimed area will be
amenable for mining as per the suggestions from IBM and therefore the total reclaimed
area at the end of scheme period shall reach upto 5.34 ha. The location details of
proposed reclamation area for subsequent rehabilitation in the form of afforestation are
given in Table 5.1 .
Table 5.1: Details of Proposed Reclamation Areas During Next 5 Years

Benches Location Area
Year
Northings Eastings
( MRL) (ha)
I 1420/1410/1400 N400-N500/S100-S400 W200-W300/0-W100 1.10
II 1430/1390 N300-N500/S200-S400 W200-W300/0-W100 0.93
III 1400/1380 N400-N600/S100-S400 W100-W300/0-W100 0.71
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
IV 1410/1370 N30 -N60 /S10 -S50 W20 -W40 /W10 -E20 1.15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
V 1420/1360 N40 -N60 /S10 -S50 W20 -W40 /0-E20 0.78
171
In the Eastern Block, no shale area would be available during next five years, thereby,
reclamation and rehabilitation is not proposed for the Block. Parts of the proposed
mining area and the other areas to be used for infra-structural developments comprise
habitation .The said areas are under acquisition as per the Resettlement and
Rehabilitation (R&R) scheme approved by State Government.
51 check dams and three check filters have been provided in the western block and in
the next five year period would witness the opening of Eastern Block for limestone and
shale production. All the measures being practiced in the Western Block would be strictly
adopted for the new Block and continued for the existing Western Block. 15 nos of check
dams and five nos of check filters were proposed for the Eastern Block.
Topography of the mining area will be changed at the end of the project. The majority of
the rehabilitation would be in the form of plantation / afforestation over leftover benches
in the three Blocks while the lower benches and bottom most bench floor will be used for
creating water bodies in the Western and the Eastern Blocks. A total of 225 ha area
comprising 81, 117 and 27 ha respectively from Western, Eastern and Central Blocks
would be available for reclamation and rehabilitation at the end of deposit life. It has
been envisaged to convert 16 ha reclaimed area of Western Block and 13 ha of Eastern
block to water bodies. Rest of the reclaimed areas of the three Blocks (196 ha) would be
rehabilitated in the form of afforestation and orchards. Further plantation would be
carried out along haul roads, near office, magazine, crusher, below OLBC and over
barren slopes in the acquired areas to achieve density @ 2500 plants/ha so that a dense
green canopy is developed in the environs. It has been envisaged to convert mined out
afforested area into natural jungles.
ACL shall not leave any small corner to degrade the ecological balance. The following
broad objectives have been considered to maintain the ecological balance in the area:
• Continuing the development of mining activities by utilizing resources in the best

advantage.
172
• Conservation of natural resources by keeping degradation of land and pollution

to the minimum.
• Maintain a balance on ecosystem i.e. human, faunal and floral.
• Rehabilitation / reclamation of land (re-vegetation of degraded land by mining) for

future productive use of the area.
The landuse plan during the pre-development stage, development stage and post-
development stage has been provided in chapter 2.
5.3.2 Stabilization of Mined Slopes
Bench slopes are dressed using backhoe, dozer and rock breaker and a gentle gradient
of about 25 to 30 degrees is maintained. Slope stabilization works in the form of physical
and biological reclamation of mined slopes are also done.
The area comes under the seismic zone V and highly vulnerable to earthquakes. Every
step has been/ shall be taken for the existing mining area while designing the site office,
check dams for rollover boulders, slope protection by geo jute cover technology for the
protection.
5.3.3 Checkdams and Retaining Walls
Retaining toe walls and Check Dams are constructed to restrict rolling of boulders
towards the slope areas. Check dams / filters are also constructed to control the surface
runoff water carrying silt during monsoon season.
5.3.4 Plantation
Every effort is and would be made to maintain scenic beauty of the surroundings. A
planned restoration of area surrounding the mines is being taken up and implemented
and would continue the same in future. Details about the present plantation drive and
future Programme is given in the Chapter 5.
173
Reclamation of Minedout Area (Plantation)
5.3.5 Rehabilitation of Displaced Persons
The residential area of Chakru has been acquired for existing mines and the residents
were rehabilitated and resettled as per the Rehabilitation and Resettlement Scheme of
Himachal Pradesh Government. During expansion of mines, 3 families in new Dhar of
village Mangu will be rehabilitated and 4 families in old Dhar of village Sanghoi will be
rehabilitated as per the Rehabilitation and Resettlement Scheme of Himachal Pradesh
Government.
174
EIA of Expansion of Cement Plant and Limestone Mines
Rauri & Kahslog, Darlaghat, HP
CHAPTER 6 : ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN
6.1 Monitoring Plan
Monitoring plan has been prepared to ensure compliance with the applicable
environmental laws and conditions stipulated in the environmental permits. The
monitoring plan also ensures compliance with the recommended safeguards for pollution
prevention and abatement and sustainable development of the project. The objectives of
the monitoring plan are as follows:
¾ To verify the results of the impact assessment study.

¾ To study the trend of concentration values of the parameters, which have been
identified as critical and planning the mitigative measures.
¾ To check and assess the efficacy of pollution control equipment.
¾ To ensure that any additional parameters, other than those identified in the impact,
do not become critical after the commissioning of proposed plant.
The effectiveness of monitoring program depends mainly how best the objective of the
monitoring is addressed through its core elements, for example.
a. Manpower and Instruments

b. Monitoring network
c. Frequency of monitoring
d. Parameters to be monitored
e. Method and duration of sampling
f. Method of analysis
The manpower requirement for monitoring is shown in Table 6.1.
175
Table 6.1 Manpower for Environmental Monitoring

Designation Qualification No. of Experience
Staff
1 Head-EMD M.Tech – Engg or 1 10-15 years in environmental
Ph.D – Science management of large manufacturing
industry or in regulatory authority.
2 Environmental Ph.D – Science 1 5 years in environmental laboratory of
Scientist large industry or in the laboratory
3 Environmental M.Tech – Engg 1 5 years in manufacture or operation
Engineer and maintenance of pollution control
systems
4 Chemist M.Sc – Chemistry 1 5 years experience in environmental
laboratory and pollution monitoring
systems
5 Field B.Sc – Science 2 5 years experience in laboratory,
Assistants greenery development, environmental
sampling, pollution monitoring, etc.
The instruments required for routine environmental monitoring is given in Table 6.2
Table 6.2 Instruments for Environmental Monitoring

Name of Instruments Number Purpose
1 Respirable Dust Sampler 11 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
2 Weather Station 1 Meteorological monitoring
3 Spectrophotometer 1 Analysis of air and water samples
4 pH meter 2 PH measurements
5 Conductivity meter 1 Conductivity measurement
6 DO Meter 2 DO measurement
7 BOD Incubator 1 BOD measurement
8 COD Digestion Kit 1 COD measurement
9 Refrigerator 2 Storing samples
10 Electronic Balance 2 Weighing
11 Oven 2 Drying
12 Desiccator 2 Desiccation
13 Stack Monitoring Kit 2 Stack Monitoring
14 Continuous Automatic 1 On-line continuous station at EMD, to
Ambient air quality monitor RSPM, SO2, NOx and CO.
monitoring station with
display facility
15 Continuous Particulate All major Continuous SPM monitoring
Monitors stacks
176
6.1.1 Stack and Fugitive Emission Monitoring
Air emissions from the project should be monitored using Stack Monitoring Kit as per
Method prescribed by CPCB. The details of grab sampling are given below:
Component Location Parameter Monitoring & Analysis Monitoring
Method Frequency
Stack All stacks SPM SPM – CPCB Method Fortnightly
Emissions Port holes should be Isokinetic method using
Monitoring made on the stack (6 stack monitoring kit
cm diameter, 2 Nos.
at 90o to each other), Sample volume – 500 l of
provided with flange. flue gas
Location of the port
hole should be at 6
times the stack
diameter. Platforms
with railings should
be provided below
the port holes.
Fugitive Raw material storage SPM CPCB Method Fortnightly
Emission and Handling area; High Volume Sampling
Monitoring at upwind and upwind and 500 m
downwind direction downwind direction of the
simultaneously point simultaneously for
1 hour. @1100 l/minute
sampling rate
6.1.2 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
Ambient air of the premises and surrounding area should be monitored using High
Volume Samplers with attachment for sampling particles less than 10 microns size
(respirable particles) as per Method prescribed by CPCB. Monitoring should be done at
three corners of the plant premises by establishing permanent monitoring stations (120
deg to each other).
The monitoring height should not be less than 3 m from ground. The station should not
have any obstacles around 500 m area, Station should be 500 m away from road.
Monitoring should be done during the construction stage as well as during the operation
stage. The sampling details are given below.
177
Location Parameter Monitoring & Monitoring

Analysis Method Frequency
Ambient At 3 locations within 1-2 km SPM SPM, RSPM, SO2, Twice a
Air of clinker plant (120 degree RSPM NO2 – CPCB week
Quality to each other including Rauri SO2 Method .
village; Township and NO2
Darlaghat (at human Duration of
settlements) sampling – 24
hours
At following locations near Sample volume –

the active working area : Not less than
Mangu in South 1100 l per minute
Chandi in North
Mines dormitory -
representing Kashlog & Patti
Gyana in South
Ratoh in West
Continuous online ambient air monitoring station should be installed at one location,
which should be connected to data logger and real time display unit. The location should
preferably be at the EMD building. Parameters recommended for continuous monitoring
are PM10, SO2, NOx (individual sensors for NO, NO2, N2O) and CO.
6.1.3 Meteorological Monitoring
Meteorological monitoring using continuous online instrument is necessary to know the

upwind and downwind directions, assess and evaluate the stack emissions results and
ambient air quality results and check the effectiveness of air pollution prevention
measures. The details of the meteorological monitoring are given below.
Component Location Parameter Monitoring & Monitoring

Meteorology At EMD Building Wind Speed, Wind As per BIS 8829 Hourly,
(using mast to Direction, Method Continuous
locate the Temperature
recorder at stack Humidity, Rainfall
height level) and Solar insolation
6.1.4 Equipment and Ambient Noise
Noise monitoring is recommended for all work areas inside the plant, plant boundary and
surrounding villages. The details of noise monitoring are given below:
178

Plant Noise Inside clinker Average Leq values CPCB method using Monthly
Levels plant and mines and Maximum value equipment as per
area of Sound Pressure IS-9989 & IS:9779
Level in dB(A)
Ambient All villages Leq values in dB(A) CPCB method using Monthly
Noise outside the equipment as per (separately
Levels clinker plant IS-9989 & IS :9779 for day &
Mines boundary night time)
and all villages
aurrounding the
mines
6.1.5 Water and Wastewater Monitoring
The details of water and wastewater monitoring are given below:

Sewage From the Inlet Flow APHA Method Daily
and outlet of pH
SWRP TDS
TSS
O&G
BOD
COD
Coliform count
Groundwater Observation Ground water Level Standard Methods Once during
Quality wells inside pH of APHA pre-
plant and mines TDS monsoon
(2 Nos. of TSS and once
Piezometer) Total hardness during post
groundwater of Fluoride monsoon
all villages O&G
around the plant Heavy metals
(Hand pumps /
borewells / dug
wells)
Surface Nearby streams pH Standard Methods Once during
water TDS of APHA pre-
Quality TSS monsoon
Total hardness and once
O&G during post
BOD monsoon
COD
Coliform Count
179
6.1.6 Solid & Hazardous Wastes Monitoring
Packaging materials, empty drums, soiled cotton materials, garbage from township and
plant, STP sludge comprises solid wastes. Spent oil and lubricants generated from
various process equipment, machines, vehicles, instruments, oil storage tanks, are
categorized as Hazardous Wastes under the Notification. Used Batteries are also
categories as hazardous wastes. Soiled cotton waste is generally fired in Kiln along with
coal. Electronic wastes should be given to authorized re-processors.
6.1.7 Flora and Fauna Monitoring
The details of flora and fauna monitoring plan is given below:

Flora and Surrounding Health of Flora and Visual checks by Once in 5
Fauna forests Fauna the Ecologists of years
EMD
Frequent interaction
with the forest
officials
News Reports
6.1.8 Workers Health and Safety Monitoring
The details of workers health and safety monitoring plan is given below:

Work At all places Respirable Dust & Respirable Dust Monthly
Environment where there is Inhaled Dust Sampler – CPCB
presence of (dust analysis for method
workers all the free silica) Personal Sampler -
time OSHA Method
Occupational Workers Silicosis, heart By engaging Yearly
Health diseases, diabetes, Occupational Health
reproductive and Specialist in the
child health, ENT Health Centre
problems, etc
180
6.1.9 Community Health Monitoring
The details of community health monitoring plan are given below:

Health of Surrounding Respirable disorders Organizing health Once in 5
Community villagers Heart diseases camps in surrounding years
Diabetes villages with qualified
Reproductive Health doctors and
Child Health supporting staff.
ENT problems Inviting surrounding
people for health
check-up.
CPCB Protocol to be
followed during the
health camps.
6.1.10 Monitoring of DMP
During accident the Onsite and Offsite Disaster Management Plan should be initiated. In
order to monitor the effectiveness of the plans, mock drills at regular intervals should be
carried out. The fire fighting systems should be checked at regular intervals. Fire
extinguishers should be refilled and certified. Awareness programs should be initiated to
make the employees aware of their role and responsibility during any accident. The
surrounding community should be made aware through awareness camps about the
probable disasters and the emergency response plans.
6.1.11 Monitoring of CSR Activities
The CSR work proposed by the company will be monitored by ACL through its dedicated
staff engaged in CSR / PR Department. Regular progress report of the activities of the
work undertaken by the company will be prepared and presented to the top
management of the company for review.
Apart from this, the company will get monitoring and evaluation of the work proposed to
be undertaken by appointing reputed external agency. This will ensure a neutral and an
outsider’s view on the progress of work undertaken by the company.
181
6.2 Action during Abnormal Operating Conditions
During abnormal operating conditions like process upsets or failure of pollution control
devices, the emission concentration would exceed the prescribed limit. Air emissions
from major stacks are measured using online instruments with real time display facility.
In case of abnormal emissions the Head of EMD will directly contact the CEO and HOD
of the unit and assess the situation. The emission load should be brought down to barest
minimum level by reducing the production. In case it is observed that the failure / upset
condition is likely to exceed reasonable time (say 8 hours or more) then the unit should
be shut down till the defect is corrected.
6.3 Budget for Environmental Monitoring
The estimated capital cost for implementing the environmental monitoring is Rs. 1.0
crore. Rs. 0.5 crore would be required as annual recurring expenses for purchasing
spares and chemicals, training, etc.
6.4 Reporting
The monitoring results need to be reported every six-months to the SPCB, CPCB and
MOEF. Effective reporting mechanism should be developed as part of Management
System. The results should be statistically analyzed with graphical representation for
understanding of technical and administrative personnel. Standard reporting formats for
all environmental components should be developed. The results should be
communicated to the HOD of all units and CEO of the project during the monthly review
meetings. In case any problems with the pollution control measures or environmental
management plan has been found during the routine monitoring, it should be
immediately communicated to all concerned and time-targeted action plan should be
prepared to rectify the defect. The environmental performance of the project should be
published in the form of a document. The document should contain targets and action
plan for demonstrable improvement in the environmental performance of the project.
182
CHAPTER 7: PROJECT BENEFITS
The cost incurred on cement transportation has now become an important factor for
deciding on the location of the cement plant. North Zone is a deficit zone and deficiency
in the states of north zone (Punjab, Haryana, Chandigarh, Delhi and Himachal Pradesh)
is met by supply from Rajasthan. A large quantity of cement is being fed into these
deficit states, and considerable expenditure being incurred on freight. Around 4 MTPA
cement gets transported to deficit area of north zone from surplus states.
ACL’s total manufacturing capacity is about 20 million tones per annum which amounts
to be around 10% of the total production share and to meet out the market demand, the
company has taken up steps to enhance the total capacity to more than 25 million tones
per annum in next two to three years. Installation of this cement plant is one more mile
stone in this direction. The demand for northern states like Punjab, Chandigarh,
Haryana, Himachal Pradesh, and Delhi will be met from the proposed plant in Himachal
Pradesh. Due to this, there will be reduction in transportation and as a result there will be
significant reduction in pollution. Truck emits 11.2 grams of CO per km. If the cement is
transported, say about 500 km, the pollution load in terms of CO would be around 1941
tons per year for transporting the 2.6 MTPA cement, considering that one truck carry
about 15 tonnes of cement. This plant is eliminating the transportation of cement far from
the other states which are even more than 500 km. Thereby the installation of cement
plant in the Rauri village of Himachal Pradesh would be in the interest of the nation as
well as for the states of North Zone.
It is anticipated that this project will improve the socio economic status in the study area
by way job opportunities to near by villagers in the mining as well as in the cement plant.
Further, literacy level of the area will increase with the inflow of educated people in the
area for operation of mining and cement plant. ACL shall contribute for upliftment of
education level of its workers. The social impact during the operation stage of the project
will be of beneficial nature. Local people will be preferred for employment and depending
upon their skill and experience they will be allotted suitable jobs. There will be significant
positive impact on the overall socio-economic pattern of the area. More and more
amenities like educational facility, health centers, recreation centers, etc. will come up in
the area along with several other infrastructure facilities. Large beneficial impacts in
183
terms of gross economic yield will accrue on account of the project. The gross economic
yield will increase through increase in high economic group and subsequent market
multiplier effect. The benefits accrued will be obviously tremendous in local as well as in
regional context.
ACL has established an NGO called Ambuja Cement Foundation (ACF) which is working
towards the improvement of the quality of life of villagers residing in the villages
surrounding the mine and cement plant. ACF is catalyst to provide substantial support
for community development. Religious functions are identified and financial assistance
provided for organizing the religious and cultural functions. ACF shall monitor the
progress of multidirectional development in area and shall identify the development
Programme for the villagers. In order to upliftment of educational facilities, financial
assistance is provided to the schools of the area. Full fledged hospital has been
established having all necessary facilities. About 2000 - 2500 workers shall be engaged
during the construction stage of 27 months and about 344 employees for operating the
cement plant and 110 employees for operating the mines.
ACL has enhanced infrastructure development in the region. ACL has constructed and
widened many roads of the area. This is the reason that the buses are now available for
Shimla and Bilaspur from Darlaghat less than hourly frequency. Pucca pathways /
asphalt roads have been constructed to connect the villages. Two petrol pumps have
come up in the area and police station has come up to ensure law and order in the area.
In the field of sanitation, water storage tanks and pipeline have been laid for supply of
water in the nearby villages. Water tankers shall be used for supply of drinking water to
villages those are not having piped water supply. Public toilets are being constructed to
prevent open defecation. Presently about 250 KLD (250000 liters per day) water is
supplied to nearby villages. The same may be increased based on availaiblity. Various
aspects of the lives of the people of the project affected villages have been considered
to make a comprehensive assessment of their needs in order to help them lead a more
complete, fulfilling and happy life.
184
CHAPTER 8 : ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
Objective of the Environmental Management Plan is to use the resources available in

the core zone and buffer zone (10 Km radius) without disturbing the environmental
parameters. Approach of ACL is not only to increase the production capacity of the
cement but also to maintain the sustainable development in the entire region including
core zone and buffer zone. The detailed study has been conducted to know the existing
environmental parameters such as air quality, noise levels, surface & ground water
quality, social & economical status, flora & fauna, topography of the area, traffic density,
meteorological status etc. and anticipated impact (positive and negative) due to
expansion of this project on environmental and socio- economic parameters.
With the installation of the cement plant and mining activities, the impact on environment
by the various activities has been assessed w.r.t. the reversible and irreversible impacts.
Utmost consideration has been given to procure the machinery used in the mining and
cement plant that generates minimal quantity of pollution. Further, well designed
pollution control devices shall be fitted to maintain the pollution control levels the much
below prescribed by Pollution Control Board. ACL’s management is dedicated to
continuously watch the attributes specified by various Governmental Agencies including
the terms and conditions/ advisory guidance in the Environmental Clearance of Ministry
of Environment and Forests. ACL’s management shall also invite advice from the local
public and NGOs working in the area for their participation for environment
management.
8.1 EMP during Construction Stage
This EIA report is for expansion of mining capacity and expansion of proposed clinker
unit at Rauri. Mining is to be conducted in the same mining lease area and no
construction activity is involved. Construction activity of cement plant is under progress.
Only the size of the proposed units will be made larger. The project is being executed on
EPC Route (Engineering, Procurement and Construction), where ACL had invited bids
for various packages, evaluate the technical and financial proposals and awarded the
contract to selected contractors found suitable by ACL Project Management team.
185
Construction phase EMP is being implemented by the contractors. ACL has included
relevant provisions of the EMP in the contract documents and supervise the
implementation and compliance aspects. Child labour or Bonded labour has not been
allowed by ACL to work inside the construction site because this is against the law.
Construction labours have been provided canteen, toilet and drinking water facility.
ACL is obliged to control pollution that may result from its work site area. ACL has
developed a contract specific site environment plan to control pollution from the
construction site. The contractor has designated its staff members as pollution control
representatives who are responsible for environmental management. ACL is monitoring
the environmental performance of the contractor. ACL’s inhouse environmental
laboratory is conducting the environmental sampling and analysis job (ambient air, stack
emissions, noise levels within the plant & outside the plant). For determining the impact
assessment of expansion of mining and clinker plant, base data have been collected and
the same are revealing that all the parameters of ambient air quality and noise are well
within the limits. Monitoring data are given in the chapter 3.
8.1.1 Management of Labour Camps
About 2000-2500 workers will be engaged during the construction period of the clinker
unit. Period of stay of the work force at site will not be uniform. Most of workers will be
taken from nearby villages and only few workers are required arrangement of stay at
plant site besides the experts and engineers. For the workers staying at plant site, it has
been made mandatory for the contractors to provide desired facilities at labour huts;
toilets, kitchens, adequate supply of electricity and water and other things of daily needs
including the facility of first aid and periodical health check up.
8.1.2 EMP for Air Pollution during Construction Stage
No pre operational construction activity is involved at mining site. Site office has already
been constructed and maintained properly. Green belt has been developed around the
site office. To treat the domestic effluent, septic tank has been installed and the treated
effluent is reused. Periodical checking of the quality of the treated effluent is done. Water
186
sprinkling is done regularly to suppress the dust emissions. Wheel of trucks are washed
at the exit points to prevent the mud carrying on the roads and to keep the roads clean.
Road indicators have been provided for easy movement of trucks and workers within the
cement plant. ACL has developed an inspection and maintenance program for
impervious surfaces and containment facilities and have improvement plans in place
where operational areas have not been equipped with an impervious surface, spill
containment kerbs, sealed construction joints and connection to a sealed drainage
system.
Site-specific Recommendations
Take precautions to minimize visible particulate matter from being deposited upon public
roadways as a direct result of his operations. Precautions include removal of particulate
matter from equipment before movement to paved street or prompt removal of material
from paved streets onto which such material has been dropped. Any deposition of
material on public streets by construction equipment will be removed by sweeping in a
prompt manner.
Ensure that vehicles with an open load carrying area used for moving potentially dust–
producing materials will have properly fitting side and tailboards. Materials having the
potential to create dust will not be loaded to a level higher than the side and tail boards,
and carried in vehicles fitted with cover lids or clean tarpaulin cover in good condition.
The tarpaulin should be properly extended beyond side / tail board and secured
properly.
Place excavated materials only on the designated disposal areas. The Contractor should
place material in a manner that will minimize dust production, stabilized each day by
watering or other accepted dust suppression techniques.
The heights from which materials are dropped should be the minimum practical height to
limit fugitive dust generation.
187
Stockpile the material in the locations designated by project manager by creating

suitable slopes. During dry weather, acceptable dust control methods will be used daily
especially on windy, dry days to prevent any dust from bowing. The contractor should
provide water sprinklers at any time that they are required for dust control use. Sufficient
equipment, water and personnel should be available on dumping site at all times to
minimize dust formation and movement to prevent nuisance.
Spray water as required to suppress dust, during handling of excavation soil or debris or
during demolition. Effective water sprays should be used during the delivery and
handling of all raw sand and aggregate and other similar materials, when dust is likely to
be created and to dampen all stored materials during dry and windy weather.
Areas within the sites where there is a regular movement of vehicles should have hard
surface (with slag, boulders, pebbles, asphalted or concreted) that is kept clear of loose
surface material.
If conveyors are used, conveyor belts should be fitted with wind boards, and conveyor
transfer point and hopper discharge area shall be enclosed to minimize dust emission.
All conveyors carrying material that have the potential to create dust should be totally
enclosed and fitted with belt cleaner.
Restrict all motorized vehicles on the site to maximum speed of 15 km/hr and confine
haulage and delivery vehicles to the designated roadways inside the site.
8.1.3 EMP for Water Pollution during Construction Stage

A drainage system has been constructed to drain off all runoff water form the work site
into suitable drain outlet. Temporary drainage are maintained, removed and reinstated
as required. Wastewater arising from toilets of site offices is taken to septic tanks.
8.1.4 EMP for Noise Pollution during Construction Stage
Truck loading, unloading and hauling operations so as to minimize noise impact near
surrounding villages should be properly scheduled. Vehicular movement on the village
188
roads should be avoided. Machinery that emits noise in one specific direction would,
where possible be oriented in a direction away from noise sensitive receptor (human
habitation).
Silencers and mufflers on construction equipment, wherever required, should be

properly fitted and maintained.
Vibrations control is an integral part which shall be given due importance while
installation of the various machineries. The foundation of the every machinery shall be
so designed that vibrations are minimized and isolate the every machine from each other
so as to travel of vibrations from one machine to another machine. Vibrations curtailing
material shall be used in the foundations.
8.1.5 EMP for Solid Waste during Construction Stage
Careful design, planning and good site management would minimize waste of materials
such as concrete, mortars and cement grouts. The contractor should make inventory of
all types of solid waste that are expected during the construction activity before starting
the work.
Construction waste should be segregated as much as possible at site itself to increase

the feasibility of recycling concrete and masonry as filling material and steel pieces as
saleable scrap. Construction waste may be crushed and the aggregates may be used for
construction of low cost houses for workers or villagers rather than to dump.
Litter disposal and collection points should be established around the all construction
work sites. Biodegradable garbage should be composted and used as manure.
8.1.6 Reclamation and Closure Plan
As soon as the construction work is over the site should be made clean of any debris or
other solid wastes. Temporary structures should be dismantled and stored in an
earmarked area. As and when required it should be reused at other construction sites or
189
sold to other project developers. Construction machinery and plants like Ready Mix
Concrete Plant, Asphalt Plant, Stone Crusher, etc should be removed and taken to other
construction site or sold to other project developers.
8.2 EMP for Air Pollution

8.2.1 Fugitive Emission Control during Mining Operation
Drilling, Blasting, Crushing, laying of haul roads and the transportation of the limestone
are the potential source of air pollution. A road roller of 10 tonnes capacity shall also be
deployed to compact the loose surface of the haul road. Along the both sides of the haul
road, massive plantation shall be undertaken to mitigate the soil erosion possibility. A
water sprinkling tanker shall also be deployed to maintain the surface wet so as to avoid
the dust to be air born from the haul road.
Drilling is another source of dust emissions if not controlled adequately. Drilling is carried
out by deploying 150 mm dia. drill equipped with in-built arrangement of water sprinkling
for dust suppression and separate dust extraction system and this arrangement makes
operations practically dust free.
In addition to the above, blasting and transportation are the other sources of air pollution.
Water sprinklers have been provided wherever required to mitigate the emissions from
the loading and unloading of the limestone and shale. The shale is comparatively soft in
nature and higher degree tendency of air born compared to limestone. Dumper of 40
tonnes capacity shall be deployed for transportation of the mined raw material from mine
site to crusher site. There would be about 380 trips of dumpers daily for transporting the
15069 tonnes raw materials (5.5 MTPA) from mine site to crusher site and this will
increase to 520 trips after expansion of the mining capacity from 5.5 MTPA to 7.6 MTPA.
The emission factor of dumper w.r.t. CO is 11.2 gm/km/vehicle. The total CO load due to
operation of 520 dumpers would be 11.6 kg/km to and fro. Additional burden of CO
would be only 3.13 kg/km due to the expansion of the plant in the mining area.
PUC monitoring of the dumpers shall be regularly done at the interval of three month for
the exhaust emissions. Necessary overhauling/ servicing shall be done if the limits are
found exceeding the limits.
190
Combined impact of water sprinklers, covered conveyer belt , green belt around the
plant, channalisation of emissions and installation of well designed dust collector and
monitoring these set up regularly would enable to mitigate impact considerably. Boulders
of lime stone shall be crushed to size 50 mm -70 mm and the temperature of crushed
material would be just nearing to the ambient temperature. Bag filter will be provided to
control dust emission from crusher. Stack monitoring of crusher shall be conducted once
in fortnight for the Particulate Matters. The Particulate Matters should be less than 50
mg/ Nm3. Water sprinklers shall be provided at all loading and unloading points and
limestone yard. All conveyer belts should be covered. Good house keeping shall be
maintained in and around the crushing plant. Wherever possible, shrubs shall be grown
to mitigate problem of dust cloud near the crusher site.
One new Crusher shall be installed. OLBC shall be installed to carry crushed material to
the existing OLBC site in mining area and one more OLBC shall be installed parallel to
the existing OLBC to supply the raw material to cement plant at village Rauri. OLBC is
the only source of raw material handling from mining area to cement plant.
8.2.2 Fugitive Emissions Control from Cement Plant
Fugitive emissions are the air pollutants released in the air other than those from stacks
or vents; Any chemical or mixture of chemicals, in any physical form, which represents
an unanticipated or spurious leak from anywhere on an industrial site.
Crushing: Dust is generated due to the crushing. The crushing will be done by impact
crusher to -75mm to -90mm size fractions. The crushed materials will be transported by
covered conveyor belt. The crusher will be equipped with covered unloading hopper with
atomized water spray system. Operators and attendants will be provided with dust mask.
Transfer Points: At the discharge point, dust is emitted due to free fall of product and
wind carry over. To control the dust emission from dropping/transfer points of the belt
and bucket conveyors, water will be sprayed in crusher to made the material moist.
191
Transportation: Movement of heavy trucks/vehicles on the unmetalled road generates

substantial quantity of dust emission. This is due to the presence of dust over the road,
which is carried away by wind. To control the generation of dust all the roads inside the
plant premises will be concreted. Regular sweeping of all the roads & floors will be done
by vacuum sweeper. Water spray through tankers will be done on bare lands & roads.
The main haulage roads will be constantly kept watered by means of spraying water with
the help of mobile water tankers.
Material Transfer Points: Dust will be generated from all transfer points of conveyors.
As per CPCB Guidelines following measures will be implemented in the Unit to control
the generation of fugitive emissions:
• Enclosure will be provided for conveyors

• Water will be sprayed during unloading of materials.
• All transfer point locations would be fully enclosed.
• Bag filters will be provided at all the transfer points.
• Water would be periodically sprayed on the stockpiles so as to retain some
moisture in the top layer & to avoid wind blowing of fines.
• All the Roads inside the plant premises will be concreted.
• Regular sweeping of all the roads & floors will be done.
• Dust collected from air pollution control equipment will be 100% recycled in
process.
• Adequate ventilation for the packing hall will be provided for venting out
suspended particulate thereby ensuring dust free work environment.
Maintenance of Bag Filters: Maintenance of the Bag houses includes replacement

of bags, checking the performance of the Bag House, maintenance of Bag House,
maintenance of ID fans etc. The information on performance of Bag Houses in
relation to the process/ production conditions will be collected to optimize the
efficiency of Bag Houses.
192
Scheme for Proper Storage of Flyash, Gypsum, Clinker & Coal

Name of Storage Materials Method of Storage
1 Flyash Brought in covered truck and pneumatically
conveyed to flyash silos for storage.
2 Coal Unloading inside covered shed with concrete
platform, properly stacked
3 Gypsum Brought in bags and stored in covered shed
4 Clinker Conveyed through covered conveyors to closed

Silos for storage
8.2.3 Air Pollution from Cement Plant
EMP for Pollution Control Devices : Bags of fiber glass shall be provided in the bag
house to control the emissions from the raw mill, blending silo, preheater since
particulate matters from the hot air to be trapped. Fiber glass may with stand at high
temperature. Fiber glass can withstand at the maximum continuous temperature upto
290oC .Bag house containing the cloth bags shall be provided to control the emissions
from the coal crushing section and coal mill. Temperature in the coal crushing and coal
mill shall be around the room temperature. Cloth bags can with stand upto 82oC. ESP
shall be provided to trap the emissions from the clinker cooling section. A bag filter shall
also be provided to control the emissions from the clinker bulk loading section. This bag
filter shall be made of cloth bags since the temperature shall not be so high at stage.
The bag houses/ ESP are capable of removing the particulate matters upto 99.99% from
the incoming air emissions. The above suggested air pollution control devices shall be
designed to bring down the emissions below 50 mg/Nm3. Adequate stack shall be
provided with the all units of cement plant. ACL has its commitment to spent about 10%
of its cost of the project on controlling the pollution control devices and environment
management. The bag filters and bag houses shall be regularly examined by the experts
for their efficient operation. Online particulate matter monitoring system shall be installed
for kiln/Raw mill. Process interlocking system shall be provided. The plant can be
operated when the pollution control devices are also in operation.
193
8.2.4 EMP for Water Pollution during Operation Stage
Mining Operations
Domestic effluent shall be treated in septic tanks and disposed off in soak pits. Similarly
the water used in the workshop shall be sent in oil water separator. The important steps
to stop the contamination of runoff surface water from the mined out area and preventing
soil erosion are as follows.
1 Proper measures shall be taken to prevent soil erosion and uncontrolled flow of
mine water. Along the haul roads, drainages are laid so that runoff may be
discharged from the area in a controlled manner.
2 Road gradient of 1:16 shall be maintained. Steeper gradient shall be unsafe and
more prone to soil erosion.
3 Check dams shall be provided to prevent the roll out of boulders and soil erosion.
Retaining walls and Settling tanks shall be constructed in the different zones.
4 Plantation in the gullies, below and above the check dams and check filters.
5 Shrubs are planted towards down of the slopes.
6 Three numbers of check filters were built at the culminating points of water
courses.
7 Wetting agent Dustron PC compound is also added in the water for sprinkling
over haul roads for reducing the water consumption.
Efforts to Minimize Ground Water Use: Total water required for the mines (existing
plus expansion) is 150 KLD (m3/day). Water accumulated in the mined out area shall be
used for dust suppression and greenery development purpose during the expansion of
mines. This will effectively reduce the groundwater consumption by 50 KLD. Water
balance is presented in the Figure – 8.1.
194
Figure 8.1 Water Balance of Limestone Mines Expansion
Clinkerization Unit
Clinker manufacturing process is dry. Total water required for the Rauri Plant (existing
plus expansion) is 500 KLD (m3/day). Groundwater will be used only for the domestic
purposes and for cooling purposes, sprinkling to keep the surface wet to avoid the dust
particulate to become air born. Water used for cooling purposes shall be recycled. Run-
off of rain water from all open areas, in particular from coal and raw materials stocking
areas, will contain suspended solids. It is collected using garland drains, intercepted
using oil-water pit and the suspended solids removed by settlement and oil by skimming
at periodic intervals.
195
Efforts to Minimize Ground Water Use: Sewage generated from the staff colony shall
be treated and the treated water shall be used for greenbelt development and dust
suppression. . Water balance of Rauri Plant (2.6 MTPA) is presented in Figure – 8.2.
.
Figure 8.2 : Water Balance Statement for Clinker Plant Expansion
196
8.2.5 EMP for Noise Pollution during Operation Stage
Mining
Noise monitoring of the area has indicated that the noise levels are within the standards
specified under the EPA 1986. Impact due to use of additional machinery of proposed
expansion has also accounted and the models have revealed that noise levels shall be
within the standards specified. Servicing of vehicles and machines are carried out at
regular interval. The following measures are taken to control the noise pollution and
keeping the ambient noise levels below the limits:
• Secondary blasting is totally avoided. Rock breaker and backhoe are used to
replace the secondary blasting.
• Controlled blasting with proper spacing, burden and stemming is maintained;
• Minimum quantity of detonating fuse is consumed by using alternatively Raydet
Excel non-electrical initiation system;
• The blasting is carried out during favorable atmospheric condition and high
human activity timings;
• The prime movers/diesel engines are of proper design and are properly
maintained;
• The operator’s chamber is safe guarded from the noise pollution by preventing it
from the noise arising because of the machinery;
• Trees are being planted on both sides of haul roads;
• Good maintenance and operational practices;
• Provision of closed cabins near the crusher.
The noise levels generated during blasting is instantaneous but the peak levels are high
upto 125 dB(A). The Leq is about 100 dB(A) at about 50 m distance from the blasting
site. Noise levels shall be taken fortnightly near the blasting site. Noise levels shall be
reduced by maintaining the proper time gap and distance between two blasts. Further,
the quantum of the ANFO should also be optimum. The boulder/slabs should not fly in
air during the blasting. The exposure to the noise levels should be as per the standards
prescribed for workplace. 8 hrs exposure is prescribed for the 90 dB(A) noise levels.
Exposure time is reduced if the noise level increases. The noise level standards are
197
given in the tabular chart in the chapter 2. Ear plugs and ear muffs shall be provided as
a precautionary measure to the workers prone to the high noise levels. Sound proof
rooms shall be provided near the stone crusher.
Noise levels of each and every HEMM shall be monitored monthly basis. Ambient noise
levels shall be monitored quarterly at the habitated area as done during obtaining the
base data. The noise levels at the work place shall be taken fortnightly. If the noise
levels are observed alarming, say more than 90 dB(A) exposure for 8 hrs, daily noise
monitoring shall be conducted and the workers shall be exposed for lesser time as
specified.
Cement Plant
Ambient air quality monitored near the plant and in the village Rauri reveals that the
noise levels are well within the standards notified under EPA. There will be reduction in
noise levels since machinery being used are also contributing noise levels. After the
operation of the cement plant, the contribution of the noise shall be from the various
units of the cement plant including DG sets.
The noise levels are mitigated with the proper maintenance of the machinery
components and replacing the wear & tear out components of the machinery. Regular
lubrication of the machinery shall also mitigate the noise levels. Plantation within the
cement plant and outside the cement plant shall reduce the impact of noise levels.
Further, wall around the cement plant shall also attenuate the noise levels. ACL shall
also provide silencers wherever feasible with the machines. If it is found that noise levels
in the work area cannot be reduced further, in that case ear muffs & ear plugs shall be
provided to workers. Sound proof rooms shall be provided to the operators to protect
them from high noise in the vicinity. Vibrations also contribute noise if not controlled.
Appropriate measure shall be taken to mitigate the vibrations. Vibrations shall be
monitored on regular basis.
198
8.2.6 EMP for Controlling Vibration
Ground vibrations are caused by blasting operations, subsidence due to mining

operations, deployment of mobile equipment, rock bursts and rock bumps. Blasting also
generates air vibration waves. Vibration may cause structural damages, which depend
on periodical acceleration due to vibration. Air blasts can damage structurally unsound
buildings and cause window shattering.
The vibrations by the mechanical effects act on existing rocks and subject them to
tensile, compressive and shearing stresses which spoil their mechanical characteristics
with an immediate consequence. The vibrations are caused due to the permanent
installation like crushers, screens, compressors, traffic and blasting. Among all these,
blasting is the major source of vibration. The ground vibrations can cause:
• Land instability: Distorts working faces of benches and downfalls of dumps;

• Cracks in buildings which are present in the mine premises and in the nearby
villages; and
• Psychological discomfort to human beings as well as to nearby fauna.
The blasting operations in the existing mine is carried out by deep hole drilling by a well
trained crew team under the direct supervision of a blasting engineer on day to day
basis. The commonly used boosters are powergel-boost of M/s ICI and emul-boost of
M/s IDL. Each cartridge weighs 125gms. Except in adverse weather conditions and hole
condition prilled ANFO explosives is used as column charge in non-cartridge form.
The ground vibrations are controlled by using modern shock tubes with delay non-
electric detonators (EXEL, Noiseless Trunkline Delay (NTD)). The ground vibration
measurements are being monitored by using blast vibration equipment Minimate DS-
567. ACL has three numbers of Minimate Model DS-567 and these have been imported
from INSTANTEL, Canada. The following mitigation measures should continue to be
practiced.
199
Control of Vibrations:
• Blasting should be performed strictly as per the guidelines specified under

blasting technology (Department of Mining Engineering KREC Suratkal);
• Overcharging should be avoided;
• The charge per delay should be minimized and preferably more number of
delays should be used per blasts;
• Blasting operations should be carried out only during day time as per mine safety
guidelines;
• Adequate safe distance from center of blasting should be maintained;
• During blasting, other activities in the immediate vicinity should be temporarily
stopped;
• Drilling parameters like over burden, depth, diameter and spacing should be
properly designed to give proper blast;
• Effective stemming of the explosives should be done in the drill holes;
• Electric detonators should be used wherever possible;
• The explosives should have:
¾ A high velocity of detonation;
¾ A density suited to it’s particular application;
¾ Good fume characteristics;
¾ Good water resistance; and
¾ Good storage qualities and resistance to atmospheric parameters.
200
8.2.7 EMP for Solid Waste Use and Disposal
Mining
There is no solid waste generation from the mining area except the top soil. The top soil
is collected carefully and staked separately on the haul roads prepared for this purpose.
The stacking would be for a temporary duration and the soil, thus stacked will be used in
re-vegetation/plantation schemes. The soil will be analyzed for pH, moisture, organic
carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus, calcium, magnesium etc. and effect of mining on soil
fertility would be studied.
Cement Plant
No solid waste shall be generated from the process of cement plant except the sludge
from the SWRP. About 26.3 tonnes per annum sludge is generated from the SWRP and
the same is used for maintaining the MLSS in the SWRP and as manure for plantation
within the factory premises and outside the factory premises.
The used oil generation would be around 1 kl/year. The same shall be given to the
recycler authorized by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB). A log book shall be
maintained for the generation of the used oil and the details of selling to the recycler.
8.3 EMP for Maintaining Slope Stability
The slope stability investigations for Kashlog limestone mine were carried out by Indian
Bureau of Mines, Nagpur & CMRI Dhanbad. The studies involved geo-technical studies
comprising examination of the geological setting of the Western part of the lease,
systematic geo-technical mapping in selected zone, RQD measurements, determination
of physico-mechanical properties of rock study of approved mining plan and other
relevant aspects. The major litho units of Kashlog deposit constitute three basic rock
formations limestone, shale and intervening shaly limestone occurring over a rugged
hilly topography. Though structurally not a complex deposit, it has several sets of joints.
201
The geo technical mapping reveals that the most prominent joint system in the area has
joints dipping towards north and east with dips varying from 150 to 870.
The stereonet analysis of discontinuities has revealed that there are 10 major planes of
discontinuities and most of them have very steep dips (53 to 88 degree). Only one plane
has low dip of 24 degree and another of 48 degree. The stereonet analysis also suggest
optimum slope angle for pit walls in different selected directions. The minimum optimum
slope angle is 40 degree for the faces slopping due East and North East. The optimum
slope angle in other directions can also be estimated with the help of standard stereonet.
The geo-mechanical classification of rock mass reveals that the formations in study area
are fair to good from stability point of view. The rock mass rating by CSIR classification
system is 60 giving a rock mass class no III i.e. a fair rock, where as the adjusted RMR
value by Laubscher’s classification system is 42 indicating a rock mass class of (3b)
which falls under fair to good class. As per the Laubscher’s classification system and
also as suggested by Indian Bureau of Mines, Nagpur the allowable pit slope angle in
the rock mass should be in the vicinity of 45 degree.
8.4 Soil Conservation and Stabilization
ACL has taken steps and invested huge amount for soil conservation to reduce the soil
erosion and from the aesthetic point of view. The following main steps taken in this
regard are given here under with exemplary photographs of the works being undertaken;
a) ACL is maintaining the slope in the range of 25-30 degree. Bench slopes were
dressed using backhoe, dozer and rock breaker and a gentle gradient of about 25 to 30
degrees is maintained. Slope stabilization works in the form of physical and biological
reclamation of mined slopes are also done by using Geo-Jute Technology.
b) Mycorrhizal soil inoculation is there for regulation of pH / sugar content and good
growth of plants roots. Regulations of soil temperature and conservation of moisture an
organic matter mulching is also done at the harsh sites for better vegetation
development.
202
c) Construction of soil conservation works – coir jute matting applications , stone

barriers, check dams / check filters etc. have been provided at suitable locations to
control surface soil erosion and rest accumulation of soil / boulders near check dams /
check filters. There are 51 nos of check dams and 03 nos.of check filters which are
being supplemented by the maintenance measures for their effective operations.
Proposals for next 5 years plan period: As discussed earlier, the next five years
period will witness the opening of Eastern Block for limestone and shale production. All
the measures being practiced in the Western Block would be strictly adopted for the new
Block and continued for the existing Western Block.
Construction of check dams / check filters over seasonal nallahs to exclude silts from the
run-off storm/rain water. 15 nos. of check dams and five nos. of check filters have been
proposed for the Eastern Block. Western Block is having 51 check dams and 3 check
filters to arrest silt in the gullies.
Ground vegetation practices implemented in the mined out areas involve of grasses
,shrubs and trees of local species The major species planted are – Tooni , Leucaena,
Vitex negundo, Carrisa , Prinsipia utilis, Prunus puddum, Pyrus pashia, Grewia optiva,
Bauhinia varigata, Bombax ceiba, Bamboo, Tecoma , Agave,Adhatoda,Dactylon species
etc. Same practice will be continued.
203
Check walls / check dams along the Slopes.
Check Filter.
204
1.4.3.1.1.1.1.1.1
1.4.3.1.1.1.1.1.1
1.4.3.1.1.1.1.1.1 Check walls /check dams
1.4.3.1.1.1.1.1.1
1.4.3.1.1.1.1.1.1 Check dams/check walls below the road
205
View of Re-vegetation at 1400 MSL
8.5 Greenbelt Development Plan
Mining
Large scale deforestation will lead to imbalance in the oxygen proportion of the
atmosphere, affects weather and rain patterns in the region if adequate plantation is not
done. Average man breaths 22000 times a day and takes in 16 kg of air each day but
can’t live even for five minutes without air. Annual need of oxygen for one person is met
by 150 Sq. mts of leaf surface i.e. 30-40 Sq. mts of greenery. Not only this, plants
consume CO2 for photosynthesis. The stomata are the entrances in the leaf bottom (and
in some leaves in the top) through which CO2 enters to play its role in photosynthesis.
Most plants close their stomata at night. Plants also act as barrier to mitigate the noise
intensity and minimize the soil erosion. Dense plantation is essential as an hide out for
the wildlife in the area and to give conducive climatic conditions.
The main aim of plantation in the mined area is to restore pre-mining aesthetic view of
the area as well to restore the ecological conditions. The plantation scheme broadly
covers the following areas:
206
¾ Plantation around peripheral portions of mine and other built up structures

¾ Afforestation of barren areas in the mining lease area
¾ Gardens, parks, and haul road plantation and
¾ Plantation by way of reclamation / rehabilitation of mined out blocks
Afforestation is done in open areas with moderate slope. 250-300 slope to maintained for
afforestation and the areas shall be selected in consultation of local forest officials. It
shall be ensured that the plantation shall be closed for grazing, lopping, quarrying etc.
For this purpose fencing may be used if need be. Plants shall be protected till they attain
a height which is grazing level.
Pits for plantation should be 1 feet x 1 feet and spacing should be around 2.5mx2.5m.
While selecting the plants, care shall be given to plants which can with stand in the
climatic condition of the area and useful for the local wild life including to near by
villagers. Public participation may also be considered for knowing the needs of area.
The pits will be then filled with earth, sand, silt and manure in predetermined proportions.
Saplings planted in the pits will be watered liberally. The growing plants will be cared for
the first three years under favorable conditions of climate and drainage. Care will be
taken for nutrient supplement (healthy growth), plant protection, absence of water stress
(to maintain openness of stomatal apertures and epidermal structures) and exposure to
normal atmospheric conditions (free air flow).
For plantation along approach roads and roadsides, the choice of plants will be for
containment of pollution and for formation of a screen between traffic and other units.
This choice of plants will include shrubs of height 1 to 2 m and trees of 3 to 5 m heights.
The intermixing of trees and shrubs will be such that the foliage area density in vertical is
almost uniform.
The list of plants species has been considered from the angle of species combination, in
conformity with local horticultural/ forestry conditions. Watering regimes will depend
upon the climatic conditions, though in initial stages regular watering – daily for grass
and 2-3 times a week for trees will be considered. Continuous monitoring of plant
growth, immediate replacement of casualties, supplementation of nutrients, rescheduling
207
of watering regimes will be given top priority. Soil additives and their properties are given
in Table 8.1 and nutrient contents organic manure are given in Table 8.2.
Table 8.1 Soil Additives and their Properties

Material pH Durability C:N Applicability to Soil per ha
While For erosion Established

seeding control sites
Hay 5.5 1 season 25:1 2 3 4
Manure 6.6 12 months 25:1 15 30 40
Sawdust 7.0 5 years 200:1 1 5 10
Leaves 6.5 1 season 40:1 3 4 5
(composted)
Municipal Refuse 7.5 1 season 45:1 20 -- --
Table 8.2 Nutrient Contents of Some Organic Manure

Manure Type Nutrient contents % Organic matter %
N P K
Farm yard manure 0.02 0.13 0.49 24
Pig slurry 0.21 0.10 0.18 5
Poultry manure 2.30 0.90 0.65 65
Sewage sludge 1.62 0.43 0.46 39
Mushroom compost 2.80 0.20 0.80 65
Domestic refuse 0.50 0.20 0.30 65
Straw 0.48 1.62 0.85 95
A total of 225 ha area comprising 81, 117 and 27 ha respectively from Western, Eastern
and Central Blocks would be available for reclamation and rehabilitation at the end of
deposit life. It has been envisaged to convert 16 ha reclaimed area of Western Block and
13 ha of Eastern block to water bodies. Rest of the reclaimed areas of the three Blocks
(196 ha) would be rehabilitated in the form of afforestation and orchards. Further
plantation would be carried out along haul roads, near office, magazine, crusher, below
OLBC and over barren slopes in the acquired areas to achieve density @ 2500 plants/ha
so that a dense green canopy is developed in the environs. It has been envisaged to
convert mined out afforested area into natural jungles. Top soil, whenever encountered
will be temporarily staked in separate stock for plantation. Record of sapling and survival
plants shall be maintained as an effort in this direction and assess the need to upgrading
the plantation and selection of species for further plantation. There may be possibility
208
that any specific species may not grow as expected due to the change in topography of
the area.
Greenbelt is a set of rows of trees planted in such a way that they from an effective
barrier between the working zone and the surroundings. The main purpose of Plantation
development is to contribute to the following factors:
• To attenuate noise levels generated from the mine;

• To improve the aesthetics of the area;
• To trap the vehicular emissions and fugitive dust emissions;
• To maintain ecological homeostasis;
• To prevent soil erosion and to protect the natural vegetation; and
Provision of wide plantation around the mine, plant and colony has been foreseen to
reduce any adverse impacts on the surrounding population from the emissions from the
existing activity. Lawns and gardens have been created within the plant and in areas
lying in between the various units of the plant. Plantation of grass, flowers, bushes and
trees are taken-up to reduce generation of dust from bare earth and to enhance the
aesthetic/scenic value.
The plantation formation and development of greenery in the mine, plant and colony
shall not only improve the air quality and attenuate noise in the surrounding area but
also enhances the aesthetic value.
Plantation Species: Plantation species considered as per following criteria;
• Adapted to the Geo-Climatic conditions of the area;

• Mix of round, spreading, oblong and conical canopies;
• Different heights ranging from 4m to 20m; and
• Preferably evergreen trees.
Plantation areas with good soil cover especially for plantation around the mine, plant and
colony were initially started by direct seeding synchronous with the onset of rains. This
involves preparation of local site with regard to water harvesting, soil and water
conservation measures, strip cultivation and weeding. It also gives the initial advantage
of time saving by eliminating nursery, transport and planting. It also has the advantage of
209
improving the form of the tree and its rooting pattern. Otherwise, the plantation would
have been generally done using saplings grown in the nurseries.
ACL has developed its own nursery in the vicinity of the mine areas. The species with
low transpiration rate has been selected. The species selected for afforestation shall
cater to the fodder/ forage, fuel wood timber etc. Around two lacs of saplings shall be
grown in about one hectare land. In addition to this, efforts shall also be made for
rehabilitation of some trees wherever possible as suggested by the local forest
department
Plantation Status for the last 5 years : A total of 18785 saplings were planted in the
mining and surrounding areas during last five years. The survival rate of the plants is
around 80 % and therefore the loss of plants on account of less survival was duly
compensated by planting additional number of saplings. The saplings were propagated
at the nursery of the mine as well as procured from nurseries of Forest Department. The
plantation in the area was accelerated with involvement of State Forest Department. It
was emphasized to adopt better landscaping in the office area and forestry activity in the
reclaimed and non-mineralized areas of the mine. Stress was given to introduce better
fruit cultivars and perennial flowering species. A complete status of area covered and
number of saplings planted up to March 2009 is given in Table 8.3
Table 8.3: Location-Wise Plantation Status in Mines

Planted upto 2008 – 09 Cumulative
Location
Plants (Nos) Plants (Nos) Area (ha)
Office Complex 4339 4339 1.98
Haul Roads 10303 10303 4.19
Slopes/Below
63063 63063 13.00
Roads
Crusher/ Belt
17047 17047 2.54
area
Magazine 22724 22724 8.20
Reclaimed 11264 11264 1.74
Outside ML 23854 23854 8.46
Total 152594 152594 40.11
210
Till date 152594 saplings of various species have been planted over 40.11 ha land in the
mining and surrounding areas. During the last five years period, a total of 18785 saplings
comprising 18271 within the lease and 514 outside the lease were planted. The saplings
have been selected on the basis of their suitability to the local conditions. While selecting
the species, adequate consideration is given to ecological aspects and economical
importance.
Ambuja Cement Foundation is also working in this direction in the following manner;
− To create awareness among the farmers about the new methods and technologies
for sustainable agriculture practices, appropriate cropping patterns, efficient water
management systems, balanced use of fertilizers etc., the workshops were
arranged with participation of experts from Universities.
− Horticultural grafts and plants were given to the farmers without any cost.
− Horticulture and forest species plantations was undertaken on village panchayat

grazing land with active participation of the locals.
− Plantation with involvement of locals was undertaken along Kararaghat – Kashlog

village road
− School compound plantation was carried out by involving students in the nearby
villages like Mangu, Karara, Chandi and Kashlog.
Further, plantation was undertaken to improve the water regime of the area:
− The species suitable for arresting soil erosion like Ipomea, Elephant grass and
Bamboo were planted at the appropriate places.
− Trees and shrubs were planted closely to stabilize road cuttings, slopes and other
areas vulnerable for erosion during rains to prevent direct rain splash on the
ground. The species planted comprised Saru, Silver oak, Jacaranda, Tecoma sp.,
Kachnar, Acacia sp., Pazza, Elephant grass, Toona, Prunus sp., Leucaena sp. etc.
−
211
Photographs Showing Existing Greenery
Proposal for next 5 years plan period:
Plantation work would be taken up both in Western and Eastern Block during next period
of five years. For the first three years, area for plantation will not be available with in
mining lease; therefore during this period plantation will be undertaken outside the
mining lease @ 2500 saplings per year. For the remaining two years (i.e. 2012-13 and
2013-14) plantation will be done @ 2500 sapling per year with in mining lease area.
The plantation will be undertaken along the periphery of the lease, haul roads, below
roads and over slopes, along seasonal nallahs , shale mined out areas, crusher,
magazine, mine office, workshop and over future mining areas . The likely survival rate
of plantation is around 80%. The loss of 20% species per annum would be compensated
during forthcoming year.
212
The details of proposed plantation are summarized in Table 8.4. The management is
also involving participation of villagers for planting saplings in waste land, degraded
areas and agricultural plots belonging to the locals in the surrounding areas of the mine.
Similarly, the plantation has also been envisaged through Forest Department over
degraded forest land located outside the lease area. Major steps for post plantation care
are given below:
− Mulching to minimize transpiration losses and to ensure good establishment

− Regular dose of compost manure / fertilizers as per the schedules
− Spraying of organic insecticides and fungicides whenever required
− Hoeing , weeding and watering at regular interval
− Guarding of saplings by fencing wherever needed other than biofencing
− Involvement of school children and local villagers for protection and nurturing
− Consultation with experts from Agriculture/Horticulture Universities besides Forest
department officials
− Monitoring of the growth of plantation by an independent and self sustained
horticulture department.
Table 8.4: Proposed Yearwise Plantation for Next Five Years

No. of Plants
Year
Area(Ha) Within ML Outside Total
2012-13 1 2500 2500
2013-14 1 2500 2500
2014-15 1 2500 2500
2015-16 1 2500 2500
2016-17 1 2500 2500
Sub Total 5 5000 7500 12500
Vegetation is established when it no longer requires special care to ensure that all parts
of the plant are functioning normal and natural development will proceed. During initial
stages of plant establishment and growth, care of vegetation is greater and if sufficient
inputs are not provided, the establishment period will get extended. For the proper
growth of vegetation, pH, organic carbon, N, P and K of soil will be regularly measured
and maintained well within the range by adding nutrients. Apart from this height of plant,
girth and CBH would also be monitored for typical representing species.
213
Cement Plant
Plantation in the cement plant is made considering multipurpose requirement. It is to

improve aesthetics besides control of noise pollution and fugitive dust emission. The
plantation around the plant (Greenbelt) is a set of rows of trees planted such a way that
they form an effective barrier between the plant and the surroundings. The main purpose
of plantation development is to contribute to the following factors:
• To attenuate noise levels generated from the plant;

• To improve the aesthetics of the plant area;
• To trap the vehicular emissions and fugitive dust emissions;
• To maintain ecological homoestasis;
• To prevent soil erosion and to protect the natural vegetation; and
• To utilize the treated effluents.
Provision of wide plantation around the plant and colony has been foreseen to reduce
any adverse impacts on the surrounding population from the emissions from the existing
activity. Lawns and gardens have been created within the plant and in areas lying in
between the various units. Plantation of grass, flowers, bushes and trees are taken-up to
reduce generation of dust from bare earth and to enhance the aesthetic/scenic value.
The plantation and development of greenery in the plant and colony shall not only
enhance the air quality and attenuate noise in the surrounding area but also enhances
the aesthetic value.
The commitment of the ACL may be seen towards the plantation by the progress of
plantation done for the existing plant at Suli. Year-wise, number of plants at various
locations i.e. around the plant, within plant, within colony, in the mining area and other
places may be seen in the tabular chart given below from the year 1995 – 96 to
November 2008. The ACL shall continue to make efforts to plant more and more trees
as per its policy to not to damage the environment and to improve the surroundings from
aesthetic point of view also. Plantation details in existing cement plant (upto November
2008) in given in Table 8.5.
214
Table 8.5 Status of Plantation in Existing Cement Plant

YEAR NUMBER OF PLANTS
Around Within Within Mining Others
Total
Plant Plant Colony Area
1995-96 869 9772 1035 37509 5487 54672
1996-97 14085 25882 17225 74564 4020 135776
1997-98 - 974 967 9591 - 11532
1998-99 20 3212 2291 8143 28 13694
1999-00 62 651 78 8329 285 9405
2000-01 1661 783 85 11472 2096 16097
2001-02 1975 2720 - 5930 661 11286
2002-03 205 978 - 6915 16 8114
2003-04 2523 1161 - 9706 315 13705
2004-05 152 734 22 7268 - 8176
2005-06 6338 1194 - 5668 - 13200
2006-07 6017 1227 - 4020 - 11264
2007-08 6165 19 35 2177 - 8396
2008-09 1662 4238 593 3748 243 10484
2009-10 NA NA NA 2113 NA 2113
2010-11 NA NA NA 984 NA 984
2011-12 NA NA NA 527 NA 527
Total 41734 53545 22331 198664 13151 325801
Mining Use Area and Rehabilitated Area in First 5 Years
For the mining projects located in hilly terrains, it is not possible to restore the mined out
land to its pre-mining natural conditions since initially the benches are chopped off from
the top and gradually the benches are left out in the non-mineralized portions of the
lease. Suitable reclamation and rehabilitation measures like afforestation etc. have been
planned for the future leftover benches after adequate stabilization. About 4.67 ha area
in the western block in the form of leftover benches is likely to be additionally available in
the southern sub-blocks of Western Block for reclamation. Further, 3.54 ha of earlier
reclaimed area will be amenable for mining as per the suggestions from IBM and
therefore the total reclaimed area at the end of scheme period shall reach up to 5.34 ha.
The leftover benches in general would follow the limestone and shale contact in the
footwall area and an ultimate slope between 25-35o would be maintained in the next five
years period in the Western Block. No benches would be available for reclamation
during next five years period in the Eastern and Central Blocks. Details of area put to
215
use for mining and allied activities during next five years period are given in Table 8.6,
8.7 and 8.8.
Table 8.6: Mining Use Area and Rehabilitated Area in First 5 Years
(Western Block : 2009 - 2014)
Area put Additional Area Net area
to use at requiremen considered as considered
Total
Sl. start of t during fully reclaimed for
Head (In Ha.)
No. scheme plan period & rehabilitated calculation
(In Ha.) (Ha.) (In Ha.) (In Ha.)
A B C=(A+B) D E=(C-D)
1 Area under mining 42.37 22.37 64.74 - 64.74
2 Storage for top soil 0.1 - 0.1 - 0.1
3 Reject dumps - 1.46 1.46 - 1.46

Mineral Storage,
4 0.75 - 0.75 - 0.75
protective works
Infrastructure
(Workshop, Plant,
5 2.64 - 2.64 - 2.64
Firstaid room, Rest
shelter)
6 Roads 3.68 0.51 4.19 - 4.19
7 Railways - - - - -
Green belt / Plantation/
8 12.31 - 12.31 - 12.31
Afforestation (Virgin)
Plantation/ Afforestation 1.13 (4.67-
9 4.21 5.34 - 5.34
(Reclaimed) 3.54)
10 Tailing pond - -
11 Effluent treatment Plant - - - - -
12 Mineral separation Plant - - - - -
13 Township area - - - - -
14 Others to specify - - - - -
GRAND TOTAL 66.06 25.47 91.53 - 91.53
Table 8.7: Mining Use Area and Rehabilitated Area in Next 5 Years
(Eastern Block : 2009 - 2014)
Area put Additional Area
Net area
to use at requirement considered as
Total considered for
Sl. start of during plan fully reclaimed
Head (In Ha.) calculation (In
No. scheme period (In & rehabilitated
Ha.)
(In Ha.) Ha.) (In Ha.)
Area under
1 0.5 20.90 21.40 - 21.40
mining
Storage for top
2 - 0.2 0.2 - 0.2
soil
216
3 Reject dumps - - - - -
Mineral
4 Storage, - - - - -
protective works
Infrastructure
(Workshop,
5 Plant, Firstaid 0.5 0.24 0.74 - 0.74
room, Rest
shelter)
6 Roads 1.56 2.5 4.06 - 4.06
Green belt /
Plantation/
8 2.54 16.21 18.75 - 18.75
Afforestation
(Virgin)
Plantation/
9 Afforestation - - - - -
(Reclaimed)
10 Tailing pond - - - - -
Effluent
11 - - - - -
treatment Plant
Mineral
12 - - - - -
separation Plant
Others to
14 - - - - -
specify
GRAND TOTAL 5.10 40.05 45.15 - 45.15
Table 8.8: Mining Use Area and Rehabilitated Area in Next 5 Years (Total) [2009-14]
Area put Additional Area
Net area
to use at requirement considered as
Total considered for
Sl. start of during plan fully reclaimed
Head (In Ha.) calculation (In
No. scheme period (In & rehabilitated
Ha.)
(In Ha.) Ha.) (In Ha.)
Area under
1 42.87 43.27 86.14 - 86.14
mining
Storage for top
2 0.1 0.2 0.3 - 0.3
soil
3 Reject dumps - 1.46 1.46 - 1.46
Mineral
Storage,
4 0.75 - 0.75 - 0.75
protective
works
Infrastructure
(Workshop,
5 Plant, Firstaid 3.14 0.24 3.38 - 3.38
room, Rest
shelter)
6 Roads 5.24 3.01 8.25 - 8.25
217
Green belt /
Plantation/
8 14.85 16.21 31.06 - 31.06
Afforestation
(Virgin)
Plantation/
9 Afforestation 4.21 1.13 5.34 - 5.34
(Reclaimed)
10 Tailing pond - - - - -
Effluent
11 treatment - - - - -
Plant
Mineral
12 separation - - - - -
Plant
Others to
14 - - - - -
specify
GRAND TOTAL 71.16 65.52 136.68 - 136.68
The area put to use at the end of proposed fifth year (2013-14) is 136.68 ha and no such
area has been reclaimed till date which can be considered as fully reclaimed.
8.6 Occupational Health and Safety Plan
The notified occupation health disease from the plant and mines is Silicosis, caused due
to overexposure / excessive inhalation of silica bearing dust particles. A note on Silicosis
is given below:
Silicosis: Workers involved in raw material handling activity and those working close to
the mines and crusher are exposed to high dust levels. Over a long period of time such
exposure is likely to result in respiratory problems like silicosis. Measures will be
implemented to reduce the dust generation at the originating point by installing
appropriate control devices. Plant personnel working in dust prone areas will wear
personnel protective equipment like air filters over their nose. Job rotation schemes will
be practiced for over-exposed persons (Those exposed to high dust levels)
Medical check up of all the employees will be done during the pre-employment time and
thereafter at periodic intervals. Health records will be maintained for each employees.
218
Regular health check up will be carried out. Over a period of time the health records will
indicate if there is any adverse occupational impact on the employees. The
precautionary measures will be taken to avoid any occupational diseases.
Additionally, the health status of workers will be regularly monitored under an

occupational surveillance programme. Under this programme, all the employees are
subject to detailed medical examination at the time of employment. The medical
examination covers the following tests.
General Physical Examination and Blood Pressure

X-Ray Chest and ECG
Sputum Examination
Routine Blood and Urine Examination
Lung Function Test
The medical histories of all the employees will be maintained in a standard format.
Thereafter the employees are subjected to medical examinations on annual basis. The
following tests results will upgrade the data base of medical history of the employees.
The recommended medical examinations are shown in Table 8.9:
Table 8.9: Recommended Medical Examination for Employees

Disease Tests to be conducted
1. Heart Disease ECG, blood for lipid profile, stress test, 2D-Echo and other
tests are required
2. Lung Diseases Total Count (WBC Count), Differential Count, Sputum
examination, X-ray Chest, Alveolar macrophage
3. Respiratory Differential Count, ESR, X-ray chest, Lung Function Tests
Disorders (Spirometry) and Sputum examination
4. Diabetes Random blood sugar, urine sugar, if positive, BSL-Fasting / pp,
Diabetic profile
5. Hypertension Blood Pressure reading, if required Renal profile, ECG and
stress test
6. Abdomen Pain Routine Urine for Albumin, Sugar bile salts, Liver function test
219
ACL has constructed a full fledged hospital with four doctors and other para-medical
staff so as to provide better medical facilities. This hospital is equipped with medical and
paramedical staff, OT, Radiology, medicines, ambulance and other advanced medical
equipment for diagnosis. The hospital shall provide first aid services in the event of an
accident. The workers should be periodically checked for any clinical complaints and
abnormal symptoms by the in-house medical department. This hospital has been
constructed with an estimated cost of about Rs. 27 lakhs.
Free medical facilities provided at to the local villagers at the plant and mining
dispensaries. One mobile van has also been put on services which cover 58 villages of 8
panchayats. One qualified doctor has been deputed with the mobile van.
Exposure problems to noise, dust, heat and gases are the major occupational hazards.
Silicosis, CO poisoning and noise induced hearing loss are the notified occupational
hazards. The employees working in dusty environment should be diagnosed for
respiratory functions at periodic intervals and during specific complaints for lung function
test, sputum test, X-ray test, etc.
Plant personnel working in dust prone areas should wear personnel protective
equipment like air filters over their nose. Job rotation schemes should be practiced for
over-exposed persons.
It should be ensured that workers are not exposed above the threshold limits of noise
prescribed above through suitable administrative controls. Personal protective
equipment (PPE) like earplugs and muffs should be provided and administrative
pressure applied to the workers to using them despite uncomforted.
Auditory examination by qualified doctors upon the first employment and thereafter
periodic examination will be conducted which include determination of auditory threshold
for pure tones.
220
Workers exposed to mechanical accident-prone areas should be given PPE. The non-
respiratory PPE includes safety helmets, ear plugs, ear muffs, rubber gloves, shoes with
non-skid soles, gum boots, safety shoe with toe protection.
All safety and health codes prescribed by the Bureau of Indian Standards should be
implemented.
Fire hydrants will be located at all convenient and strategic points along the major drains
and checked for water availability on regular basis. Fire extinguishing equipment, sand
buckets, water sprinklers and water hoses will be provided at all convenient point. Fire,
heat and smoke detection alarms should be installed.
Storage areas should have appropriate signs and notices and be clearly marked-out,
and all containers and packages should be clearly labeled.
The layout and design specifications of the liquid fuel storage tanks should conform to
the guidelines of Oil Industry Safety Directorate and got approved by the Chief Controller
of Explosives.
8.7 Greenhouse Gas Emissions Reduction
Energy efficiency and greenhouse gas emissions are linked together. Consumption of
more energy or energy guzzling manufacturing process generates more greenhouse
gases that in turn contribute to adverse climate change. Implementing energy efficiency
programs in cement sector not only makes the cement production cost-effective but also
reduces greenhouse gas emissions. The recommendations for reducing green house
gas emission are given below:
1. The proposed project should be optimized in terms of energy consumption and

utilization. Waste flue gases and heat from kiln shall be used in six stage preheaters
and pre calcinations units.
221
2. ACL has opted to install OLBC of three km instead of transporting the limestone form
the mine area to cement plant. It will replace the movement of dumpers on 19 km
road from mine area to cement plant. Capacity of the OLBC is 1500 TPH.
3. OLBC shall replace the annual movement of 380000 trips of dumpers to and fro from
mining area to cement plant. OLBC shall be eliminating the contribution to the green
house gases and particularly the CO which is known to be most harmful. CO
emissions comes out to be 80864kg per annum for the 19km road length. Such a
huge saving of diesel may be claimed for carbon credits. Not only has the saving of
the diesel but also it helped in easement of traffic movement. This also ensures the
smooth supply of material at plant site. Option of OLBC shall be explored for the
transportation of clinker supply upto the extent possible. Presently the road width is
very narrow and traffic congestion for transportation of raw material. Options
suggested above shall be explored for smooth movement of traffic.
4. Fuel consumption of the cement plant is only 710 kcal/kg of clinker production which
is considered to be very low among the cement plant in India and also worldwide.
5. In addition to the above, around 15% blasting activity is done by using rock breaker
and backhoe. Secondary blasting has been totally eliminated by ACL. This reduces
around 500kg of ANFO which otherwise required for blasting in addition to the
energy required for drilling.
6. Optimum design of blasting also reduces the consumption of explosives. The rock
should not fly during the blasting. The perfect bottom initiation was observed which
reduces the vertical component of the throw.
7. The staff quarters should be designed with ‘Green Buildings’ concept. Guidelines
issued by the Bureau of Energy Efficiency and Energy Conservation Bureau Code
2007 should be followed. Compact Fluorescent Lamps (lighting system), energy
efficient refrigerators and air-conditioners, water-cooled screw type HVAC system,
CFC and HCFC free refrigerants and chillers, solar water heaters on major buildings
222
are some recommended energy saving devices that should be considered in this
project.
8. Energy efficient building materials should be considered for construction of

structures. For external walls and boundary wall flyash bricks and blocks should be
considered. Flyash, which is a waste of power plant should be mixed with cement to
make concrete. Rat trap cavity brickwork using flyash bricks / blocks should be
considered. Thermally insulated building roof through traditional methods of brick
batcoba technique / other recommended technique should be considered. Natural
ventilation system comprising screen walls, low emissive double glazed glass with U
value of less than 2.8 W/m2K, shading coefficient of 0.5 should be considered for the
buildings. Fenestration with UPVC framing that reduces solar heat gain should be
considered. Landscaping with deciduous tree canopy should be considered for
reducing heat gain into the structures (by blocking sun rays in summer and
permitting penetration during winter).
9. Energy efficient process and building structures should achieve 20% reductions in
energy consumption. It is recommended that the project authorities should undertake
yearly energy audit for their entire manufacturing process and ancillary facilities. JSL
should also avail the benefits under CDM or carbon credit, as per applicable rules
framed by the International Panel on Climate Change.
8.8 Socio- Economic Development Plan
One of the important aspects of recent growth of the Indian economy has been the
opening up of the economy to the private sector. With the increased participation of the
private sector in the economy, there has been phenomenal increase in the opportunities
for growth both for the institutions in the private sector as well as for the overall economy
of the country. However, it needs to be realized that the benefits of this growth should
not be restricted to only the institutions, which now have an enhanced participation in the
economy. All people who are indirectly affected or even remotely connected with the
place of activity should be taken in stride. Only then a holistic development of the society
can take place.
223
Public Consultation: Public participation is an integral part of environmental

assessment. It is a continuous two way process, involving public understanding of the
processes and mechanisms through which developmental problems and needs are
investigated and solved. Hence it is a valuable source of information on key impacts and
potential mitigation measures.
Public consultation was conducted in near by villages around the mine site as well as plant
site. Public consultation included individuals, local peoples and group discussion. Based on
the existing civic amenities the various aspects of the lives of the people of the study area
villages have been considered to make a comprehensive assessment of their needs in order
to help them lead a more complete, fulfilling and happy life. Discussions with the villagers
reveal that ACF (Ambuja Cement Foiundation) is already providing their support and
guidance to the villagers for uplift their social and economic condition.
224
ACL has established an NGO called Ambuja Cement Foundation (ACF) which is working
towards the improvement of the quality of life of villagers residing in the villages
surrounding the mine and cement plant. ACF has catalyst to provide substantial support
for community development. Religious functions are identified and financial assistance
provided for organizing the religious and cultural functions. ACF officials have been
regularly interacting with the people of the surrounding villages. These interactive
sessions and group discussions have been attended by the executives of the company
to create awareness in the area about the plans of the company and its impending
consequences on the local people. The purpose of these discussions is to assess the
aspirations of the people, their thoughts, their needs as well as to garner their support in
achieving the endeavours of the company as well as for the overall development of the
areas with the help of the participation of the local people.
CSR Activities: The areas of Ambuja Cement Limited intervention in Darlaghat include
natural resource management, health, sanitation, livelihood generation, women
empowerment, infrastructure development and education.
A) Natural Resource Management
A comprehensive and integrated approach has been adopted for watershed projects.
Two such projects were undertaken in 2009-10 by ACF.
1. Dhundan Watershed Development Project

This project derives its impetus from the community. Community members have been
organized into a registered watershed development committee. The committee ensures
participation of the people, and all aspects of the project from planning to implementation
and maintenance are looked after by the community (Local People).
During the reporting year, the drainage line was given treatment in a “ridge- to –valley”
approach. Fifteen loose stone check dams (LSCDs) were constructed on small streams,
followed by 190 gabion structures on the gully where the water had a high velocity. A
water storage tank was also constructed.
Trenches were constructed in 22 Ha. of land. These act as water recharging units that
increase the soil moisture and consequently the fodder production by as much as 30%.
Following the trenching, 2000 saplings were planted in the area. Silvi pastures were
225
developed in 8 Ha. land. A grant of Rs. 9,80,000 was received from National Bank for
agriculture and Rural Development (NABARD) for the project.
2. Alikhad Watershed Development Project
This project is being implemented in Kashlog Panchayat. Awareness camps and training
programmes were held on herb plantation and mushroom cultivation. Trenching was
completed in 14 Ha of land. To make year-long fodder available to farmers, silvi pasture
land was developed on 16 Ha, and 3140 fruit trees were planted.
Two irrigation water storage tanks were built with a contribution of labour and money by
the villagers. In all, 278 mt of irrigation channels were laid and 17 gabion structures were
constructed. The project was monitored by the watershed committee.
Low cost bamboo poly houses are being promoted to project small land holdings of the
villagers. A few have already been constructed on a pilot basis. Six orchards were
cultivated in the area.
B) Livelihood Generation
ACF has been promoting organic farming in Darlaghat. During the reporting year, 200
farmers embraced this method of farming. They prepared and used organic manures like
Jiva Amrit, vermin-compost and NADEP compost. They were provided with organic
wheat seeds and were encouraged to develop a seed bank in their own villages. Over
the year, 24 training programmes were conducted for farmers who adopted organic
farming. Further awareness was generated through an organic farming week, when
226
information-education- communication (IEC) material was disseminated and street plays

performed, exhorting the benefits of organic farming.
To supplement the income of the villagers, horticulture plantation was taken up. Over
2500 mango, lemon, orange, guava, pomegranate and amla trees were planted by 120
farmers. Mushroom cultivation was introduced in Darlaghat in 2007-08. In 2009-10, 60
farmers were cultivating mushrooms. A committee called Darla Khumb Utpadak Samiti
has been set up by the community, und
er which the farmers jointly work towards the promotion and cultivation of mushroom.
Kitchen gardening was promoted amongst the members of Self Help Groups (SHGs).
Two hundred kitchen garden kits were purchased and distributed amongst them.
Village volunteers called Pshu Swasthya Sevikas have been trained and equipped by
ACF to provide veterinary services at the doorstep of the farmers. Twenty six such
volunteers provided their services to the villages in the reporting year.
Training Institute for self employment: ACL has estabilished a Skills and
Entrepreneurship Development Institute (SEID) at Darlaghat for Training to local youth
for their self employment through this Institute. Engineering and Non Engineering
Courses including Self Development of the Rural Youth are provided in this institute. The
institute continued working towards equipped the local youth will skills and helping them
find employment. In 2009-10, the institute expanded its scope to include social and
cultural activities. In the year, 224 persons were trained in the institute’s long –term
courses, and 206 persons in the short-term programmes. Fifteen trainees received a
loan of Rs. 15,000, and others received a loan of Rs. 2 lakhs for starting their own
enterprises from Punjab National Bank.
227
C) Education
ACF executes a school support programme in 30 Government primary schools and 14
middle schools in the Arki tehsil. The objective of the programme is to improve the
quality of education and enrich the teaching-learning experience of the teachers and
students.
Young women from the community, known as Balmitras, are identified and trained by
ACF to help in its endeavour to improve the quality of education in schools. The
Balmitras focus on primary students and help them get a sound base. ACF holds
monthly meetings with the Balmitras, where they discuss their doubts and problems.
ACF has undertaken a range of activities in school to foster the overall development of
the children. Libraries have been set up to inculcate the habit of reading, and to improve
their language skills. Children are given an opportunity to hone their public speaking
skills at balsabhas. They are given ample opportunity to intersperse learning with fun at
fun fairs or Balmelas. Each school has a learning corner where children sit in groups and
undergo activity-based learning. They undergo periodic medical check-ups and are
given treatment. The children were also taken on visits to a hydro-electric projects and
historical and environmental sites. Training programmes were organized for government
teachers.
ACF supported government Degree College, Arki to promote higher education in the
area. More than 1000 students benefited from this.
228
D) Health and Sanitation

In Darlaghat, 38 women have been trained as Village Health Functionaries (VHFs) and
provide primary healthcare and referral services to the villagers. In 2009-10, three VHFs
were selected by the Government and trained as yoga teachers. They now conduct yoga
classes in middle and high schools. ACF regularly conducts training and monitoring
programmes for the VHFs. Three training sessions, including an 8-day refresher on
pregnancy and child birth were held during the year. In addition, a 3-day training
programme on gender-based social justice and reproductive health was organized.
Thirty-seven VHFs and traditional health practitioners attended a workshop on
healthcare practices and knowledge of herbs. The mobile dispensary continued making
its round in the village. It reached out to 45 villages and 3297 patients benefited from it.
The VHFs engage with school children through khelwadis at which they deal with issues
of health, sanitation and preventive healthcare through fun and games. ACF organized a
mega khelwadi at Chandi village, where 350 children and all three VHFs participated
enthusiastically. They used the medium of song, dance and role play to highlight issues
like pollution, sanitation, global warming, health and hygiene, female foeticide, drug
addiction and alcoholism.
A 5-day free cataract camp was organized, at which 368 patients were examined. Over
a hundred operations were carried out. Handicap detection camps were held in
partnership with several professional organizations. Of over 130 persons who were
checked at the camp, 18 were provided artificial limbs and 3 were provided with wheel
chairs. 18 operations were conducted at a laparoscopy camp that was held in
partnership with the Health Department, Solan.
Ambuja Diagnostic Center has been established by ACF at Darlaghat where patient
were tested at very low price. In the year 24 village Health and sanitation Committees
were formed in the villages. Doctors in the area refer patients to the Ambuja Diagnostic
Center for testing. Over 1,310 patients were tested at the centre during the year. The
mobile health van continued making visits to the villages and providing healthcare to the
residents. The van makes visits thrice a week and covers 45 villages in the reporting
year almost 3300 patients were treated.
229
Ambuja Diagnostic Center at Darlaghat

HIV / AIDS Prevention
Workshops and awareness camps for HIV/AIDS were held for the Security Department
and migrant labourers of Ambuja Cements. The programmes were organized in
partnership with the Integrated Counselling and Testing Centre (ICTC), Arki, Almost 100
employees participated in 2 workshops.
A red ribbon campaign was organized on World AIDS Day, in which over 1,500
employees, contractors, labourers and truckers participated. A rally was held, in which
325 school children, and several Ambuja staff took part. Two blood donation camps
were organized during the year, at which 149 units of blood was collected.
E) Women’s Empowerment
The 112 Self Help Groups (SHGs) now in operation have a corpus of over Rs 61 lakhs.
Twenty SHGs have linkages with banks. During the year 12 new SHGs were formed.
Training sessions on livelihood generation, dairy farming and fruit and vegetable
processing were held for the women.
ACF was successful in liaising with the Government to start knitting classes for 30 SHG
members. The final products will be sold at Government emporiums.
F) Infrastructure Development
ACF helps the local community in the development and maintenance of footpaths,
community centers, Anganwadis, school buildings, drinking water storage tanks and
irrigation channels, the people participate in executing all these activities.
230
During 2009-10, 255 meters of footpaths were constructed in the area. Three school
rooms were put up and 3 other room were repaired. A bridge was built at Fugwana
village. Further, 337 meters of irrigation channel and 2536 meters of GI pipe were laid,
and 4 bore wells and a traditional drinking water source were rejuvenated. As
playground was leveled and enclosed with a 125 ft retaining wall and 4 toilets were
constructed.
G) Income Generating measures (Mushrooming opportunities)

Darlaghat’s climate was just right for mushroom cultivation. Yet none of the villagers had
ever thought of it as a livelihood option. Seeing potential in this venture, through
dialogues with scientists from the National Mushroom Research Center at Solan ACF
ascertained the feasibility of the project and began motivating people to give it a try and
make it an alternate source of income. Most people were skeptical in the beginning and
were not willing to risk their money and time in a venture they weren’t sure was viable.
But four persons came forward and took the plunge. With their first harvest profitable
beyond imagination, they continued with mushroom cultivation. As the news of their
success reached others, more people joined in and soon there were 40 of them. From
their sale of 9 tonnes of mushroom, they collectively earned a net profit of Rs. 4,50,000.
Mushroom cultivation was obviously a profitable one and the number of cultivators
continued to increase, reaching a total of 60.
The mushroom cultivators have organized themselves into the Darla Khumb Utpadak
Samiti and are working as a group. They now have gained better bargaining power.
Animal Husbandry/ Dairy farming:

Training: Farmers went on an exposure visit to National Dairy Research Institute (NDRI),
Karnal by ACF, where they learned about animal husbandry and dairy farming.
Training on weaving of wire mesh on gabion

Trainings have been organized on weaving of
gabion wire mesh, to check the gully erosion in
the small streams.
231
Training of medicinal plants: Training on medicinal plants was conducted in the area
in which 25 women participated.
.
Budget Allocation for CSR Activities: ACL has established an NGO called Ambuja
Cement Foundation (ACF) which is undertaking the CSR activities of ACL in the villages
surrounding the mine and cement plant. There are so many schemes are already
running under CSR activities. The financial allocation / CSR Budget earmarked by ACL
is provided in Table 8.10.
Table 8.10 : CSR Budget

Sl. Expenditure Total
No. of
No Parameters Particulars of work done For the year Cumulative
beneficiaries
. 2010-11 Expenditure
Treatment of the land, 18.55 197.85
conservation/ harvesting of
water, Revival of natural
sources, treatment of drainage
Watershed line, harvesting through check
1. Development & dams, weir construction 130 Villages
Management Plantation for waste land
development, fruit trees , fodder
grasses, development of non
conventional energy resources,
livestock development
Construction of storage tanks, 24.89 49.13
water distribution through pipe
line, repair/construction of
Drinking Water
2. Bouries (shallow open wells), 6 Panchayat
Program
Installation of bore wells and
construction of irrigation
channels
Promotion of Agriculture, 11.15 65.98
Horticulture activities, Forest
Farm-Non
3. based livelihood, Live stock 06 Panchayat
Farm Sector
Development & Management
and Non-conventional Energy
232
Health services through mobile 16.20 133.31

dispensary, Service to villagers
through Swasthaya Didi VHF
(Village Health Volunteer) ,
development of herbal garden
Health, for preparation of herbal
Sanitation medicine, organization of eye 43 Village of
4.
and Medical operation camps , Construction 09 Panchayat
Facilities of lavatories , maintenance of
existing systems, Projects on
HIV / AIDS, Observing World
AIDS Week, Workplace
Program etc.
Engage local volunteer in 28.44 214.24

School Support Programme
(Bal Mitras ), Construction/
repair of schools /support o Govt Primary
college/ vocational training School 31 ,
centers, Financial aids to 16 Govt
Education and
5. schools/ individuals for higher Middle
Training
education, Quality education, School and
and academic support to 01 Degree
Elementary Schools and College
develop a training and resource
centre
Training to local youth for their 40.04 154.79

self employment through
Capacity
Institute for skill and
Building for
Entrepreneurship Development
Community for
6. by introducing the Engineering 707 Students
Self
and Non Engineering Courses
Employment
including Self Development of
the Rural Youth
Formation of SHGs and 1.53 4.43

Women providing the training to rural 1400
7.
Empowerment women’s for their livelihood Women’s
Community centre/Community 43.62 449.13

rooms for villagers, awareness /
training on construction
practices, construction of
Housing,
retaining walls, anganbari
Recreation,
bhawan, Panchayat Bhawan 11
Public
8. School Building. Construction of Panchayats
Transportation
play grounds, distribution of
&
sport kits and scholarships for
Communication
sportsmen. Construction of
roads / pathways / rain shelter,
Flood Relief etc.
233
Demonstration and support for 1.32 16.03

Non
Smoke Less Chulah and Bio
9. Conventional 06 Panchayat
Gas.
Energy
Charitable works, Donations, 42.56 170.06
Establishment and Capital
10. Others
Expenditure
228.32 1455.01
Total
8.9 Environmental Management System
The Suli unit of ACL is certified for three management system, Quality Management
System, Environmental Management System and Occupational health & Safety
Management System. All the three system have been integrated into one common
management system, named IMS. The same system shall be implemented in the new
Rauri unit.
8.9.1 Structure of Environmental Management Department
The organizational structure of Environment Management Department (EMD)

responsible for routine environmental management measures, implenting the EMP
recommendations and complying with the conditions stipulated by SPCB and MOEF is
shown in Figure 8.3.
234
Managing Director
Business Head (North)

Sr. Vice President
Corporate Affairs
Head, Environment Joint President
Associate Vice
President (Mines)
Dy. General Manager
(Environment)
Assistant Manager Manager (Mines) Manager (Horticulture)

(Environment)
Geologist Officer (Horticulture)

Sr. Environ. Analyst Environ. Analysts
Figure 8.3 Structure of EMD
Functions of EMD: Head of the EMD shall form a Consultative Working Group by
involving responsible citizens from the surrounding community and develop action plans
to address any grievances of the public related to environmental performance of the
project and develop targets for remediation of the grievances. The Cell shall thoroughly
study each manufacturing process and activities and suggest additional mitigation
measures for improvement of environmental performance and discuss them in monthly
meetings with the departmental HOD for implementation. The Cell shall co-ordinate all
related activities such as safety of plant, workers health, and health of surrounding
community and prepare statistical records.
Regular monitoring of stack emissions and fugitive emissions and report any
abnormalities for immediate corrective measures.
Regular monitoring of ambient air quality within the plant and around the plant.
Regular monitoring of re-circulating water quality, water quality of the storage ponds,
ground water quality and surface water quality.
235
Regular noise monitoring of the work zone and surrounding area.
Green belt plantation, maintenance, development of other forms of greenery like lawns,
nursery, gardens, etc. in the plant boundary, premises and township.
Regular monitoring of solid wastes quantity and developing avenues for utilisation of
solid wastes.
Regular monitoring of the used oil and sell it out to the authorized recycler approved by
the Central Pollution Control Board.
In addition to above the environment cell shall conduct environmental audit every year.
Infrastructure Requirement for Environment Management Department
ACL has well established laboratory having the facility of conducting stack monitoring,
ambient air quality monitoring, ambient and equipment noise quality monitoring, water
quality monitoring, waste water quality monitoring, meteorological monitoring, etc.
ACL has also established a met data recording station in the premises of cement plant.
This station has facility to motoring of parameters like wind speed, wind direction,
humidity, temperature and precipitation.
One continuous ambient air quality monitoring instrument shall be located on the roof of
office of environment cell or other suitable representative location.
The security department of the plant shall be entrusted to look into the safety and
security matters of pollution control systems and environmental monitoring instruments.
EMD shall coordinate all activities related to pollution control and environmental
management with the respective units and Chief of the Plant. Monthly review meeting
should be conducted.
Training Requirements
Training systems, covering the following items, shall be in place for all staff of EC and
other staff of various departments, which cover the following:
• Awareness of the regulatory implications of the Environmental Permits for the

activity and their work activities;
• Awareness of all potential environmental effects from operation under normal
and abnormal circumstances.
• Awareness of the need to report deviation from the Permit.
236
• Prevention of accidental emissions and action to be taken when accidental

emissions occur.
The staff of the EMD should be trained every year by arranging in house training
programs by inviting experts or faculty members from reputed institutes. All staff of EMD
should understand the environmental laws and regulations, O&M of pollution control
systems, pollution monitoring systems and new developments in the field of pollution
control, instrumentation and analytical techniques.
8.9.2 Budget for Environmental Management
The capital cost for environmental management of the proposed project is estimated to
be Rs.109 crores. This amount shall be used for procurement of pollution control devices
such bag filters, ESP, noise pollution control, monitoring devices, strengthening of
environment department, occupation health and safety department, environmental
monitoring, greenbelt and greenery development etc. About Rs.6.5 crores would be
required as annual recurring expenses to meet the EMP of mines and plant.
8.10 Resource Conservation Plan
Management plan for resource conservation is recommended below. Waste

minimization audit, optimizing water use and handling of recycled waste materials also
forms part of resource conservation plan.
1. ACL should demonstrate the measures taken to:

• reduce the usage of all raw materials and intermediates
• substitute less harmful materials, or those which can be more readily abated and
when abated lead to substances that are more readily dealt with
• understand the fate of by-products and contaminants and their environmental
impact
2. ACL should maintain a list of raw materials and their properties as noted above.
3. ACL should have procedures for the regular review of new developments in raw
materials and for the implementation of any suitable ones with an improved
environmental profile.
237
4. ACL should have quality-assurance procedures for controlling the impurity

content of raw materials.
5. Waste minimization is defined simply as: “a systematic approach to the reduction

of waste at source, by understanding and changing processes and activities to
prevent and reduce waste”. A variety of techniques can be classified under the
term waste minimisation, from basic housekeeping through statistical
measurement, to application of clean technologies. In the context of waste
minimisation, waste relates to the inefficient use of raw materials and other
substances at an installation. A consequence of waste minimisation will be the
reduction of gaseous, liquid and solid emissions.
6. Key operational features of waste minimisation should be:

• the ongoing identification and implementation of waste prevention
opportunities
• the active participation and commitment of staff at all levels including, for
example staff suggestion schemes
• monitoring of materials’ usage and reporting against key performance
measures
7. ACL should carry out a waste minimisation audit at least every 4 years. The
Operator should analyse the use of raw materials, assess the opportunities for
reductions and provide an action plan for improvements using the following three
essential steps
• process mapping
• materials mass balance
• action plan
8. The use and fate of raw materials and other materials, including by-products,
solvents and other support materials, such as fuels, catalysts and abatement
agents, should be mapped onto a process flow diagram. This should be achieved
by using data from the raw materials inventory and other company data as
appropriate. Data should be incorporated for each principal stage of the
operation in order to construct a mass balance for the installation.
238
9. Using this information, opportunities for improved efficiency, changes in process

and waste reduction should be generated and assessed. An action plan should
then be prepared for implementing improvements to a timescale.
10. Gases / Heat produced during production of cement should be quantified and
opportunities for use considered, as part of an integrated fuel strategy minimising
the use of imported fuels, especially liquid fuel.
11. Efforts should be made to reclaim raw materials from waste prior to disposal to
land and, where feasible, the recovered materials should be recycled or utilised.
12. Reducing water use is normally a valid environmental (and economic) aim in
itself, but any water passing through an industrial process is generally degraded
so there will usually be an increase in pollutant load. The use of a simple mass
balance for water use should help to reveal where reductions can be made.
13. ACL should carry out a regular review of water use through
• Flow diagrams and water mass balances for the activities should be
produced.
• Water-efficiency objectives should be established, with constraints on
reducing water use beyond a certain level being identified (which usually will
be usually installation-specific).
• Water pinch techniques should be used in the more complex situations such
as byproduct plant, to identify the opportunities for maximising reuse and
minimising use of water.
14. Water should be recycled within the process from which it issues, by treating it
first if necessary. Where this is not practicable, it should be recycled to another
part of the process that has a lower water-quality requirement
15. The water-quality requirements associated with each use should be established,
and the scope for substituting water from recycled sources identified and input
into the improvement plan.
239
16. Less contaminated water streams, such as cooling waters, should be kept
separate from more contaminated streams where there is scope for reuse though
possibly after some form of treatment.
17. Water usage for cleaning and washing down should be minimised by:
• vacuuming, scraping or mopping in preference to hosing down;
• reusing wash water (or recycled water) where practicable;
• using trigger controls on all hoses, hand lances and washing equipment.
18. Fresh water consumption should be directly measured and recorded regularly at
every significant usage point, ideally on a daily basis.
19. A system should be in place and maintained to record the quantity, nature and
origin of any waste that is disposed of or recovered and also, where relevant, the
destination, frequency of collection, mode of transport and treatment method for
those wastes.
240
CHAPTER 9: SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION
Ambuja Cement Ltd. (ACL) contributes about 10 percent of total cement production of
India. ACL’s existing plant in Himachal Pradesh is located at Suli, tehsil Arki in district
Solan. The clinkerization capacity of Suli plant is 2.6 Million Tonnes Per Annum (MTPA).
ACL has obtained the environmental clearance for 5.5 MTPA limestone mining at
Kashlog, Patti and Mangu villages, located in the Arki tehsil. ACL has also obtained
environment clearance for installation of another clinkerization plant of 1.8 MTPA
capacity adjacent to Suli plant at village Rauri. This plant is under operation.
Kashlog Limestone Mines is located in Kashlog, Mangu and Pati villages, about 4 km
aerial distance from the Suli unit. The Mining Lease area comprises 488.06 ha, 121.49
ha is agriculture land, 226.95 ha is wasteland and 139.62 ha is forest land. The mining
scheme has been approved by Indian Bureau of Mines. 287.38 ha land has been
already acquired in Kashlog area for mining 5.5 MTPA of limestone and shale. The
proposal is to enhance the production of limestone and shale from 5.5 MTPA to 7.6
MTPA.200.66 ha land in mining lease area of Pati and Mangu is proposed to be
acquired during the expansion of limestone production. Topography of the mine lease
area is hilly, at an elevation of 1240 m – 1740 m above MSL.
Draft EIA report (integrated report for the expansion of clinker plant and mines) is
prepared for conducting public hearing prescribed in EIA Notification dated 16th
September 2006, in compliance with the Terms of Reference approved by Ministry of
Environment & Forests, Government of India vide letter dated 12th March 2009.
The estimated cost of the integrated clinker and mining project is Rs.1065.5 crores
(Base Year:2009). The estimated capital cost of environment protection measures is
Rs.109 crores. The annual recurring cost is approximately Rs. 6.5 crores.
Permission to draw groundwater has been obtained from Local Body to meet the
requirement of expansion project (Rauri Plant and Kashlog Mines).
241
30 MW power required for the project will be taken from the State Grid.
Mechanized mining of limestone will be followed using wet drilling followed by controlled
blasting (ppv less than 5 mm/s). 2500 kg of ANFO explosive will be used per day. The
limestone boulders will be loaded using hydraulic excavator and front end wheel loader
into 50 tons capacity dumper trucks for transported to new crusher permanently located
at Mangu lease area. The crushed limestone will be transported from crusher to Kashlog
crusher site using 3.5 km new OLBC (Over Land Belt Conveyor]. Mining will be done
upto 1250 MRL above mean sea level. The bench height will be maintained at 10 m and
final pit slope at less than 45 degrees towards footwall side.
In the clinker making process limestone and other raw materials are ground in raw mill,
then mixed in defined proportion and fed to the kiln. Coal is grounded in coal mill and fed
to kiln for firing. The calcined material is taken to clinker cooler. The cooled clinker is
stored in silos. The clinker will be dispatched to grinding unit located at Nalagarh.
Internationally available best production and pollution control technology and

management system will be implemented in the plant and mines to prevent any damage
to the surrounding environment.
The additional requirement for raw material for the clinkerization unit is as follows:
Limestone – 1.05 MTPA, Shale – 0.117 MTPA, Iron ore – 0.2 MTPA, Red Ochre – 0.012
MTPA and coal – 0.197 MTPA. Limestone and shale will be transported from the
Kashlog Mines by conveyor. Coal, iron ore and red ochre will be transported by road.
Description of Environment
Baseline data was generated during the period December 2008 to February 2009. The
baseline data was again generated for summer season i.e. April 2011 to June 2011. 10
km area around the clinker unit and mines boundary was considered as study area. Data
was generated by following the standard procedures of the Ministry of Environment &
Forests and the Central Pollution Control Board. Meteorological data on wind speed,
wind direction, relative humidity and temperature was generated at the site. Ambient air
242
quality was generated at 10 locations in the study area. Noise levels were measured at
10 locations. Surface water quality of 5 locations was analyzed. Groundwater quality of 8
locations was analyzed. Soil quality of 6 locations was analyzed. Data on plants and
animals present in the study area was collected from the Working Plan of Kunihar Forest
Division. Data on landuse, demography, occupation pattern, cropping pattern,
infrastructure facilities were collected from District Statistics Handbook and Tehsil
records.
The study area falls under Seismic Zone V. The area falls under the Sutlej river basin.
Satluj river flows 8 km northeast of the clinker unit site. There are 24 protected forest
block in the study area. The forest block falls under Kunihar Forest Division. Two wildlife
sanctuaries namely Majathan sanctuary and Piplughat sanctuary are present within the
study area. No endangered plant or animal species are found in the plant site and
mining lease area. Bear, ghoral, cheel, tendua, red jungle foul. monal, kalij, wild boar
and barking deer are the protected species. Other common species are monkey,
mongoose, wild cat, rabbit, porcupine, jackal, cobra, krait, pit viper and variety of birds.
The forest types are Tropical dry deciduous forest comprising bamboo, chhal, simbal,
jhingan, amaltas and karaunda, Subtropical pine forest comprising chil, kainth, daru and
Tropical euphorbia scrub forest comprising chirpine. Main grasses found in the area are
Chrosopogan pulvus and Sympogon spp.
The predominant wind direction at the site is from east to northeast direction. Wind
speeds are high in the area, 3.8 m/s average speed and 11 m/s maximum speed. Calm
conditions remain 11% of the time. The annual rainfall is 1424mm. The concentration of
SPM, PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NO2 at all the monitoring locations is found within the National
The ambient air quality of the study area are meets the prescribed national ambient air
quality standard PM2.5 is 60 µg/m3, PM10 is 100 µg/m3, SO2 is 80 µg/m3 and NO2 is 80
µg/m3 in all the samples. No abnormal values have been found with respect to Heavy
Metals presence in the dust of ambient air.
The noise levels in the study area were also found to be well within the prescribed
standards for the residential area (45 dBA during night time and 55 dBA during day
time).
243
The surface water quality of study area did not show any sign of pollution. No metallic or
domestic contamination is observed in the surface water samples. The value of all
parameters in all the samples are well within the limit for drinking IS: 10500:1991. The
ground water quality did not show any evidence of oil, metallic or bacterial
contamination.
The soils are sandy loam and sandy clay loam type. The soils of the study area are
moderately fertile.
The population of the Arki tehsil is 83230, with 15474 household (2001 census). The
population of study area is 30633 with 5662 household. 28% people belong to SC and
0.013% people belong to ST category. The literacy rate is 61%. About 17.6% land is
forest land, 48.5% is permanent pastures and grazing land, 20.7% is net sown area.
About 41% are cultivators and agriculture labours. Agriculture and allied activities are
major income generating sources for the people. Agriculture is dependant on rainfall and
stream water. The main crop grown is maize and wheat. Other crops grown in the study
area are barley, paddy, pulses and oilseeds.
Primary, Secondary and Higher Secondary education facility is well developed in the
study area. Primary health centers / sub-centers, post office, telephone, internet and
STD facility are available at all places of the study area. The villages are scattered and
approach road is lacking. Electricity is available in all the villages. The villagers use tap
water for drinking purpose. Hand pumps are also used at some places. Cattle wealth
occupies a major role in rural economy. The milk and its products are sold. The study
area is industrially backward. Cottage industries provide some employment to the local
people.
Environmental Impact and Mitigation Measures
Water Pollution Control: Domestic wastewater from clinker unit and the staff colony will
be treated in Sewage Water Reclamation Plant. The treated water will be used for
gardening purpose. Domestic wastewater from mines will be treated in septic tanks. The
spent oil and lubricants will be given to authorized re-processors. No wastewater will be
discharged outside the plant and mine premises.
244
Air Pollution Control: Dust generation during vehicular movement in the mines area
will be suppressed using water sprinkling. Wet drilling and controlled blasting will be
done. Crusher will be provided with water sprinklers and bag filter to minimize dust
generation. OLBC will be used to transport the limestone and shale from crusher to
plant.
Glass bag house will be used to control dust pollution from raw mill and kiln. 100 m tall
stack will disperse the gaseous pollutants over wide area. Bag filter will be used in coal
mill to control coal dust pollution. Electrostatic Precipitator will be used in clinker cooler
to control dust pollution. Fugitive dust pollution from raw mill hopper, blending silos, kiln
feed, clinker storage silos, truck loading machine and all transfer points and vents will be
captured and controlled using bag filters. Conveyors will be closed type. Water sprinkling
arrangement will be provided around raw material stockpiles.
Noise Quality: Material handling operations and movement of trucks will be properly
scheduled to minimize construction noise. The compressors, rotating machines, air
blast, mill operations will be the main sources of noise. All activities will be carried out
inside sheds and maintenance program for equipment will be routinely followed. Sound
absorbing materials will be provided in the room where both the source and receiver are
present so that the reflecting sound is absorbed. In noisy work areas soundproof duty
rooms will be provided. Workers working in noisy areas will be given ear plugs and ear
muffs. In this manner the noise level will be restricted within the plant boundary and
meet the standards of 75 dBA during day time and 70 dBA during night time.
Solid Wastes: Dust collected from the air pollution control systems of plant will be
reused. The limestone is exposed with little top soil.
For mitigating adverse environmental impacts, the following measures were
recommended in the EIA report:
• Wet drilling will be practiced. The drill will have inbuilt water sprinkling
arrangement and dust extraction system.
• Controlled blasting technique will be followed at inner mining areas. Hydraulic

rock breaker will be used to eliminate the use of secondary blasting. The site will
be wetted before blasting. The safety fuse shall be covered with sand layer of 15
cm thick before blasting. Blasting will be done around noon.
245
• Non-electric shock tube initiating system like EXEL and Noiseless Trunkline
Delay (NTD) and IKON (Digital Electronic System) will be used to keep the
ground vibrations and air blast levels to the lowest possible limits and minimize
noise (delay detonators).
• Ground vibrations to be continuously monitored during blasting using Minimate

Seismograph, through study of the peak particle velocity at different distances.
• Saw dust upto 10% will be mixed with the explosive to reduce bulk density of the
explosive and the ground level vibration.
• Combination of primary rock breaker and backhoe in peripheral (hilltop border)

areas of mines to remove broken material by pulling up towards the benches.
This will prevent rolling of boulders towards the slope.
• Retaining toe walls and parapet walls will be made to minimize the chance of
boulders from going towards the slope areas.
• Crusher and screens and transfer points will be provided with dust extraction
system. The crusher and screens will be enclosed in crusher house. .
• Water sprinkling type dust suppression system will be provided at limestone

dump hopper of crusher house.
• Chemical binders / wetting agents/ surfactants will be used on haul roads to

recude water consumption during sprinkling for dust suppression. Compaction,
gradation and proper drainage will be provided for haul roads, besides
plantations on both sides to minimize fugitive dust generation.
• Desiltation of sedimentation basins, check dams and filters and retential wall will
be done every year before monsoon.
• Screens, hoppers and transfer points shall be lined with resilent materials to
minimize noise generation inside crusher.
• Mufflers will be provided at all HEMM to reduce noise levls.
• Over land belt conveyor will be used to transport the limestone from crusher to
clinker unit.
• Adequate dust suppression measures will be taken during the construction of the
clinker plant. Stock piles will be covered and provided with stationary atomized
mist spray type water sprinklers. Telescopic chutes shall be used to minimize the
height of material falling.
• Separate collection of storm water system in clinker unit and development of

rainwater harvesting structures as per CGWB guidelines will be done
246
• The 250 KLD Sewage Water Reclamation Plant for domestic sewage treatment
will be used. Treated water will be used for greenery development.
• Septic tanks will be provided for domestic sewage treatment in mines. Oil catch
pit will be provided in workshop.
• Check dams and silt filters will be made along the depressions of slope to control
surface runoff water carrying the silt down during rainfall. The filters will be
cleaned after monsoon.
• Oil contaminated cotton wastes will be collected and burned in the kiln. The kiln
will be capable of using energy containing wastes as per the recommendation of
Ministry of Environment & Forests.
• Domestic and commercial garbage generated from mines and plant site will be
collected in containers. Recyclable materials will be sorted out and sold to
kabadis. Inert material will be reused as landfill. Organic and other green waste
will be taken to compost plant.
• Low sulphur fuel will be used in the Heavy Earth Moving Equipment, trucks,
dumpers, other vehicles and DG sets.
• Roads within the clinker unit will be asphalted to prevent dust generation. Haul
roads in mines will be stabilized and provided with water sprinklers. Vehicular
speed in mines area will be restricted to 20 kmph.
• Acoustic enclosures, noise proof duty cabins and rooms will be provided, in noisy
areas of plant site.
• Workers working in high noise areas will be provided ear plugs / muffs.
• 33% of the land area of clinker plant will be developed into greenery using native
plant species like Silver oak, poplar, jacaranda, kainth, pinus, daru, bottle brush,
tooni, bahunia, siris, prunus, kaner, jharinoo, chir.
• Worked out area in the mines will be spread with top soil. Plantation will be
raised over it. Depression area within the worked our site will be converted to
water reservoir.
Impact on Ecology: Dust emission will be controlled using ESP, Bag Filters and water
sprinkling. Flue Gas will be dispersed using tall stacks. All air emissions will be kept
within the prescribed standards. The incremental air pollution will not violate the air
quality standards. Wastewater and solid waste will be reused. Greenery development
will be done, all available open spaces will be made green. ACL has provided financial
contribution to HP Zoo and Conservation society for conservation of Himalayan black
bear, ghoral, cheel, red jungle fowl, monal and kalij. ACL has provided funds to State
247
Forest Department for conservation of water reservoirs inside Majathal Wildlife

Sanctuary and funded Himalayan Forest Research Institute for getting their expertise in
planting 2500 trees as conservation of reclaimed mined area. Huge sum of money has
been provided to Forest department for compensatory afforestation. Such measures will
continue during the expansion phase, which will be adequate to protect / conserve the
ecology of the area.
Impact on Public Health: The national ambient air quality standards prescribe level of
air pollutants that will protect public health and vegetation. Air quality dispersion
modeling study proved that the ambient air quality of the area will remain within the
national air quality standards. No toxic chemicals or wastes will be handled in the plant
and mines. Oil will be stored in tanks as per standard approval. Hence there will be no
risk to public health.
Impact of Rehabilitation and Resettlement : The residential area of Chakru has been
acquired for existing mines and the residents were rehabilitated and resettled as per the
Rehabilitation and Resettlement Scheme of Himachal Pradesh Government. During
expansion of mines, 3 families in new Dhar of village Mangu will be rehabilitated and 4
families in old Dhar of village Sanghoi will be rehabilitated as per the Rehabilitation and
Resettlement Scheme of Himachal Pradesh Government.
The R&R Plan provides for certain benefits to the affected families, which includes
landless grants ranging from Rs.40000/- to Rs.100000/-. In case of houseless families
rehabilitation shall be done by offering house / plots including cost of construction and
grant of Rs.100000/-. Further the affected families shall also get assistance of
Rs.25000/- for construction of cattle shed and Rs.20000/- for shifting of building material,
belongings and cattles, etc. ACL shall also provide employment to one member each of
landless, houseless, oustee family subject to vacancy and as per skill and qualification. If
employment is not possible then grant of Rs.100000/- shall be paid by ACL.
Impact Assessment : The proposed expansion will have some negative impact on the
environment. With implementation of recommended mitigation measures and
safeguards, the adverse effects will get reduced to acceptable level. Clinker making is a
248
dry process where no wastewater is generated. Sewage water will be treated and
reused. Entire solid wastes are reused. Mathematical modeling proved that the ambient
air quality of the study area will remain well within the prescribed national standards. It
has been ensured that mining will not intercept the groundwater table. Adequate
measures have been provided to control soil erosion and siltation problems of streams.
Damage to ecology and buildings for ground vibration and air blast waves will be
minimized by use of improved blasting technology. Plantation will be done on 33% land
area, which will reduce the effect of dust and noise and improve the aesthetic look of the
area. Mined out areas will be rehabilitated with dense green cover. The expansion
project will have beneficial impacts in terms of direct and indirect employment
opportunities. ACL will introduce a number of community development measures, which
would improve the quality of life of the people living in the area.
Environmental Monitoring Plan
Environmental Management Department (EMD) will be strengthened to undertake

routine environmental monitoring to evaluate performance of pollution control measures
and to ensure compliance with the prescribed standards. Qualified scientists and
engineers will be recruited to manage the EMD. EMD will be responsible for the
following functions:
I. Regular monitoring of –
1. Stack and fugitive dust emissions in plant and mines, work environment and report
any abnormalities for corrective measures.
2. Ambient air quality at upwind and downwind direction and at three locations at plant
(120 degree to each other) boundary. In case of mines ambient air quality monitoring
shall be carried out as per norms.
3. Re-circulating water quality and testing the inlet and outlet water quality of wastewater
treatment plant.
4. Ground water quality of plant site, mine sites, and surrounding villages.
5. Water quality of streams at upstream and downstream locations. .
249
6. Noise monitoring at the plant and mines boundary, nearest habitation including work
areas.
II. Development and maintenance of greenbelt and greenery within the plant
boundary, and reclamation / rehabilitation of mined out areas.
Additional Studies
Risk Mitigation Measures: Furnace Oil / HSD will be stored in 500 KL Tank. The oil
tanks will be designed and located as per standards of Oil Industry Safety Directorate,
secured with bunds, isolation valves on lines and other safety devices. Onsite
emergency response plan has been prepared in consultation with the District
Administration. Approval of Chief Controller of Explosives will be taken for the layout and
design of oil storage tanks.
Fire in coal yard, explosion in magazine area, etc are some of the risk and accident
hazards identified in the project. Elaborate fire fighting system with fire extinguishers,
hydrant system will be provided as per the recommendation of Loss Prevention
Association and Tariff Advisory Committee. Water for fire fighting will be taken from the
water tank. The location of explosive storage area has been approved by the IBM. All
safety measures recommended by the IBM and DGMS will be implemented.
The civil and mechanical structures will conform to earthquake resistant design, as per
seismic zone V BIS specification.
Occupational Health: Exposure to dust, noise, heat stress, mechanical injury are the
occupational hazards identified in the project. The workers will be checked for any
clinical complaints and abnormal symptoms by the medical department. The Hospital of
ACL is equipped with doctors, medicine, ambulance and other medical equipment to
take care of emergency and first aid cases. Workers will be given nose mask, ear plugs,
clean drinking water and toilet facility. Regular training and awareness programs will be
conducted.
250
Traffic Management: Limestone and shale will be transported by conveyor. Other raw
materials and clinker will be transported by road. This will increase the daily truck
movement by 600 trucks. Significant traffic flow and congestion at Darlaghat crossing
has been noticed. The existing National Highway on hilly terrain is double lane, with
earthen shoulders at most places. The maximum capacity of the road is 7000 PCU. ACL
proposes to make traffic from Darlaghat crossing entry to Suli and Rauri plant one way
and exit from opposite side through Rauri. This will decongest the Darlaghat crossing.
ACL has already taken up the work of road widening through NHAI on NH88 at several
points by way of RCC, masonry and road cutting from Darlaghat to Nalagarh
Project Benefits
Limestone mining will generate substantial revenue for the state of Himachal Pradesh,
through optimal utilization of natural resource. The expansion project will boost the
infrastructure development of the state. The project is optimized in terms of energy
consumption and carbon emission. The specific coal consumption is 710 kcal/kg clinker
produced and specific power consumption is 52 units / ton clinker produced, which is
comparable with international standards. 344 persons will get employment in clinker unit
and 110 persons in the mines. 1000 - 2000 workers will be required during the
construction of the clinker plant. Local people will be preferred for jobs, depending upon
their skill and experience. Transport business, vehicle drivers and attendants, repairing
workshops, grocery and retail stores, medical, school, coaching centers, restaurants,
self employed persons like tailors, carpenters, plumbers, electricians, etc will get indirect
jobs.
The company will explore avenues to provide vocational training to youths in the field of
electricians, plumbers, carpenters, masons, workshop attendants, fitters, welders, etc
and later utilizing their services in the project.
Under the aegis of Ambuja Cement Foundation, the company will continue to contribute
in the field of social development. It includes construction of community centres and
schools, making and maintaining roads, rain shelters, water supply system and providing
free drinking water to the nearby villages, making toilets, providing free medical camps,
251
providing scholarships to students and sportsperson and providing vocational training in

the field of bee keeping, mushroom cultivation, horticulture and growing fruits and
vegetables as self-help group. Medical facilities for catering to the requirement of the
staff and employees will continue to be given to the villagers.
Environmental Management Plan (EMP)
EMP for effective management of environmental impacts and ensuring overall protection
of the environment through appropriate management procedures has been developed.
In order to implement the recommended mitigation measures and institutionalise the
EMP, budgetary provision of Rs.109 crores as capital expenditure has been provided.
Contractor under the supervision of the company will do implementation of pollution
control measures during construction phase. EMD will ensure that all air pollution control
device, SWRP and water re-circulating systems function effectively. EMD will also
supervise disposal of spent oil and lubricants and used batteries to the authorized
vendors. Plantation will be started during the construction phase by following the
guidelines issued by the Central Pollution Control Board. Schemes for resource
conservation (raw materials, water, etc), rainwater harvesting and social forestry
development will be taken up by EMD. Regular environmental awareness programs for
the employees will be conducted. .
Workers will be periodically subject to health check-up. EMD will also ensure cleanliness
and industrial hygiene in the plant and mines. EMD in association with the safety
department will undertake full review of the potential hazard scenarios during plant
commissioning. The review will ensure enforcement of the proposed safeguards for
pollution abatement, resource conservation, accident prevention and waste
minimization. The implementation of EMP would ensure that all elements of project
comply with relevant environmental legislation throughout its life cycle.
252
CHAPTER 10: DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED

FOR THE EIA STUDY
M/s Ambuja Cement Limited engaged M/s EMTRC Consultants Private Limited, Delhi in
2009 to conduct the EIA Study. EMTRC Consultants Private Limited has completed
more than 100 EIA Studies in various sectors over the last 10 years. EMTRC has its own
recognized laboratory for sampling and testing of air, water, noise and soil samples. The
laboratory is accredited by NABL (National Accreditation Board for Laboratories; ISO
17025: 2005, ISO 9001 and OHSAS 18001).
EMTRC Consultants Private Limited is Accredited as EIA Consultant as per MOEF

direction by the Quality Council of India – NABET (National Accreditation Board for
Education and Training). The Accreditation includes Mining of Minerals (both
underground and opencast mining) and Cement Plant Sector besides other 9 sectors.
The Certificates mentioning the name of EIA Coordinator ad Funcional Area Experts are
attached. The profile of EMTRC Consultants Pvt Ltd is also available in website
www.emtrc.com.
Dr. J.K.Moitra is the EIA Coordinator for this study. The FAE’s of EMTRC has
participated in the study. In addition some external experts and expert agencies were
also involved in the study. The name of the Experts and Agency are given below:
1. Dr. M.R.Borkar, Pune University, for detailed Biological Study

2. Dr. R.P.Agarwal, Retd Director, Central Groundwater Board for detailed
Hydrogeological Study
3. Compusense - Ahmedabad: For Satellite Imagery and GIS Mapping
4. Central Road Research Institute, New Delhi, for Traffic Survey and Air Pollution
Study of Road Network
253
254
255
APPENDIX 1
POINT WISE COMPLIANCE OF TOR ISSUED by MOEF (Expansion of Clinker Plant)

SN TOR Conditions Remarks
1 Permission under Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 from Single Window Clearance of
the National Board of Wild Life / Chief Wild Life State Govt attached as
Warden regarding Majathal and Darlaghat (Pipulughat) Annexure 1
Wild Life Sanctuary should be obtained and included in Permission under Wildlif Act
EIA / EMP. from PCCF attached as
Annexure-2.
2 Present land use should be prepared based on satellite Satellite imagery provided in
imagery. Study area should be 10 km radius. section 3.9, Figure 3.5 and
Figure 3.6, page 107-108
chapter 3
3 Site specific micro-meteorological data including Provided in section 3.3 page

inversion height and mixing height. 72-75 Chapter 3
4 Collection of baseline data on air, water, soil, noise, Provided in section 3.4, 3.5,
flora and fauna etc. for one season other than 3.6, 3.7 and 3.8 page 75 –104
monsoon. chapter 3.
5 Data of existing air pollution in the plant should be Provided in Annexure- 9

incorporated.
6 Ambient air quality monitoring modeling for Cement Provided in section 4.3.4 page
plant and Mines. 117 – 128 chapter 4
7 Source of secondary emission, its control and Provided in section 2.9.7 page
monitoring as per the CPCB Guidelines. 61 – 63 chapter 2 and section
8.2.2 page 191-193, chapter 8
8 A write up on use of high calorific hazardous waste Provided in section 2.9 page
including BF slag in kiln and commitment regarding use 53-63 chapter 2
of hazardous waste.
9 Chemical characterization of RSPM and incorporation Provided in section 3.4 Table

of RSPM data. Location of one AAQM station in 3.5 & 3.6 page 80 chapter 3
downwind direction.
10 Water balance cycle data including quantity of effluent Provided in section 8.2.4
to be generated, recycled and reused and discharged. Figure 8.1 and 8.2 page 195 -
196 chapter 8
11 Efforts made to minimize use of ground water along Hydrology note by State Govt
with an action plan should be provided. A chapter on is given in section 3.2 page 65-
hydrology study by the State Govt. may be included. 71.
260
Ground water monitoring minimum at 8 locations. Extract of Hydrology Study has

been conducted by Retd
Director CGWB, which is
provided as Annexure- 6.
Groundwater quality given in

section 3.6, Table 3.12 & 3.13
page 87 - 90 , chapter 3
12 Action plan for surface as well as roof top rain water Provided in section 4.3.7.1
harvesting and ground water recharge. page 140-143 chapter 4
13 Scheme of proper storage of fly ash, gypsum, clinker, Provided in section 2.9 page 53
coal. chapter 2
14 A full chapter on fugitive emission and control Provided in section 8.2 page
technologies should be provided. 190 - 193 chapter 8.
15 Impact of transportation of raw material and the details Impact of transportation

of mitigation measures should be included. described in section 4.3.14
page 149- 153 chapter 4.
Conclusion and
Recommendation of Central
Road Research Institute
(Report titled “Trafiic and Air
Polluton Survey of Road
Network connecting Darlagha –
Ropar – Nalagarh”) is provided
as Annexure-8.
16 Risk assessment and damage control. Provided in section 5.1 page

156 -168 chapter 5
17 Occupational health of the workers. Provided in section 8.6 page

218 - 221 chapter 8
18 Green belt (33%) development plan as per CPCB Provided in section 8.5 page
Guidelines. EMP should include a clear map for 206 – 218 chapter 8
plantation / green belt.
19 Socio-economic development activities. Provided in section 8.8 page

223 - 234 chapter 8
20 Scheme for compliance to the recommendation Provided in Section 1.5, page

mention in the CREP guide lines for Cement plant. 8-9, Chapter 1of EIA Report.
21 Details of location of wild life sanctuary and national Location of wildlife sanctuary,
park with in 10 km. radius of the plant and plan for conservtion and protection plan
261
conservation and protection of the same should be provided in section 1.3 page 3-
included. 6, Chapter 1, of EIA report. and
Figure 1.2., page 11, section
5.2 page 168 – 170 Chapter 5
of EIA Reprt.
Detailed report on Flora and

Fauna (By Dr. M. R. Borkar) is
provided in Annexure-7.
22 Detail Environment Management Plan (EMP) with EMP provided in chapter 8

specific reference to detail of air pollution control Monitoring Plan in chapter 6
system, water and waste water management,
monitoring frequency, responsibility and time bond
implementation plan for mitigation measure should be
provided.
23 EMP should include the concept of waste minimization Included

/ recycle / reuse / recover techniques, energy
conservation and natural resource conservation.
24 A tabular chart of the issues raised and addressed To be provided after public
during public hearing / public consultation should be hearing
provided.
POINT WISE COMPLIANCE OF TOR ISSUED by MOEF (Expansion of Mines)

S. N TOR Condition Compliance Status
1 The study area should comprise of 10 km zone around Considered

the mine lease from lease periphery.
2 Land use of the study area delineating forest area, Provided in section 3.9
agricultural land, grazing land, wildlife sanctuary and Figure 3.6, page 108
national park, migratory routes of fauna, water bodies, chapter 3
human settlement and other ecological features.
3 Land use plan of the mine lease area should be prepared Land use Plan of ML area is
to encompass pre operational, operational and post given in Figure 2.3, Page
operational phases. 18, Chapter 2 of EIA
Report.
Land use during
Preoperational, Operational
and Post operational
phases of mining plan are
provided in Figure 2.4-2.6,
page 24-26.
262
4 Location of National Parks, Sanctuary, Biosphere No Biosphere reserve is

Reserves, Wild Life Corridors within 10 km of the mine present with in 10 km radius
lease should be clearly indicated. area. There are two Wildlife
A location map duly authenticated by Chief Wild Life Sanctuary in 10 km area,
Warden should also be provided in this regard. 1. Darlaghat sanctuary
2. Mazthal sanctuary
Necessary clearance, if any, as may be applicable to
such projects due to proximity of the ecologically Authenticated Location Map
sensitive areas as mentioned above should be obtained showing the wildlife
from the State Wild Life Department / Chief Wild Life sanctuary as well as the
Warden under the Wild Life (Protection ) Act 1972 and plant and mine site is
copy furnished. provided in Figure 1.2, page
11 of EIA Report.
Necessary permission from

PCCF attached as
Annexure-1.
5 A detail biological study for the study area [core zone and Location of wildlife
buffer zone (10 km radius of the periphery of the mine sanctuary, conservation and
lease)] shall be carried out. Details of flora and fauna duly protection plan, provided in
authenticated separately core and buffer zone should be section 1.3 page 3-6,
furnished based on field survey clearly indicating the Chapter 1, of EIA report.
Schedule of the Fauna present. In case of any Schedule-I and Figure 1.2., page 11,
fauna found in the study area the necessary plan for their section 3.8, page 93 – 105,
conservation should prepare in consultation with State Chapter 3, and section 5.2
Forest and Wild Life Department and detail furnished. page 168 – 170 Chapter 5
Necessary allocation of funds for implementing the same of EIA Reprt.
should be made as part of the project cost.
Detailed report on Flora and
Fauna (By Dr. M. R. Borkar)
is provided in Annexure-7
.
6 Impact of change of land use particularly agriculture land Provided in section 4.3.1
and gaucher / grazing land, if any. page 113 - 116 chapter 4
7 R & R plan / compensation details for the project affected Provided in section 5.3
people, if any. page 170 -174 chapter 5
8 Collection of one season (non monsoon) primary base Provided in section 3.4, 3.5,
line data on air, water, soil, noise, flora and fauna etc. 3.6, 3.7 and 3.8 page 75 –
Site specific micro-meteorological data should also be 105 chapter 3.
collected. The location of the monitoring station should be Detailed report on Flora and
justified. Authenticated data of fauna for the area should Fauna (By Dr. M. R. Borkar)
be provided. is provided in Annexure-7
9 Air quality modeling should be carried out for prediction Provided in section 4.3.4
of impact of the project on the air quality of the area. It page 117 – 128 chapter 4
263
should also take into account the impact of movement of Air Quality Contours
vehicle for transportation of minerals. The details of the provided in Figure 4.1 to 4.8
model used and input parameters used for modeling page 125-131, Chapter 4
should be provided. The air quality contours may be
shown on a location map clearly indicating the location of
the site, location of the sensitive receptors, if any and the
habitation. The wind roses showing pre-dominant wind
direction may also be indicated on the map. Silica should
also be mentioned in the AAQ.
10 The water requirement for the project, its availability and Provided in section 2.7.8
source to be furnished. A detailed water balance should page 43 chapter 2
also be provided. Fresh water requirement for the project Provided in section 8.2.4
should also be indicated. Figure 8.1, page 194 -197
chapter 8
.
11 Necessary clearance for the Competent Authority for Provided in Annexure 5
drawl of requisite quantity of water for the project should
be provided.
12 Details of water conservation measures proposed to be Provided in section 4.3.7.1

adopted in the project. page 140 - 143 chapter 4
13 Impact of the mining on the water quality both surface Provided in section 4.3.7
and ground water should be assessed and necessary page 136 - 143 chapter 4
safeguard measures, if any required should be provided.
14 Details of rainwater harvesting proposed, in the project to Provided in section 4.3.7.1

be provided. page 140-143 chapter 4
15 Information on site elevation, working depth, ground Provided in chapter section

water table should be provided both in AMSL and BGL. A 2.7.2 and 2.7.4 page 20 –
schematic diagram may also be provided for the same. In 35 chapter 2.
case the working will intersect ground water table, a Mining will not intersect the
detailed hydrological study should be undertaken and groundwater table, as
report furnished. evident from the approved
mining plan.
Detailed Hydological Study
has been done by Mr.
R.P.Agarwal (Retd Director-
CGWB) and provded in
Annexure 7.
.
16 Quantity of solid waste generation to be estimated and Provided in section 8.2.7
details for its disposal and management to be provided. page 201 chapter 8
17 Action plan for utilization of sandstone / shale generated No sandstone will be

in the form of over burden. generated from the mines.
Shale from the mines shall
264
be used in process
18 The reclamation plan, post mine land use and Provided in section 5.3
progressive greenbelt development plan should be page 170 - 174 chapter 5.
provided
Greenbelt development
plan provided in section 8.5
page 206 – 218 chapter 8
19 Impact on local transport infrastructure due to the project. Provided in section 4.3.14
Project increase in truck traffic as a result of the project in page 149 - 153 chapter 4.
the present road network (including those outside of the Conclusion and
project area) and whether it is capable of handling the Recommendation of Central
increased load. Arrangement for improving the Road Research Institute
infrastructure, if any contemplated including action to be (Report titled “Trafiic and Air
taken by other agencies such as State Government, if Polluton Survey of Road
any, should be covered. Network connecting
Darlagha – Ropar –
Nalagarh”) is provided as
Annexure-8.
20 Details of the infrastructure facilities to be provided for the Provided in section 2.7.11
mine workers. page 44 chapter 2
21 Conceptual post mine land use and reclamation and Provided in section 5.3
rehabilitation of mined out area (with plans and with page 170 - 174 chapter 5
adequate number of sections) and section 2.7.4 page 23 -
35 chapter 2
Post mine land use plan
provided in Figure 2.6,
Page 26.
22 Phase-wise plan of greenbelt development, plantation Greenbelt development
and compensatory afforestation clearly indicating the plan provided in section 8.5
area to be covered under plantation and the species to be page 206 – 218 chapter 8
planted. The details of plantation already done should be Details of plantations
given. already done provided in
Table 8.3.
23 Occupational health impact of the project, mitigation Provided in section 8.6

measures & monitoring plan should be provided. A note page 218 - 221 chapter 8
on silicosis should be included.
.
24 A detailed action plan for undertaking socio-economic Provided in section 8.8
development of the area should be provided. As far as page 223 - 234 chapter 8
possible, quantitative dimension to be given.
25 Detailed environmental management plan to mitigate the Impact mitigation and

environmental impacts which should inter-alia also assessment provided in
include the impact due to the change of land us, due to chapter 4.
265
loss of agriculture land and grazing land, if any, beside EMP provided in chapter 8.
other impacts of the project should be provided.
26 Public hearing / public consultation points raised and Shall be provided after
commitment of the project proponent on the same along public hearing
with time bond action plan to implement the same should
be provided.
27 Any litigation pending against the project and / or any None, as per statement
direction / order passed by any Court of Low against the given by Ambuja Cements
project , if so, details thereof should be provided. Limited
28 Any action plan for protection and conservation of water Actions already taken by by
bodies / stream passing nearby mine area should be ACL for protection and
included in EMP. conservation of water
bodies / streams passing
near mine area is provided
in section 4.3.7.1. page
140-143
29 Erosion protection and soil conservation plan should be Provided in section 8.4
provided page 202 – 206 chapter 8
30 Type of mining equipments to be used and their impact Provided in section 2.7.7
thereof should be provided. Table 2.6, page 40 – 43
chapter 2
266
Annexure-1: Single Window Clearance from State Government
267

268

269
Annexure-2: NOC from Principal Chief Conservator of Forests
270
Annexure-3 Letter from MOEF Regarding Renewal of Mining Lease
271
Annexure-4: Letter from State Govt Regarding Renewal of Mining Lease
272
273
274

275

Annexur‐5 Letter from GWB and NOC from Gram Panchayat for Taking Groundwater
276

NOC from Village Panchyat

277
Annexure-6: Extract from Hydrogeology Report of Plant and Mine
AMBUJA CEMENTS LTD.
COMPREHENSIVE HYDROGEOLOGICAL REPORT
FOR
RAURI CLINKERISATION PLANT & SULI CEMENT PLANT
AND
KASHLOG LIMESTONE MINE
DARLAGHAT, DISTRICT SOLAN (H.P.)

JUNE, 2012
Prepared By:
278
R. P. Agarwal
Retired Regional Director
Central Groundwater Board
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
1. M/s Ambuja Cement Ltd (ACL) has a cement plant of capacity 2.6 MTPA
clinker &1.3 MTPA cement at village Suli, and a clinkerisation unit of capacity
1.8 MTPA clinker at village Rauri(adjacent to existing cement unit at Suli)
along with captive limestone mine of capacity5.5 MTPA production of
limestone and shale in Darlagha, district Solan (Himachal Pradesh).
2. Considering the increasing demand of cement in the Himachal Pradesh and

other northern states, and availability of cement grade limestone and
technically feasibility, ACL has decided to enhance the capacity of Rauri
clinkerisation unit(from 1.8 MTPA to 2.6 MTPA clinker production), and
Kashlog Mining capacity (from5.5 MTPA to 7.6 MTPA limestone and shale
production) to meet the total requirement of limestone for both units.
3. MoEF issued the Terms of Reference (ToR) vide their letter F.No. J-
11011/986/2008-IA-II(I) dated March 12, 2009 to obtain the prior
environmental clearance for enhanced capacity of Rauri clinkerisation unit
and Kashlog limestone mines.
4. Kashlog Limestone mine, an operating captive mine is spread over 488.06ha.

The lease area comprises three blocks viz. Western (Kashlog), Eastern
(Mangu) and Central (Pati). Presently mining is ongoing in western (Kashlog)
block and the technique adopted is open cast slicing. The bench height is
average 10m while width of bench varies between 20 to 30m. Present
working level is 1300mRL.
5. Estimated geological reserve of 225Mn.T and proposed production of

7.6.MTPA the mine life may be around 32years.To meet the raw material
requirement for the upcoming plant at Rauri, the mine production has to be
increased.
6. The plant is located 2.5 km from NH – 88 and is approachable from

Kararaghat on the above National Highway. The distance from plant to
Kararaghat is about 6 km. mining area at Kashlog village is about 18 km
away from the plant. The raw material from the mine is sent through
conveyor belt to the plant.
7. The area presents an intricate mosaic of hills and valleys with altitude ranging
from 1100 to 1700 m. above mean sea level. The study area is drained by
the river Sutlaj and its tributaries namely Tungru and Badar khad flowing in
northwest direction. The large number of springs in the study area is the
279
life line of local inhabitant. Besides for drinking water State Govt. has
constructed large number of hand pumps.
8. The area experiences sub-tropical to temperate climatic conditions with

average annual rainfall in the area is 1424.8mm, bulk of which occurs
through south-west monsoon during June to September every year.
9. Geological set up and the topography controls the occurrence and movement
of groundwater. The study area is underlain by Older Metamorphic, Meta-
Sedimentary and Sedimentary consisting of Quartzite, Phyllite, Slate,
Limestone, Shale, Sandstone etc. which are massive consolidated and
devoid of primary porosity. The yield of springs varies from less than 1 to 10
liter per second. The weathered and fractured rocks having secondary
porosity form the main water bearing zone having low yield prospects.
10. The hydrological properties of the aquifer present in the area has been
worked out through pump test. Transmissivity of aquifer present in plant area
works out as 1.77 to 2.2m2 /day while in mine area it is4.42m2/day. The yield
from the tube well is 86cum/day for a high draw down of 22 to 25m.
11. The groundwater resource for the study area has been worked out as
54.45MCM. The present level of groundwater development has been
estimated as 17.86% and the area comes under safe category.
12. Presently the entire water need of the industrial unit is met through surface
water from Pazeena Khad and ground water for which the approval of
competent authority has been obtained.
10 For the Rauri plant the water requirement of 500cum/day is proposed to be

met through groundwater for which the permission from competent
authorities has been obtained. The increase in groundwater development
of the area will be 18.19% from present 17.86%. No groundwater is used
for the mine working and the mine water need of 100cum/day is being met
through surface water from Pazeena Khad. The level of groundwater
development will still remain in safe category with additional
abstraction to a tune of 500cum/day for Ruri plant.
11 The present study is to evaluate assessment of ground water resources and

to ensure that no adverse impact on groundwater system is likely.
12 The study, indicate large volume of storm water generation (1844700cum)

from the plant area. It is proposed to harvest 38250 (2%) cum of storm water
in underground tanks to be constructed in the premises of plant area. The
stored water shall provide 115.9cum water to the Rauri plant for 330 working
days. Part of storm water shall be diverted through drains in the plant area to
specially designed recharge structures at appropriate locations to enhance
the groundwater storage which may be used for running the plant till
alternative scheme of surface water use is not implemented. With proposed
280
20 number of recharge structures total annual recharge through roof top rain
water harvesting is estimated as (24000 x 20) 480,000cum (26%) which will
be nearly three times of water need of Rauri plant. The balance storm water
will be left to flow in the main drainage for downstream users.
13 It is envisaged that dependency on groundwater shall be reduced in phased

manner by developing rain water harvesting and artificial recharge to
groundwater in the plant area.
14 Further the water table will remain below the deepest mine working through
out mine operation. Since the water table will not be intersected no mine
seepage is anticipated. The elevation of water table in the western block is
around 1200mRL while the deepest floor level will be 1250mRL. In central
and eastern mining blocks the water table elevation will be 1300mRL while
the proposed deepest floor level will be 1340mRL
15 No adverse impact on groundwater storage is expected under the

prevailing scenario of proposed rainwater harvesting programme.
16 The area is underlain by hard and compact rock. And proposed volume of
groundwater abstraction for the plant (%00cum/day) is low Therefore
landslide possibility due to groundwater extraction is not anticipated.
17 There is huge scope of development of surface water development in the

area. In the study conducted by WAPCOS four potential locations were
identified. The objections by local inhabitants as well as high lift are the major
constraints in harvesting surface water in the area.
18 Dependency on groundwater as well as implementation of rainwater

harvesting is the only viable solution.
281
1
ANNEXURE 7 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT REPORT OF STUDY AREA

BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT IN THE CORE AND BUFFER ZONES OF CEMENT PLANT AT VILLAGE
RAURI AND LIMESTONE MINING LEASES OF M/S AMBUJA CEMENT LTD. AT VILLAGES KASHLOG,
MANGU AND PATI, TEHSIL ARKI OF DISTRICT SOLAN AT HIMACHAL PRADESH, INDIA.
FUNCTIONAL AREA EXPERT – Dr. Manoj R. Borkar M.Sc., Ph.D., PGDEE, FBRS, FASc(AW), FIAES
282
2
Background & Methodology
Wherein, the Project Proponent M/S Ambuja Cements Limited (Rauri unit) has submitted an
application No. ACL,EMD/MoE&F/F-20/12-08 dated 20th December, 2008; along with form
I Prefeasibility report for expansion of Clinker Unit (1.8 MTPA to 2.6 MTPA) at village Rauri
and limestone mining (5.5 MTPA to 7.6 MTPA) at villages Kashlog, Mangu and Pati and
Draft ToR for preparation of EIA as per the EIA notification 2006.
The MoE&F, GoI vide its letter dated 12th March, 2009 F.No. J-11011/986/2008-IA-II(I) had
finalised and conveyed the ToR to the PP M/S Ambuja Cements Limited (Rauri unit),
Darlaghat, Himachal Pradesh .
The ToR no.1 for Cement Plant was to obtain permission under Wildlife Protection Act, 1972
from National Board of Wildlife / Chief Wildlife Warden in the light of proximity of 2
Protected Areas (Wildlife Sanctuaries) namely Majathal WLS and Darlaghat (Piplughat)
WLS to the proposed sites (Clinker Unit and Mining leases). ToR no. 21also sought details on
location of the PAs and NPs within the buffer zone of 10 km radius and Plan for protection
and conservation of the same.
In so far as the ToR for Mines is concerned, the statutory agency sought details on location
of PAs Sanctuaries, National Parks, Biosphere Reserves and Wildlife Corridors etc. within the
buffer zones of the plant and mining leases and the necessary permissions/ clearances as may
be necessary. Also, at ToR No. V for Mines, a detailed Biological study of the Core and 10km
radius Buffer was prescribed.
The PP M/S Ambuja Cements Limited engaged the consultancy services of M/S. J M
EnviroNet Pvt. Ltd. who in turn deputed Dr Manoj R. Borkar, Environmental Biologist and a
NABET-QCI accredited FAE (Ecology & Biodiversity) to visit the site and conduct the
Biological Study.
Dr. Borkar having perused the pertinent documents (Correspondence, Secondary Literature,
Location Maps procured from Bilaspur Mandi Forest Circle Himachal Pradesh, and Satellite
Imageries) through a Desk-Top Study; conducted a biological reconnaissance from 9th June
to 15th June, 2012 at Darlaghat, Himachal Pradesh, with special focus on biological
environment of the core and buffer of the Plant and the mining leases. The FAE was assisted
283
3
in the field by Forester Prakash Salelkar from Goa and Mr. Kameshwar, Asst. Manager
(Environment), an official and representative of the PP.
The villages visited in the buffer of the Plant, and the 3 mining lease were as follows:
Stations visited on Day 1.

1. Suli
2. Kakda
3. Rachakda
4. Kothi
5. Piplughat
6. Damlana
7. Dhundan
8. Daseran
9. Chamakripul
10. Dugnihar
11. Darlamad
12. Chamla
Majathal Wildlife Sanctuary
1. Suli Plant
2. Bahadurpur
3. Bharadighat
4. Nalao
5. Namhal
6. Tepra Khas
7. Bahadurpur
8. Brahmpukar
9. Nauni
10. Gobind Sagar Lake
1. Rauri Village
2. Suli Village
3. Kashlog Mine Lease
Field Protocols
A rapid snapshot survey approach was adopted along the Line transects within 3 study areas
and species of flora and fauna sighted were recorded along with their local and scientific
names. Crop fields and montane village settlements were visited to understand the domestic
biodiversity. Due importance was given to reliable stakeholders narratives Collection was
categorically avoided but exhaustive photo-documentation was done to compile evidences of
the biodiversity. Randomised visits were conducted to account for nocturnal biodiversity. The
284
4
species were verified for their conservation status and fauna scheduled as per the Wildlife
Protection Act, 1972.
The various ecological features were examined vis a vis the proposed mining lease for
prospecting the impacts if any. This included a special focus on the montane ecosystems
within the buffer as well as the Majathal Wildlife Sanctuary and Darlaghat Wildlife
Sanctuary. The Majathal PA is at an aerial distance of approximately 2.7 km from the Rauri
Plant where the clinker expansion is proposed, 1 km from the existing Kashlog Mine lease,
1.2 km from Pati Mining lease and 1.5 km from Mangu Mine lease. The Darlaghat
(Piplughat) sanctuary is at an aerial distance of about 4 km from the Rauri Plant where the
clinker expansion is proposed, 5 km from the existing Kashlog Mine lease, 5.3 km from Pati
Mine lease and 4.5 km from Mangu mine lease. In essence both the PAs are within the buffer
zones of the plant as well as the proposed leases. Both the PAs were intensively surveyed on
foot to assess their wildlife habitat and diversity. Specially in Majathal Wildlife sanctuary a
14 km transect was traversed on foot to ascertain the wildlife endowments of this important
montane forest ecosystem.
An important aspect of this field investigation was stakeholder interaction for generating
‘bare-feet’ database on biodiversity. The local inhabitants of the villages, hamlets as also the
nomadic camel herders were interviewed for various cross cutting themes on biodiversity.
Various likely impacts have been considered and mitigation measures suggested making
mining sustainable and eco-friendly. A particular focus has been given on the likely impact of
the clinker expansion and opening of mining leases on the wildlife of the 2 sanctuaries here.
Need for Biodiversity Impact Assessment
Considering the significant high forest cover and rich floral and faunal diversity of the state,
understandable concerns are raised on the negative impact that Limestone mining and
Cement sector might have on the terrestrial /aquatic biodiversity and wildlife of the area, the
impacts could be direct impact or indirect and/or short- and long-term. Understanding the
impacts can facilitate mitigation measures to avert the so called inevitable environmental
damage/costs.
285
5
Kashlog, Pati and Mangu. There is already a conveyor belt between existing broken Kashlog
lease and the Plant. The rugged mountainous terrain involving the proposed Pati and Mangu is
undulating and hilly, with sparse vegetation and moderate species diversity due to pure
conifer forests . A state highway passes between these leases and the area is already disturbed
by vehicular traffic and is also under a severe anthropogenic pressure. The ridges seen
towards the NE direction of the Kashlog lease is the Majathal Wildlife sanctuary also a well
known designated IBA site. A conveyor belt for transferring ore passes between the Kashlog
lease and the cement Plant in Darlaghat. A separate conveyor assembly is planned for the
Mangu and Pati leases.
Vegetation, Forest Types and Biodiversity Profile
The State of Himachal Pradesh is a veritable treasure trove of biodiversity due to variations in
topography, geological formations, climatic conditions and the altitudinal range. The range of floral
and faunal diversity elements of the State varies from those of subtropical region to that of temperate
and alpine regions.
Such is the relevance of biodiversity to the people of the State that “Deodar” has been
adopted as the state tree, “Rhododendron” as the state flower, “Musk deer” as the state
animal and “Monal” as the state bird. The baseline biodiversity status of the core and buffer
zones of the Clinker expansion site, Kashlog, Pati and Mangu leases have been determined on
the basis of a Rapid Snapshot Survey along the transects for collecting and collating primary
data, where as perusal of secondary literature available with the High Altitude Station of the
ZSI, Solan has helped to corroborate the biodiversity richness of the place.
The floral diversity of the regions examined to evaluate the impact of the proposed project
can be broadly categorised under the following types of forests, depending on the altitude and
species diversity.
286
6
Photographs Copyrighted ©2012. Photos by Dr Manoj R.
Borkar
From Top left, Row-wise

1. Ambuja Cement Plant, Rauri village 2. Existing Kashlog Mines
3. Proposed Mangu Lease 4.Goral habitat in Majathal
5. Cattle grazing in Majathal 6. Sardarpur Reserve Forest
7. Burning conifers in Majathal 8. Percolation Tank in Majathal.
287
7
1. Tropical Dry Deciduous Forests
This forest type is mainly seen in the lower altitudes of the Shivaliks (lower montane zone –
up to 1,000 m). Main tree species recorded here are the Khair (Acacia catechu) , Siris
(Albizzia lebbek), Kachnar (Bauhinia variegeta) , Semal (Bombax malabaricum), Toon
(Cedrela toona), Mango (Mangifera indica ), Behul (Grewia optiva ), Shisham (Dalbergia
sisoo), & Chil (Pinus roxburghii).The adjacent vegetation around the Ambuja Suli Plant and
the Dalaghat-Piplughat terrain are good representatives of this vegetation. The bird diversity
of this forest is impressive due to availability of fruits and nesting niches.
This forest has witnessed large-scale degradation in terms of quality and also reduced
distribution due to expansion of industry in some areas of Shivaliks. High resource
extraction, firewood and fodder, along with overgrazing have also led to degradation of
habitat quality. Tropical dry deciduous forests are also facing threats from biological
invasions of exotic species, like Lantana camara, Prosopis juliflora and other common exotic
weeds, as a result natural regeneration is severely affected and species diversity is decreasing.
2. Tropical Thorn Forests
This vegetation type is distributed in the lower altitudes in the Shivaliks (lower Montane zone
– up to 1,000 m). Essentially a sub-set of the tropical dry deciduous forests, but classified
separately due to distinct species composition. Characteristically trees are missing but some
thorny bushes takes shapes of small to medium-sized trees. Main species are Zizyphus jujuba,
Carissa carandas, Balenitis sp. & Acacia leucophloea. A good habitat for ground dwelling
birds like Black Francolin and some herpetiles, this forest type has also witnessed large-scale
degradation, primarily from change in the land-use pattern, as many people considered such
vegetation composition as low productivity wastelands.
3. Sub-Tropical Pine Forests
This forest type is distributed in the mid altitudes (middle montane zone – between 1,000 to
1,800 m). Pine is the dominant species here and large tracts of good quality pine forests can
be seen as monoculture stands. Usually, such vast acreage of a single species supports less
diversity is due to pure pine formations. Main species observed include Chir, Alder, Willow,
Robinia, Blue Pine, Toon, Wild Apricot & Celtis. Uncontrolled and man-made (including
288
8
accidental) fires are a major hazard for such forest types. In Majathal crest lines one often
sees smoke emerging from the pine strands.
These forests have relatively maintained their species composition, and are less disturbed
compared to the deciduous forests of the lower altitudes although in some areas exotic weeds
have proliferated, especially after landslides.
4. Sub-Tropical Dry Ever Green Forests
Distributed in the mid altitudes (middle Montane zone – between 1,000 to 2,000 m), these
forests have a patchy and small distribution area with in the mid hills. Main species found are
Kachnar, Poplar, Willow, Ohi, Robinia,Drek, Kail, Chil, Toon, Behmi, Chulli, Vitex, Lolium,
Dactylis & Phleum. Despite unevenly distributed rainfall pattern, the forest maintains its
green cover throughout the year.
5. Himalayan Moist Temperate Forests
Distributed in the temperate Zone (From 2,000m to 3,000 m) Most widely distributed forests
of the HP, chiefly dominated by the conifers.
Main tree species are Deodar, Fir, Spruce, Maple, Ash, Bhoj-Patra, Horse Chestnut, Alder,
Robinia, Poplar & Walnut. The habitat quality has reduced in some areas with high resource
extraction in terms of firewood. This forest type has also suffered on account of large-scale
illegal tree felling, as most species have high timber value and are needed for industrial and
domestic (house construction) purposes.
Habitat conversion and encroachment, particularly in the apple-growing belt has also
reduced its natural extent of distribution. Forests have been cleared and encroached for
expanding apple orchards and cultivation of other agricultural crops.
The biotic interferences like fire, grass cutting, grazing and firewood cutting cause significant
disturbances and may trigger changes in species composition. There is a general deficit of
natural regeneration in the climax community and hence such disturbances can prove to be
catastrophic.
Besides the natural forests, the cropland ecosystem also holds some floral diversity. The
common crops grown in the area are Oryzha sativa, Eluceana coracona, Zea maize, Triticum
vulgare, Triticum diococcum, Sorghum vulgare. The agro-ecosystems are totally at the behest
289
9
of monsoon precipitation, canal irrigation and river. Besides the crops, raised the fields also
support a lot of weeds like Cynaodon dactylon, Euphorbia hirta, Cyperus rotundus,
Digetaria sp. and Alyscicarpus sp. Cash crops like Sunflower, Cotton, Groundnut and
vegetables like Red Chillies, Brinjal, Ladyfinger, Tomatao and seasonal leafy vegetables
are grown here.
The Darlaghat (Arki) scenario

The forests in the areas surveyed for the purpose of this surveillance here mainly fall under
the Kunihar Forest division. The biotic interferences like fire, grass cutting, grazing and
firewood cutting cause significant disturbances and may trigger changes in species
composition. There is a general deficit of natural regeneration in the climax community and
hence such disturbances can prove to be catastrophic.
Vegetation survey in the Darlaghat Piplughat areas revealed a Mixed Deciduous forest type
along the slopes. The upper canopy here is relatively open with shrubby undergrowth. During
the summer Beason, the foliage is less and soil is exposed to insolation. But in the wet season,
there is a dense biomass. The chief candidates along the top canopy are Chhal (Anogeissus
latifolia), Jhingan (Lannea coramandalica), Siris (Albizzia lebbeck, procera, odarattissima),
Simal (Bombax ceiba), Pula (Kydia calcina), Barnasi (Forenia limonia), Amaltaas (Cassia
fistula), Chamror (Ehretia leajensis)), Sandan (Ougenia oojensis), Kaim (Mitragyna
parviflora), Kangu ( Flacartia indica), Khair (Acacia catechu), Jamun (Syzygium cumini),
Chilla (Caseria tomentosa), Amla (Emblica officinalis), Kachnar (Bauhinia spp.), Toon
(Cedrela toona). Also seen commonly here are Dhaman (Grewia spp.), Shingar (Boernmeria
regulosa), Kamal (Mallotus phillippines), Blojho (Sapium insigne), Ber (Zyzyphus
mauritiana), Bel (Aegle marmelos) , and Dhak (Butea monosperma).
The undergrowth here comprises of Thor (Euphorbia royleana), Harsinghar (Nyctanthes

arbortristis), Karunfa (Carissa apaca), Dhavi (Woodfordia fruticosa), Kathi (Indigofera
pulchelli), Gundhella (Murayya keonegii), Basuti (Adhatoda vasica), Mehendru (Dodonaea
viscosa), and Keor (Holarrhena antidysenterica). Grasses seen here are Bubba (Cynodon
dactylon), Dhaulu (Chrysopogon montanus), and Labb (Cympogon martini).
290
10
The landscape towards the backside of the Raudi Cement Plant, Majathal Wildlife Sanctuary
as well as patches in Darlaghat-Piplughat zone is predominantly occupied by Chil Pine (Pinus
roxburghi) forests. Generally this forest type is characteristically confined to high altitudes up
to 1800 m. In this forest clear felling and introduction of Khair (Acacia catechu), overgrazing
and invasion by Lantana camara are some major threats that demand urgent managerial
interventions. The On well drained and textured Shivalik formations one can also see bamboo
clumps (Dendrocalamus strictus) representing mixed deciduous forest. Another species that
dominates here in the degenerated deciduous forests is the Thor (Euphorbia royleana).
Cryptogamic flora is not well documented here due to lack of systematic explorations.
Ephemeral flora representing these lower groups sch as the algae occurs in the seasonal lentic
water bodies. The fungi, bryophytes and pteridophytes are seasonal in their presence and are
of lesser consequences in terms of impact of the proposal.
Tropical Dry Deciduous Forests

Distributed in the lower altitudes in the Shivaliks (lower Montane zone – up to 1,000 m).
Main tree species observed are Khair, Siris, Kachnar, Semal, Tun, Mango, Behul, Shisham,
Ritha, Tut, Behera & Chil. This forest has witnessed large-scale degradation in terms of
quality as also reduced distribution due to expansion of industry in some areas of Shivaliks
High resource extraction, firewood and fodder, along with overgrazing has also led to
degradation of habitat quality.
Tropical dry deciduous forests are also facing threats from biological invasions of exotic
species, like Lantana camara, Prosopis juliflora and other common exotic weeds, as a result
natural regeneration is severely affected and species diversity is decreasing.
Tropical Thorn Forests
Distributed in the lower altitudes in the Shivaliks (lower Montane zone – up to 1,000
m).Essentially a sub-set of the tropical dry deciduous forests, but classified separately due to
distinct species composition.
Characteristically trees are missing but some thorny bushes takes shapes of small to medium-
sized trees. Main species are Zizyphus, Carissa, Balenitis & Acacia leucophloea. This forest
type has also witnessed large-scale degradation,primarily from change in the land-use pattern,
as many peopleconsidered such vegetation composition as low productivity wastelands.
Sub-Tropical Pine Forests
Distributed in the mid altitudes (middle Montane zone – between 1,000 to 1,800 m).
291
11
Pine is the main species and large tracts of good quality pine forests can be seen as
monoculture stands. Usually, species diversity is less due to pure pine formations. Main
species observed include Chir, Alder, Willow, Robinia, Blue Pine, Toon, Wild Apricot &
Celtis. Uncontrolled and man-made (including accidental) fires are a major hazard for such
forest types.
These forests have relatively maintained their species composition, and are less disturbed
compared to the deciduous forests of the lower altitudes although in some areas exotic
weeds have proliferated, especially after landslides.
Sub-Tropical Dry Ever Green Forests

Distributed in the mid altitudes (middle Montane zone – between 1,000 to 2,000 m). Patchy
and small distribution area with in the mid hills. Main species found are Kachnar, Poplar,
Willow, Ohi, Robinia, Drek, Kail, Chil, Toon, Behmi, Chulli, Vitex, Lolium, Dactylis
&Phleum.
Despite unevenly distributed rainfall pattern, the forest maintains its green cover throughout
the year.
Strip plantations along road: Most of the road length is lined with plantation of avenue
trees, which are designated as protected forests.
Eucalyptus sp and Populus deltoids planted in a single row form the major avenue plantation
along the road. Being about 50 years old, these are perceived as threat to life and property by
the local people, as at many places, these have already fallen due to rot and heavy winds. As
far as biodiversity issues are concerned, both these species are ‘exotic’ and do not make part
of the native biodiversity, or support any significant undergrowth.
Native species that are planted as avenue include Mangifera indica, Terminalia arjuna,
Bombax ceiba, Albizzia procera, Ficus religiosa, Ficus benghalensis, Morus alba, Dalbergia
sissoo, Syzygium cumini and Acacia nilotica. Most of these good canopy trees provide good
shelter and nesting places to the avifauna and other arboreal animals. Fungal infestations have
killed many Dalbergia sissoo and Acacia nilotica trees and many are showing signs of
progressive dying.
Generally along the road side the herbaceous flora is poor and chiefly comprises of common
weedy species, such as, Sida acuta, Achyranthes aspera, Barleria cristata, Dicliptera sp,
Xanthium strumarium, Solanum nigrum, Solanum surattense, Boerhavia diffusa, etc.
292
12
Miscellaneous scrub forest: The road at some places touches the Shivaliks passing through
undulating terrain bearing miscellaneous scrub forest vegetation. Species composition
comprises mainly of Acacia catechu, Dendrocalamus strictus, Mallotus philippinensis,
Zizyphus nummularia, Murraya koenigii, Dodonea viscosa, Anogeissus pendula, Cordia
dichotoma, Bombax ceiba, Cryptolepis buchanani, Riccinus communis, Cynadon dactylon,
Vitiveria zizynioides, Rumex sp, Cannabis sativa, Jasminum sp, Lantana camara, Parthenium
hysterophorus etc. These miscellaneous scrubs are good habitat for Blue Bull, Barking Deer,
Wild Boar, Porcupine, Jackal and Leopard.
Agriculture Fields: The area supports good agriculture with most of the area cultivated
under two-crop system alternating between ‘rabi’ and ‘kharif’ crops. Mustard, Wheat, Maize,
Sugarcane and Rice7 are major crops along the roads. Important tree species grown as
traditional agro-forestry practices include Morus alba, Dalbergia sissoo, Acacia nilotica,
Terminalia bellirica, Celtis australis, Mangifera indica, Albizzia lebbek and Syzygium
cuminii. These occasionally provide a continuum of tree line from the road end to the
miscellaneous scrub tracts in the adjoining areas and as such provide shelter and nesting
places to the avifauna and arboreal animals.
Consolidated Table of Floral Diversity in the Core 1,2,3,4 and 10 radius km Buffer 1,2,3,4
1-Cement Plant, 2- Kashlog Lease, 3-Pati Lease, 4-Mangu Lease
No. Scientific Name Local/Common Family Core + Buffer +
Name
1 Acacia nilotica Kikar, Babool Fabaceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
2 Acacia catechu Khair, Khadira Fabaceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
3 Acacia leucophloea Safed Kikkar Fabaceae - 2,3,4
4 Aegle marmelos Bael, Sirphal Rutaceae - 2,3,4
5 Albizzia lebbek Siris Fabaceae 3 1,2,3,4
6 Aconitum heterophyllum - Ranunculaceae 3,4 3,4
7 Ajuga parviflora Bugle Weed Lamiaceae 2,3 2,3,4
8 Albizzia procera Doon Siris Fabaceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
9 Albizzia odarattissima Kaala Siris Fabaceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
10 Adathoda vasica Arusha Acanthaceae 2,3,4 1,2,3,4
11 Anogeissus pendula Kardhai, Dhok Combretaceae 4 2,3,4
293
13
12 Anogeissus latifolia Dhaora Combretaceae 3,4 2,3
13 Ageratum conyzoides Sahdevi Asteraceae 2,3,4 1,2,3,4
14 Agave americana Gwarpatha Agavaceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
15 Aerva sanguinolenta - Amaranthaceae 3 1,3,4
16 Achyranthus aspera Latjira, Chirchira Amaranthaceae 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
17 Arundinaria falcata Nirgal Poaceae 3,4 2,4
18 Ailanthus excelsa Ardu, Mahanim Simaroubaceae 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
19 Angelica glauca Choruk,Kusum Payal Umbelliferae 3,4 1,4
20 Artimisia roxburghanai - Asteraceae 3,4 2,3
21 Asparagus racemosus Shatamul Asparagaceae 2,3,4 2,3
22 Bauhinia variegata Kachnar Fabaceae 3 1,2,3,4
23 Bauhinia vahlii Mahul, Jallour Fabaceae 2,3,4 2,3,4
24 Berberis lyceum Darhaldi, Chatrol Berberidaceae 3 3,4
25 Berberis aristata Chitra Berberidaceae 3 3,4
26 Barleria cariatata Vajradanti Acanthaceae 2,3,4, 3,4
27 Bombax ceiba Semal Malvaceae 4 3,4
28 Boerhavia diffusa Punarnava, Satha Nyctaginaceae 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
29 Butea monosperma Palah, Dhak Fabaceae 3,4 2,3,4
30 Carissa carandus Karonda Apocynaceae 2,3,4 1,2,3,4
31 Cannabis sativa Bhaang Cannabaceae 1,2,3 1,2,3
32 Celtis australis Khark, Khirk Ulmaceae 3,4 2,3,4
33 Cassia fistula Amaltaas Fabaceae 3,4 1,2
34 Cordia dichotoma Lasoda Boraginaceae 3 1,2,4
35 Cryptolepis buchanani Nagbel Asclepidiaceae 3,4 2,3,4
36 Cuscuta reflexa Amarbel Convolvulaceae 2,3,4 2,3,4
37 Clematis gauriana Belkum Churanhar Ranunculaceae 3,4 2,3
38 Cissampelos pareira Bhatvel, Padh Menispermaceae 3,4 2,3,4
39 Cotoneaster bacillaris - Rosaceae 3 1,2,3,4
40 Cynadon dactylon Durva Poaceae 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
294
14
41 Chaerophyllum villosum Khelti Apiaceae 2,3,4 2,3,4
42 Cedrus deodara Devdar Pinaceae - 3,4
43 Dalbergia sissoo Shisum Fabaceaea 3,4 1,2,3,4
44 Dicliptera bupleuroides - Acanthaceae 3,4 1,2
45 Dendrocalamus strictus Baans Poaceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
46 Dendrocalamus hamiltonii Baans Poaceae 4 2,3,4
47 Dodonea viscose Vilayati Mehendi Sapindaceae 4 1,2
48 Datura stramonium Dhatura Solanaceae 2,3,4 2,3,4
49 Dioscorea sp Shingli-Mingli Dioscoreaceae 3,4 1,3,4
50 Daphne cannabina Setburwa Thymelaeaceae 3,4 1,2
51 Dactylorhiza hatageria - Orchidaceaea 3,4 2,3
52 Debregeasia sp. Ajlai Urticaceae 3,4 2,3,4
53 Dipsachs inerimis Phulee Dispacaceae 3,4 2,3
54 Elaeagnus umbellate Gehain Elaeagnaceae 3,4 2,3,4
55 Erythrina indica Pangar Fabaceae 3,4 1,2
56 Ehretia laevis Chamror Boraginaceae 3 2,3
57 Eupatorium adenophorum Kali Basauti Compositae 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
58 Eucalyptus tereticornis Safeda Myrtaceae 4 1,2,4
59 Euphorbia royleana Chhun, Danda Thor Euphorbiaceae 2,3,4 1,2,3,4
60 Ficus religiosa Peepal Moraceae 3 1,3,4
61 Fimbristylis dichotoma - Cyperaceae 3 1,3,4
62 Fragaria vesca Alpine Strawberry Rosaceae 3,4 1,2,4
63 Ficus benghalensis Bargad Moraceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
64 Ficus palmate Daghla Anjeer Moraceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
65 Flacourtia ramontchi Bilangra, Kancu Flacourtiaceae 4 1,2,3,4
66 Ficus rumphii Paras Papal Moraceae 4 1,2,3,4
67 Grewia optiva Behel, Bewal Tiliaceae 3,4 2,3,4
68 Grewia oppositifolia Behul Tiliaceae 4 1,2,3
295
15
69 Hymenodictyon excelsum Bhurkur Rubiaceae 3,4 1,2,3
70 Hedera helix Lablab Araliaceae 3 1,2
71 Holarhenna antidysentrica Kutaj, Kurchi Apocynaceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
72 Jasminum dispermum Chameli Oleaceae 3,4 2,3,4
73 Jurinea macrocephala Dhoop Asteraceae 3,4 2,3,4
74 Lantana camara Raimunia Verbenaceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
75 Lannea grandis Kimul Anacardiaceae 4 1,2
76 Lonicera quinquelocularis Phut Caprifoliaceae 3 2,3
77 Loranthus longiflorus - Loranthaceae 3 3,4
78 Litsea chinensis Medh Lakdi Loraceae 3,4 3,4
79 Myrsine Africana - Myrsinaceae 3 2,3
80 Murraya koenigii Kadhi Patta Rutaceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
81 Morus alba Shahtut Moraceae 3 2,3,4
82 Mallotus philippinensis Kamopillaka Euphorbiaceae 4 1,2
83 Malva parviflora - Malvaceae 4 1,3,4
84 Phoenix sylvestris Khajroo Palmae 3,4 1,3,4
85 Mangifera indica Aam Anacardiaceae 4 1,3,4
86 Nyctanthes arbor-tristis Harsingar Oleaceae 4 2,3,4
87 Ougenia dalbergioides Sandan Fabaceae 3 2,3
88 Oroxylum indicum Shyonaka Bignoniaceae 3 1,2
89 Polygonatum sp Khinraoula Liliaceae 3,4 1,2,3
90 Prunus cornuta - Rosaceae 4 1,2
91 Populus ciliate Himalayan Poplar Salicaceae 3 1,3,4
92 Pinus wallichiana Blue Pine Pinaceae - 3,4
93 Prinsepia utilis Bhikal Rosaceae 3,4 2,3,4
94 Phyllanthus emblica Aamla Phyllanthaceae 3,4 2,3,4
95 Puereria tuberosa Sural, Bharda Fabaceae 3 1,2,3
296
16
96 Pinus roxburghii Chir Pinaceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
97 Parthenium hysterophorus Gajar Ghas Asteraceae 1,2,34 1,2,3,4
98 Pongamia pinnata Karanj Fabaceae - 1,3,4
99 Prosopis juliflora Vilayati Kikkar Fabaceae 3,4 1,2
100 Punica granatum Daroo Punicaceae 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
101 Rosa moschata Janglee Gulab Rosaceae 2,3,4 1,2,3,4
102 Randia dumentorum Mayin Rubiaceae 4 2,3
103 Rubus ellipticus - Rosaceae 2,3,4 1,2,3,4
104 Randia dumetorum Tivr Gandhi Rubiaceae 2,3,4 1,2,3
105 Riccinus communis Arandi Euphorbiaceae 3,4 1,2
106 Rumex sp. - Polygonaceae 4 2,3
107 Sapium insignae Khinna Euphorbiaceae 3 2,3,4
108 Sida acuta Bala Malvaceae 2,3,4 1,2,3,4
109 Salix tetrasperma Malatiki Salicaceae 3,4 1,2
110 Syzygium cumini Jamun Myrtaceae 3,4 1,3,4
111 Solanum surattense Kanthikari Solanaceae 2,3,4 1,2,3,4
112 Solanum nigrum Makoi Solanaceae 2,3,4 1,2,3,4
113 Sonchus arvensi - Asteraceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
114 Tinospora cordifolia Guduchi Menispermaceae 4 1,3,4
115 Terminalia arjuna Arjun Combretaceae 3 1,2,3,4
116 Terminalia bellirica Aaksh Combretaceae 3 1,2,3,4
117 Terminalia chebula Haritki Combretaceae 3 1,2,3,4
118 Toona ciliata Toon Meliaceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
119 Taraxacum officinale - Asteraceae 3,4 1,3,4
120 Urena lobata - Malvaceae 3 2,3
121 Vitiveria zizynioides Khas Ghas Poaceae 3,4 2,3,4
122 Viburnum grandiflora - Adoxaceae 4 3,4
297
17
123 Vitex negundo Nirgundi Verbenaceae 2,3,4 1,2,3,4
124 Vitis himalayana Phlankur Vitaceae 3,4 2,4
125 Woodfordia floribunda Dhataki Lythraceae 3,4 1,2,3,4
126 Quercus dilatata Moru Oak Fagaceae - 1,3,4
127 Wrightia tomentosa Dudhi Apocynaceae - 1,3,4
Inventory based on primary & secondary data collected and collated by Dr. Manoj R. Borkar (2012)
FLORAL DIVERSITY OF THE BUFFER ZONES
9 10
11 12
9. Bauhinia vahili 10. Grewia optiva

11. Rubus ellipticus 12. Acacia catechu
298
18
25 26
27 28
29 30
31 32
25. Solanum surattense 26. Citron medica

27. Carissa carandas 28. Euphorbia royleana
29. Cannabis sativa 30. Jatropha curcas
31. Ailanthus excelsa 32. Dendrocalamus strictus
299
19
Consolidated Table of Faunal Diversity (Fishes, Amphibians, Reptiles, Birds and Mammals) in
the Core 1,2,3,4 and 10 radius km Buffer 1,2,3,4
1-Cement Plant, 2- Kashlog Lease, 3-Pati Lease, 4-Mangu Lease
No.
Local/Common Name Scientific Name WPA Status Core + Buffer +
Bhaori Mastacembelus armatus - 2 1,2,3,4
Puthi Puntius ticto - 2 1,2,3,4
Puthi Puntius waageni - 2 1,2,3
Shish Machhi Chanda ranga - 2 1,4
Chahal Brachydanio rerio - 2 2,3,4
Bhareli Barilius bendelisis - 2 3,4
Gara Machhli Garra Gotyla - 3,4 2,3,4
Dheridhok Channa gachua - 2 2,3,4
Patukari Danio devario - 2 2,3,4
Toad Bufo melanostictus - 1,2,3,4 1,3,4
Toad Bufo stomaticus - 1,2 2,3,4
Common Tree Frog Polypedates maculatus - 2,3,4 1,2,3,4
Indian Bull frog Rana tigerina IV 2,3,4 2,3,4
Skittering Frog Euphlyctis cyanophlyctis - 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
Garden Lizard Calotes versicolor - 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
House Gecko Hemidactylus flavivirdis - 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
Kashmir Agama Agama tuberculata - 3,4 1,2
Cobra Naja naja II 3,4 3,4
Common Krait Bungarus caeruleus - 3,4 2,3,4
Himalayan Trinket Orthriophis hodsoni - 3,4 3,4
Rock Python Ptyas mucosa I 4 1,3,4
Indian Softshell Turtle Lyssemys punctata I - 4
Ashy-throated Warbler Phylloscopus maculipennis IV 2 2,3,4
Asian Paradise Flycatcher Terpsiphone paradisi IV 1,4 1,4
Ashy Drongo Dicrurus leucophaeus IV 3 3
300
20
Jungle Myna Acridotheres fuscus IV 2,3 1,2,3
Brahminy Starling Sturnus pagodarum IV 1 1
Barn Owl Tyto alba IV 1 1,2,3,
Blue- throated Barbet Megalaima asiatica IV 2,3,4 2,3,4
Blue headed Rock Thrush Monticola cinclorhyncus IV 1,2 1,2
Blue Whistling Thrush Myiophonus caeruleus IV 1 1
Black Drongo Dicrurus macrocercus IV 1,2 1,2
Black Kite Milvus migrans I 3 2,3
Black Francolin Francolinus francolinus IV 3,4 1,2,3,4
Black -shouldered Kite Elanus caeruleus I 3 3
Blossom- headed Parakeet Psittacula cyanocephala IV 3,4 3
Bay- backed Shrike Lanius vittatus - 2,3 2,3
Yellow- crowned Woodpecker Dendrocopos mahrattensis IV 3,4 2,3,4
Cattle Egret Bubulcus ibis IV 1,2,3 1,2,3,4
Chestnut-headed Bee-eater Merops leschenaultii - 1,2 2,3
Cheer Pheasant Catreus wallichi I - 3,4
Chukar Alectoris chukar - - 2
Common Iora Aegithina tiphia IV 3,4 2,3,4
Common Myna Acridotheres tristis IV 1,2 1,2
Common Tailor Bird Orthotomus sutorius IV 2,3 2,3,4
Coppersmith Barbet Megalima haemacephala IV - 3,4
Egyptian Vulture Neophron percnopterus I - 2
Eurasian Griffon. Gyps fulvus I - 2
Emerald Dove Chalcophaps inidca IV - 2
Eurasian Marsh Harrier Circus aeruginosa I - 2,3
Flame-backed Woodpecker Ocyceros birostris IV - 2,3,4
Great Tit Parus major IV 2,3 1,2,3,4
Great Barbet Megalaima virens IV 2 2,3,4
Grey Heron Ardea cinerea IV - 1,2
301
21
Grey-capped Pigmy Dendrocopos canicapillus IV - 2,3,4

Woodpecker
Graceful Prinia Prinia gracilis IV - 2,3
Indian Peafowl Pavo cristatus I - 2,3,4
Hill Partridge Arborophila torqueola IV - 4
Hoopoe Upupa epops - - 2,3
House Crow Corvus splendens V - 1,2,3
House Sparrow Passer domesticus IV 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
Himalayan Bulbul Pycnonotus leucogenys IV 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
Indian Pond Heron Ardeola grayi IV 2,3 1,2,3
Indian White backed Vulture Gyps bengalensis I - 2
Indian Grey Hornbill Ocyceros birostris I 2 2
Indian Spotted Dove Streptopelia chinensis IV 1,2,3 1,2,3
Indian Robin Saxicoloides fulicata IV 1,2,3,4 1,2,3
Indian Roller Coraciasbenghalensis IV - 2
Indian Tree Pie Dendrocitta vagabunda IV - 1
Jungle Babbler Turdoides striatus IV - 2,3,4
Khaleej Pheasant Pucrasia macrolopha IV - 2,3,4
Koklass Pheasant Pucrasia macrolopha IV - 2
Koel Centropus bengalensis IV 1,2 2,3,4
Large-billed Crow Corvus macrorhynchus IV 2,3,4 2,3,4
Little Blue Kingfisher Alcedo atthis IV 2,3 2,3
Little Egret Egretta garzetta IV 2 2,3
Himalayan Monal Lophophorus impejanus I - 2
Oriental Magpie Robin Copsychus saularis IV 2,3 2,3
Oriental White Eye Zosterops palpebrosus IV 2, 3, 4 2,3,4
Plum-Headed Parakeet Psittacula cyanocephala IV 2,3 2,3
Pied Flycatcher Shrike Hemipus picatus IV 2 1,2,3
302
22
Pied Bush Chat Saxicola caprata IV 2 2,3
Pied Tit Parus nuchalis IV 3,4 3,4
Paradise Flycatcher Terpsiphone paradisi IV 1 1,2
Pariah Kite Milvus migrans I 2 2,3
Pied Kingfisher Ceryle ruddis IV 2 1,2
Pond Heron Ardeola grayii IV 2 1,2
Purple Sunbird Nectarinia asiatica IV 2,3,4 2,3,4
Red Collared Dove Streptopelia tranquebarica IV 2,3 1,2,3
Rufous backed Shrike Lanius schach IV - 2,3
Rose Ringed Parakeet Psittacula krameri IV - 2,3
Red-whiskered Bulbul Pycnonotus jocosus IV - 1,2,3
Red Jungle Fowl Gallus gallus IV - 2,3
Red- vented Bulbul Pycnonotus cafer IV 3 2,3,4
Red- wattled Lapwing Vanellus indicus IV 2 2,3
Rock Pigeon Columba livia - 1,2 1,2,3,4
Small Bee Eater Merops orientalis - 3 2,3
Sirkeer Malkoha Phaenicophaeus leschenaultia IV - 3,4
Striated Babbler Turdoides earlei IV - 2,3
Slaty- headed Parakeet Psittacula himalayensis IV - 2,3,4
Spotted Dove Streptopelia chinensis IV 3,4 3,4
Spotted Owlet Athene brama IV - 3,4
Speckled Piculet Picumnus innominatus IV - 2,3,4
Brown–capped Pigmy Dendrocopus nanus IV - 2,3,4

Woodpecker
Verditer Flycatcher Eumyias thalassina IV - 2,3,4
White-eared Bulbul Pycnonotus leucotis IV 2,3,4 2,3,4
White tailed Stone chat Saxicola leucura IV - 2,3,4
Grey Wagtail Motacilla cineria IV - 2,3
White browed Fantailed Rhipidura aureola IV - 3,4

Flycatcher
303
23
White-throated Kingfisher Halcyon smyrnensis IV - 2,3
White Wagtail Motacilla alba IV - 2,3,4
Yellow-beaked Blue Magpie Cissa flaviostris IV - 1,2,3,4
Asiatic Black Bear Ursus thibetanus II - 3,4
5-Stripped Palm Squirrel Funambulus pennati IV 1,2 2,3,4
Goral Nemorhaedus goral III - 2
Hanuman Langur Semnopithecus entellus II 1 1,2,3
Rhesus Macaque Macaca mulata II 1,2 1,2,3,4
Indian Hare Lepus sp. II - 1,2,3,4
Indian Muntjac Muntiacus muntjak III - 2,3
Leopard Panthera pardus I - 2
Porcupine Hystrix indica IV - 2,3
Swamp Deer Cervus duvauceli I - 2
Wild Boar Sus scrofa III - 2,3
Jungle cat Felis chaus II - 2,3,4
Inventory based on primary & secondary data. Bird IWPA, 1972 status as per ‘A BNHS review of the avifaunal list
of the Wildlife Protection Act, 1972’ Published in Buceros Vol. 7, No. 3 (2002)
304
24
FAUNAL DIVERSITY OF THE BUFFER ZONES

Photographs Copyrighted©2012. Photos by Dr Manoj R. Borkar
41 42
43 44
45 46
47 48
41.Rhesus Monkey 42. Silverline Butterfly

43.Five striped Squirrel 44. Jungle Myna
45.Blue-headed Rock Thrush 46. Dragonfly
47.Brahminy Starling 48. Kashmir Agama
305
25
AVIFAUNAL DIVERSITY Photographs Copyrighted © Dr Manoj R. Borkar, 2012
49 50
51 52
53 54
55 56
49.Himalayan Bulbul 50. Verditer Flycatcher

51. Great Barbet 52. House Sparrow.
53.Spotted dove 54 Yellow-billed Blue Magpie
55. Indian Grey Hornbill 56. Black Francolin
306
26
AVIFAUNAL DIVERSITY Photographs copyrighted© Dr Manoj R. Borkar, 2012
1. 58
59 60
61 62
1. 64
57.Kalij Pheasant 58. Plum-headed Parakeet

59. Red vented Bulbul 60. Slaty-headed Himalayan Parakeet
61. Indian Robin (Female) 62. Great Tit
63. Blue –throated Barbet 64. Large-billed Crow
307
27
Environmental Setting
Biodiversity is intrinsically linked to, influenced and sustained by environment. The

biodiversity endowment of a given place is a combined influence of abiotic factors such as
temperature, humidity, and rainfall; besides components of the physical environment like soil
that determine the composition of species within plant communities. The floral diversity in
turn, affects occupancy by and movement of faunal species. Consequently, it is important to
take a cursory look at the environmental setting; particularly of the areas in which the project
is proposed and its ‘zones of influence’, as the severity of the impact is also a function of the
environmental settings.
Himachal Pradesh is a mountainous state in northern India known for its forests, rivers, and
valleys, a rich cultural heritage. The Outer and lesser Himalayan watersheds of the state
covering 28,970 sq km area are of great national importance for water and electricity
produced by run-off from this region. Himachal Pradesh extends from the Shivalik Hills in
the south to the Great Himalayan ranges including a slice of trans-Himalayas in the north.
Thus the vegetation varies distribution and diversity. The state falls between latitude 30’22”
and 30’12” North and longitude 75’45” and 79’04” East. It is located between the Ravi River
in the west and Yamuna River in the east. Its greatest length is 355 Km from the north-
western extremity of Chamba to the Southeastern tip of Kinnaur and the maximum width is
270 Km from Kangra in Southwest to Kinnaur in the northeast. The altitude ranges from 450
to 6500 meters above sea level, which increases from West to East and South to North.
The state experiences extreme climate ranging from hot summer to cold winters, as a result of
differences in terrain aspect and elevation. Areas towards north and located just below the
high altitude zone, receives adequate snowfall and often remain snow covered for months
together.
The various climatic zone range from sub tropical (450-900 meter), warm temperate (900-
800 m), Cool temperate (1800-2400 m), cold high mountains (2400-4000 m) and snowy and
frigid (above 4000 m). Areas in the Shivaliks, for example, regions in Solan districts are
warmer with mean maximum temperature reaching up to 38º C. Shimla, the state capital,
located in the mid hills also get occasional snowfall and the average minimum temperature is
around 4.9º C.
308
28
The average rainfall for the state is about 115 cm, however, 70% of this falls during monsoon
(June-September), 20% from October to March and 10% from April to June. District Kangra
followed by Shimla receives maximum rainfall. Dharamsala in Kangra gets highest rainfall
(rainfall over 3400 mm). Some rains are received during winters as well. The annual rainfall
in the outer Himalayas varies from 150 to 175 cm, while the inner Himalayas receives about
75 to 100 cm. Beyond Manali, towards Lahaul-Spiti
A tributary of River Sutluj meanders through the buffer zone in the proximity of the Majathal
PA. Sutluj itself is a tributary of River Indus. The physical set-up of the site is a mix of
Lower Himalayas and Shivalik character.
Biodiversity Spectrum
The variation in altitudes, pro-biotic environmental matrix and discrete climatic regimes has
cumulatively endowed the state with a rich biodiversity. It is, therefore, essential to
understand the qualitative and quantitative attributes of the biodiversity
Floral diversity
Out of total 45,000 to 47,000 floral species found in the country, as many as 3,295 species
(7.32%)2 are found in HP. Himachal has 3,120 species of flowering plants, 38 species of
orchids, 13 species of conifers and 124 species of pteridophytes (including ferns). The
floristic elements also show high degrees of endemism with almost 95% of the species being
native of Western Himalayan flora, while about 5% (150 species) are exotic, introduced over
the last 150 years. The introduction of exotics has disturbed the natural composition of many
plant communities and is a cause of concern. In fact HP has 12 critically endangered, 21
endangered and 27 vulnerable plant species (Annex 1).
While the Shivaliks once harboured diverse species, presently, these are in various stages of
degradation. There are only a few natural patches that still have the natural species
composition comprising of native species. Most other plant communities have been disturbed
on account of habitat loss, degradation, soil erosion and biological invasions.
The Mehatpur-Una-Amb road passes through many such degraded forest patches. However,
the Una-Barsar-Jahu-Nerchowk road passes through a few forest patches that show high
degree of native species compositions. At higher elevations (mid hills), particularly at the
transition zone between the Shivaliks and the mid hills, the arboreal element is dominated by
Pinus longifolia. In the middle hills, when elevation further increases, Pinus longifolia is
replaced by Cedrus deodara (above 6,000 – 7,000 feet). Other shrubby plants in this zone are
309
29
Cotoneaster racimiflora, Daphne oleoides, Desmodium tiliaefolium, Indigofera heterantha,

Parrotiopsis jacquemontii, etc. The ground vegetation is dominated by grasses like Agrostis
stolonifera, Andropogon tristis, Chrysopogon echinulatus and Dichanthium annulatum.
Common trees are Quercus incana and Rhododendron sp. The Theog-Rohru road passes
through some forest patches with such a composition, especially near Khara Pathar and
Jubbal areas.
The mid hills abound in conifers, as they start appearing just above the Shivaliks. Barring a
few, most conifers are present in mid hills. The conifers of HP are ecologically very
important covering a large area of the temperate and sub-alpine zones. There are thirteen
species of conifers in HP - 1. Pinus wallichina, 2. Pinus roxburgii, 3. Pinus gerardiana, 4.
Picea smithiana, 5. Abies pindrow, 6. Abies spectablis, 7. Cupressus torulosa, 8. Cedrus
deodara, 9. Juniperus macropoda, 10 Juniperus excelsa, 11Juiperus Sequamata, 12 Ephedra
Gerardiana and 13.Taxus baccata
In order to protect these species from large-scale commercial felling there is a Greenfelling
ban imposed in the state. This has been implemented, as these species have a large turnover
cycle (100 or more years), poor germination percentages, poor seedling recruitment and slow
growth rates. Among these 13 species, Cedrus deodara or commonly known as Deodar is one
of the finest timber species, which fetches a very good price.
Faunal diversity
Himachal has its unique share of fauna diversity representing all the major taxa due to wide
altitudinal ranges and varied topography, making the state a very rich repository of wild
fauna. Though mammals are sighted with some difficulty beyond seasons , the bird diversity
of he region is impressive . From dry deciduous to luxuriant temperate forests to alpine scrub,
the state has free ranging animals in all the climatic zones. The cold temperate regions of the
state form natural habitat of Musk Deer, Himalayan Tahr, Brown Bear, Black Bear, Monal,
Chir Pheasant, Koklas and Western Tragopan. The lower reaches of the state abound with
Sambhar Deer, Barking Deer, Wild Boar, Ghoral, Blue Bull, Rhesus Macaque, Hanuman
Langur, Martens, Jungle Cat, and Leopard amongst mammals and pheasants including Cheer
and White Crested Kaleej besides Red Jungle Fowl and Pea Fowl.
While the core revealed little faunal diversity, the buffer zone specially in precincts and
ambience of the Darlaghat and Majathal wildlife sanctuaries abound in faunal taxa. The
Ghoral, Black Bear, Barahsingha and Leoprad are reported from these areas, besides a rich
310
30
avifaunal diversity. During this reconnaissance survey, in a small village within the Majathal
sanctuary, White-backed Vultures (Gyps bengalensis ) were seen scavenging on a carcass of
cow; reportedly predated by a Leopard. Interestingly, the White-backed Vulture was also
accompanied by on solitary individual of Egyptian Vulture (Neophron percnopterus).The
locals vouched for presence and regular movement of Leopard here. The Black Bear and
Wild Boar are the other 2 mammals that the agro-pastoralists here dread for their vermin
value. These are known to raid crops and destroy crops inflicting heavy losses to the farmer,
especially those that cultivate on a subsistence sale. Besides the raptors, the bird diversity of
the area include different species of Thrushes, Flycatchers, Woodpeckers, Partridges,
Barbets, Hornbills, Sun birds, Parakeets, Pheasants and Babblers.
Biodiversity Profile
The altitudinal variation, environmental setting and distinct climatic zones has endowed the
state with rich biodiversity, which includes all living forms (species diversity), their intra-
specific variation (genetic diversity) and places they are found (ecological diversity). It is,
therefore, essential how much biodiversity is present so as to develop mitigation strategies
and plans for its protection through limiting the negative project impacts.
Out of total 45,000 to 47,000 floral species found in the country, as many as 3,295species
(7.32%)2 are found in HP. Himachal has 3,120 species of flowering plants, 38 species of
orchids, 13 species of conifers and 124 species of pteridophytes (including ferns). The
floristic elements also show high degrees of endemism with almost 95% of the species being
native of Western Himalayan flora, while about 5% (150 species) are exotic, introduced over
the last 150 years. The introduction of exotics has disturbed the natural composition of many
plant communities and is a cause of concern. In fact HP has 12 critically endangered, 21
endangered and 27 vulnerable plant species (Annex 1).
The mammalian fauna includes Leopard (Panthera pardus), which is the top predator in the
food chain here. Asiatic Black Bear (Ursus thibetanus), Golden Jackal (Canis aureus),
Common Palm Civet (Paradoxurus hermaphrodites), Himalayan Palm Civet (Paguma
larvata), Yellow-throated Marten (Martes flavigula), and Jungle Cat (Felis chaus) are other
carnivores. Sambar (Cervus unicolor), Barking Deer (Muntiacus muntjak), Goral
(Nemorhaedus goral) represent the ungulates. Wild Boar (Sus scrofa) is also known to raid
crops.
311
31
Biodiversity and Wildlife endowments of Majathal Wildlife Sanctuary vis a

vis the threats and conservation concerns.
One of the major concerns and apprehension that merits discussion and focus in this proposal
is the 2 wildlife Protected Areas (Darlaghat/Piplughat and Majathal) in the proximity of the
leases and Plant, and the potential damage / harm the industrial activities may pose to the
habitat and wildlife therein. Of course, these rich wildlife habitats are within the zone of
influence of the mining operations and clinkerisation, but the extent of impact is a function of
several terrain related features and meteorological attributes of the region. The PP must
recognise that these are areas rich not only in general flora and fauna, but also offer habitat to
some of the regions highly valued wildlife; birds, ungulates and carnivores. After
denotification of a part of Darlaghat and the several human-engineered landscape changes,
this former contiguous habitat displays few telltale signs of wildlife presence and movements,
as compared to the relatively isolated, floristically diverse and secure Majathal WLS. The
Plant is positioned such, that it disallows easy negotiable passage/corridor for animal
movements between the PAs.
The Majathal Wildlife Sanctuary established in 1954, is also a designated Important Bird
Area (IBA Site Code: IN-HP-15) shared by the Solan and Shimla districts. Its coordinates are
31° 16' 08" N, 76° 59' 50" E. The area of 4,000 ha varies between altitudinal range of 575 -
1,985 m. The sanctuary is in the Himalayan bio-geographic zone and offers a Himalayan dry
temperate Forest habitat. The IBA criteria fulfilled by this area is A1 (Threatened Species)
and A2 (Endemic Bird area 128, Western Himalaya). Among the critically endangered birds
is the Oriental White-backed Vulture (Gyps bengalensis). About 14 individuals of this
species were sighted during this field surveillance, besides a single individual of the Egyptian
Vulture ( Neophron percnopterus ). The cliffs at heights obscured by canopy of trees provide
an excellent nesting site for these raptors. During this visit, cadaver of cow predated by
Leopard during the previous week as narrated by reliable witnesses was seen being
scavenged upon by a Oriental White-backed Vulture along with a Egyptian Vulture close to
human settlement within the sanctuary.
Though the surveillance team could not sight for themselves, the area is also known for
frequent sightings of the vulnerable Cheer Pheasant (Catreus wallichii) as the microhabitat
offered by this Pine forest is compatible with the requirement of this bird. The Sanctuary may
be one of the most important sites in Himachal Pradesh for Cheer pheasant Catreus wallichii,
312
32
and the only site present within the Sutlej catchment. Seven species of Galliformes have been
reported from this area.
Majathal Wildlife Sanctuary, located in Shimla and Solan districts, is part of the catchment
area of the Sutlej River. It is bounded to the north by the Sutlej, and to the south by a
mountain ridge. The Sanctuary comprises a short section of the southern slopes of the Sutlej
Valley, with steep terrain. This area is a known Goral foraging ground, however there has
been a retreat in the recent past due to large scale burning of forest. The pine needles and
other leaf litter accumulate and form a thick inflammable layer on the forest floor that gets
ignited by a recklessly thrown butt of cigarette or a lighted matchstick. Less often the fire is
triggered by natural causes such as sunlight focussed by dew drop etc. Pine trunks are
scorched and flames char the foliage interfering with vital functions of the trees that are at the
helm of the climax community.
Places of religious interest include the ‘Badu Bada Temple’ at Chakhad Sevda. The temple
work-force is reasonably familiar with wildlife and shared concerns over the habituation of
many ungulates to forage on leftover food in and around human settlements.
Though a proclaimed bird habitat, not much work has been done on the avifaunal diversity of
this montane site, covering tracts of Himalayan Sub-tropical forest. Barring the Cheer and the
Koklass Pheasants (Pucrasia macrolopha), and the Black francolin (Francolinus francolinus)
which can be easily heard and seen here, there are gaps in our understanding of avian
diversity of this place. In this IBA, the main biome is Sino-Himalayan Subtropical Forest
(Biome-8), which occurs between 1,000 to 2,000 m..
This IBA lies in the Western Himalayas Endemic Bird Area (EBA-128). As a detailed
checklist of this site is yet to be compiled, it is likely that there would be some more
Restricted Range species, especially small forest birds, than have been documented as of
now. More detailed work is needed on the bird fauna of this site. Presently, this site is
considered as a Data Deficient site.
The sanctuary has its own share of settlements and tribal hamlets along with their livestock.
Depredation of livestock by Leopard and Black Bear create resentment against the Sanctuary
among the villagers. The cat takes the cattle and goats and creates fear psychosis also
restricting the movement of people at dusk, dawn and night. The bear is a habitually raids
313
33
Besides the local people, Gaddi nomads also come during winter from the higher reaches to
graze their livestock, which exerts further pressure on the limited resources of the Sanctuary.
Graziers start forest fires to get better grass for livestock, in turn causing severe damage to
climax vegetation and allied microhabitats.
A temple is located in the Sanctuary which attracts thousands of pilgrims. The state
government has started a project to provide drinking water to 100 villages in the western part
of the Sanctuary.
Poaching is quite common with few weapon licence holders, and still many illegal poachers.
Ungulates and pheasants are their major targets, as they provide good meat for the table.
There are however no indications of organised hunting for trade.
The mammalian fauna includes Leopard (Panthera pardus), which is the top predator in the
food chain here. Asiatic Black Bear (Ursus thibetanus), Golden Jackal (Canis aureus),
Common Palm Civet (Paradoxurus hermaphrodites), Himalayan Palm Civet (Paguma
larvata), Yellow-throated Marten (Martes flavigula), and Jungle Cat (Felis chaus) are other
carnivores. Sambar (Cervus unicolor), Barking Deer (Muntiacus muntjak), Goral
(Nemorhaedus goral) and Wild Boar (Sus scrofa ) represent the ungulates.
Patches of cultivable plots within the sanctuary support agriculture, besides the fodder
grasses that grow here support grazing of livestock. Collection of timber and non-timber
forest produce is significant. There is no infrastructure such a signage’s, trekking maps, stay
facility, tourist guides etc. for organised adventure /wildlife /religious tourism due to lack of
investment by the state and other stakeholders from the private as well as the public sectors.
In fact the area is suitable for serious nature conservation and research efforts, by the state as
well national academia and research organisation.
314
34
Pressures on Majathal Wildlife Sanctuary
Photographs Copyrighted ©2012. Dr Manoj R. Borkar
Legends for photos from Top Left, row wise

1. Fodder collection 2. Fire-wood Collection by locals
3. Tapping Pine Gum latex 4. Installation of Microwave Towers on Mountains
5. Dry Pine Needles, Fire hazard 6. Lantana camara Invasion.
315
35
THREATS AND CONSERVATION ISSUES
On top of the list of pressures on this WPA are the human settlements that exist within the
precincts of the PA. A population of about 700 inhabitants are residing within teh limits of
this sanctuary along with their livestock. They have rights to cultivate, graze livestock, and
collect fodder, timber, fuel-wood and minor forest produce. Their dependence on the forest
for various reasons creates a human-wildlife interface and conflict situations as well. The
hostility of the locals towards wildlife due to perceived economic losses is a matter of
concern and intervention. There is an urgent need for intelligence related to subsistence
poaching and education on importance and values of wildlife. Gaps in information on various
taxa with precarious conservation status can be addressed by engaging the academia and
researchers from the public and private institutions of higher education in the state. The FAE
has liaisoned with the High Altitude Station of the Zoological Survey of India and sought
their expertise and partnership in addressing crucial gaps in our understanding of range and
the status of various taxa of wildlife interest.
The peak of this mountain range having the Badu Bada temple is a site visited by devotees
from near and far. In absence of a proper road/path, the pilgrims have to negotiate the
mountainous terrain through thick vegetation to reach the temple. This is a disturbance to the
wildlife and can deter some faunal elements to abandon the areas and seek alternative habitat.
Conversely, the pilgrims litter the sanctuary with a lot of non-degradable and often
inflammable wastes that is scavenged upon by the animals predisposing them to health risks.
Increasing encounters with human beings can also lead to loss of wild instincts and tame the
game. There are no avenues at present for educating the pilgrims on Do’s and Don’ts in the
area. Casual visitors and tourists can also be deterrents to wildlife by their irresponsible
conduct. Of course a major threat is the vulnerability of this ecosystem to forest fires. As has
been discussed earlier, intelligence gathering and surveillance for poaching is necessary
owing to the rugged terrain that is difficult to monitor.
316
36
Analysis of perceived direct and indirect impacts

The proposed activity shall be deemed to have a direct impact if it destroys, displaces or in
some way adversely affects the plants and animals themselves. Altering or disrupting
patterns, life and ecological processes or behaviour leading to alterations in habitats,
ecosystems or other physical or biological factors upon which a species depends shall also be
considered in this category. Often the Cement and Mining sectors and their core and
associated subsidiary operations lead to habitat loss, habitat fragmentation, wildlife corridor
restrictions, and increased animal mortality due to collision with vehicular traffic. Fugitive
emissions can also impact water bodies in the zone of influence, by making waters turbid and
impacting the productivity. This may eventually trigger a successional change and change in
aquatic species composition.
In the present case, the proximity of the Cement Plant and the 3 mine leases to the 2 wildlife
sanctuaries namely Majathal and Darlaghat (Piplughat) makes a case for careful evaluation of
the possible habitat degradation resulting from anthropogenic pressures and increased human
access to wildlife habitats. Habitat degradation due to altered hydrology, ecological
disequilibrium, ecosystem simplification by monoculture happening in the guise of Green
Belt Development are other possible fallouts. The area is already infested with invasives such
as Parthenium and Lantana that pose a threat to the community patterns and processes. Also,
significant is the threat perception of disease transmission between domestic cattle and
wildlife.
Identifying discretely, assessing precisely and integrating pragmatically the forests and
wildlife concerns into project planning at an early stage can minimise and in certain cases
completely eliminate the adverse impacts on biodiversity, wildlife and their habitats; as
improper practices could often result in irreversible adverse impacts leading to local
extinctions of species. These concerns assume significance if the area is already conservation
concerns. Keeping concerns in the preceding discussion in mind and to minimize any of the
direct and indirect impact of mining and enhanced Clinkerisation on biodiversity, a rapid
Biodiversity Impact Assessment was undertaken with the following objectives:
1. To assess the species diversity of flora and fauna in the core and buffer of Plant and
the unbroken mine leases with special reference to endemic species and those with
precarious conservation status and future.
2. Identify the likely impacts if any that the project can have on forest, wildlife
sanctuaries and the species therein.
317
37
3. To sensitise the Project Proponent and other relevant stakeholders to the habitat value
of the forests here and strategise the planning accordingly.
4. To suggest mitigation measures, warranted if any to balance the proposed industrial
activity with the long term conservation of biodiversity and integrity of wildlife
habitats.
Reconnaissance Survey
Reconnaissance survey of the proposed clinker expansion at the cement plant site and mining
leases at Kashlog, Mangu and Pati were conducted by travelling along the Transect line,
recording the major habitat types, recording the vegetation composition and wildlife
diversity, particularly, occurrence of any red-listed plant or animal species along the corridor.
Field survey of the critical wildlife habitats specially at Majathal and Darlaghat (Piplughat)
wildlife sanctuaries and the adjoining montane forest predominated by Pine. A special
attention was given to recording and assessing the Avifauna here. Assessment of the wildlife
and floral status was made through a stratified sampling design. This was necessitated due to
the short working period and the time of the year when most of the broad-leaved trees, shrubs
and herbaceous flora was without leaves. Line transects were laid along the road corridors
and floral diversity recorded in randomly laid Quadrats (25m x 4 m) along these line
transacts. The herbaceous flora was recorded in sub-quadrats (5m x 2m) laid at the beginning
and the end of the main quadrat. Field data was recorded in specially designed formats.
Information related to occurrence of any specific habitat, key-stone species and signs of
wildlife, etc. was also recorded during these surveys.
Also, noteworthy in this regard is that denotification of a significant part of the erstwhile
Darlaghat WLS was allowed earlier by the Union Ministry of Environment and Forests
(MoEF) on the condition that a new sanctuary would be set up in the state and an area of 20
sq. km will be added to the Majathal WLS as a compensatory effort at ensuring integrity of
habitat of wildlife such as Indian White–backed Vulture (Gyps bengahlensis),Cheer
Pheasants (Catreus wallichii ), Red jungle fowl (Gallus gallus), Khaleej Pheasant (Lophura
leucomelanos) , Black Francolin (Francolin francolin), Asiatic Black bear (Ursus
thibetanus), Ghoral (Naemorhedus goral), and the leopard (Panthera pardus). Though in
compliance of the first condition, Kibber Wildlife Sanctuary was set up in 1999, the second
condition remained unfulfilled till date. The Himachal Pradesh Government has recently
318
38
withdrawn a 2002 initial notification for the addition of 17.55 sq. kms of forest to the
Majathal Wildlife Sanctuary (WLS). A certain NGO called the ‘Biodiversity Conservation
Trust of India’ (BCTI) has pleaded with the Central Empowered Committee (CEC),
constituted by the apex court against this denotification bringing Majathal into limelight. The
biodiversity study commissioned by the PP M/S Ambuja Cements Ltd. in fulfilment of the
ToR, will additionally address some of these apprehensions on the loss of potential wildlife
habitat and can also serve as a referral database for future monitoring.
Against this background, it is significant to note that the PCCF/CWW Himachal Pradesh vide
his letter dated 24/1/2012 No. WL (Misc.)-73/Mining/V/6038 addressed to the PP has
categorically stated that there is ‘no objection’ to the proposed enhancement of clinker unit
nor to the mining of limestone from the leases at villages Kashlog, Mangu and Pati, subject to
permission from the MoE&F, GoI, New Delhi. The letter further clarifies that no adverse
impacts can be envisaged consequent of proposed enhancement and mining.
A dispassionate, rational and scientific analysis of the situation after verifying all the
documents of the proposal and groundtruthing suggests, that as a matter of fact the proposed
enhancement of clinker unit activity may not have a direct impact on the wildlife per se, but
proposed activity in the unbroken mining leases in particular has the potential for subtle,
indirect, long term cumulative disruption in the habitat and corridor value of the area. Also,
some of the important ecosystem services related to soil, water and vegetation shall be
impacted in various degree consequent of the blasting and earthmoving operations and loss of
vegetation. The loss of soil and vegetation and installation of mining infrastructure
paraphernalia such as the fabrication for conveyor belt etc. shall have an adverse effect on the
drainage and will ultimately interfere with the recharging of ground-waters. There is no
denial that the PAs adjoining/flanking the Cement Plant and the Mining leases are very
important habitat for Western Himlayan (Shivalik) avifauna as well as mammals, besides a
host of lesser vertebrate and invertebrate taxa. It is also significant that these areas have not
been explored for their biodiversity endowments with the exception of dominant flora and
fauna which are accounted for in Census operations of the forest department. Often
extrapolations are done based on inventories and records from other areas in the proximity,
notwithstanding the microhabitat and microclimatic variations. These leave scope for
addressing gaps in information on the full range of biodiversity here. This view is also
concurred upon by the High Altitude Station of the Zoological Survey of India, at Solan.
319
39
There is no district specific database on biodiversity and wildlife available with this premier
institution, which is incidentally an affiliate of the MoE&F, GoI.
The Solan district in which the cement Plant and the leases are located, has a geographical
area of 1,936 km2, legally notified forest area of 728 km2, Dense Forest Area of 274 km2 and
Open tree covered area of 218 km2. Thus in all a total of 492 km2 area of Forest that accounts
for 25.41 % of Geographic Area.
Wildlife Issues and Concerns

The Solan district of Himachal Pradesh has about 25.41% of its geographic area under forest
cover forests, which includes forests established and/or standing on private lands, much of
which also supports natural vegetation and trees as part of traditional agro-forestry practices.
It is but normal for such a floristically rich landscape to support and sustain wildlife,
irrespective of the legal designation of the area or ownership rights. Besides habitat value of
the forests, there are vegetated patches that may not fulfil the requirements of being habitat,
yet are important corridors for movement of terrestrial wildlife. The wild fauna, on its part,
also does not differentiate between the forest and non-forest areas and shall visit and frequent
areas that provide shelter and food (even if these areas are privately owned) thus, wildlife
encounters in the state are frequent, irrespective of the ownership of the land in which the
forest is located. This often gives rise to conflict situations predisposing humans and wildlife
to equal risk of harm at the human-wildlife interface, especially where land use changes are
observed.
Wildlife-Human Issues Related to Injuries/Loss of Life

In course of this survey, many cases of such conflicts where the wild animals, especially
Himalayan Black Bear and Leopard, attacked livestock or even human beings were reported
to us by reliable witnesses and stakeholders. The farmers lament that agro-horticulture is no
longer lucrative due to raiding by the Bears. Also, in the recent past wild boars have caused
catastrophic damage to crops; inflicting serious financial losses on farmers. Leopards are
known to make regular incursions in human settlements and attack livestock. Rhesus
macaques and Parakeets are also reported to be causing damage to fruits. The Rhesus here is
a vermin and learnt to forage around the human settlements often attacking people for
inadvertent infringement of their private space. Forest fires, deliberate and accidental have
320
40
been a major cause of degradation and loss of biodiversity. In course of this surveillance
within the buffer, vast patches of charred pine forest have been sighted and visited. The
charred conifers on the mountain slopes also accelerate soil erosion and water loss during the
season of precipitation. Also, one has to take into account the species displacement and
successional changes triggered by fire. Fire has understandably pushed animals out of their
hideouts and habitats and sightings have been progressively on a decline in the recent past as
confirmed by the locals.
Though there is a state policy and, therefore, rules to provide financial compensation where
these conflicts result in injury or loss to the life, human-wildlife conflicts are becoming a
major concern for the people as well as the forest department. An overview of the injuries,
deaths and compensation paid due to wildlife attacks on humans and cattle available with the
state agencies can help in comprehending the seriousness of the issue.
The following is an account of impressions/learnings and inferences that have accrued in this
field investigation.
1. The conservation concerns of these wildlife endowments are well recognised and
respected by the PP. However, conservation of Wildlife cannot being mandated to private
stakeholders for want of managerial expertise, infrastructure and personnel. This in any case
does not imply that the PP can be exempted from taking cognizance of the proximity of its
unit and mining leases from a wildlife habitat that is also an Important Bird Area. It is
imperative that the PP shall have to be sensitive, conscious and proactive in mitigating any
and all such adverse impacts of the proposal by opting for a more eco-friendly/wildlife
friendly operations and on-site and off-site conduct and management. The PP shall be
committed on creating a budget head for such investments and expenditure that shall further
the cause of wildlife conservation in its zone of influence. The PP shall liaison with the
forest authorities and partake in their efforts to ensure long term conservation of this
precious living heritage. The probable areas of cooperation are as follows:
2. Workforce sensitisation, Public awareness, Signage’s on wildlife’s presence at

strategic points along the Highway, visitors code of conduct in the PAs and other
information of educational value. Observing days of conservation/wildlife importance
such as Vanamahotsva, Wildlife Week celebrations etc. The PP can support
publication of popular literature in the local languages for dissemination in schools.
The PP and the High Altitude station ZSI at Solan can partner to address a lot of gaps
321
41
in our information on the diversity of faunal taxa in the region. The PP can fund
expeditions for biological exploration of the regions forests. Considering the
occurrence of the Indian White-backed Vulture, there can be a focused awareness
programme involving the public and private veterinary sector on the need to curtail
use of Diclofenac, a known cause of vulture mortality. The nesting sites within the PA
can be identified and the area be left inviolate for grazing, lopping and fodder/fire
wood collection to minimise anthropogenic disturbances to the habitat.
3. The Majathal is well known for Goral. This ungulate species has a restricted range
here, and competes with the livestock of the nomadic Gaddi tribes and the locals for
the fodder grass. The burning of undergrowth by the cattle grazers to stimulate fodder
growth further damages the microhabitat and consequently microclimate. The PP can
support cultivation of fodder species for cattle thereby reducing the pressure on the
ungulate habitat.
4. The menace of poaching though on small subsistence scale can be addressed through
awareness and sensitisation. Also, encouraging and incentivising gathering of local
intelligence on wildlife violations can go a long way in discouraging wildlife crime
and conflict situations in this wildlife habitat.
5. The birds like Black Francolin abound here and can be easily spotted/located due to
their loud calls and territoriality. These are often taken for pot and /or their nests
robbed. Many other birds like the Kalij Pheasant, Cheer Pheasant and Peafowl often
come under the wheels of vehicles as they forage in the twilight timings of dusk and
dawn. Sensitising driver of vehicles on the ‘right of way to the wildlife’ can be a
major contribution to conserving some of these avifauna.
Learning from field surveillance and Stakeholder Discussions
Stakeholder discussions were held at several locations along the transects as also randomly at
the Plant site and offices of the PP. A summary of responses of various stakeholders are
consolidated as follows.
1. The project Proponent has an eco-friendly ethos as witnessed in their ‘on campus’ and ‘off
campus’ workforce ethos and conduct. There is an agreement that the proximity of the PAs
322
42
teeming with wildlife makes a case for a benign industrial process or at least that the impacts
of the proposal on the biodiversity and wildlife within the buffer zones and the PAs in
particular be identified and mitigated at any cost. There was an undisputed consensus that
Majathal offers habitat to some important bird diversity as well as ungulates and cats. Local
inhabitants and forest managers shared that pheasants are the most commonly seen birds
along the road. A need for compensatory off site conservation efforts have been envisioned
by the PP. These include public awareness campaigns, wildlife week celebrations, sponsoring
research activities in Majathal, supporting and complementing soil and water conservation
initiatives of the Forest department within Majthal and Darlaghat and institutionalising a
culture of conservation.
2. Kaleej, Black Francolin and Red Jungle Fowl are commonly encountered in the buffer
during the early morning hours and dusk. The Black Francolin was seen calling in a
ventriloquist manner all over the terrain.
3. Vehicular traffic is a significant decimation pressure on wildlife and there is a need to
sensitise the drivers to drive slowly and minimise honking while driving through certain
strategic areas.
4. Apple growers in Tepra Katal area complained that the cement factory emissions have
impacted their fruit yield and that there was a need to ascertain the financial losses and ensure
compensation. Also, there was a vocal demand, that there have to be prioritised employment
opportunities for the locals in the factory.
5. Near Kenthli Ghati on the outskirts of Majathal, farmers shared the information that Black
Bear and Wild Boar regularly raid crops and occasionally attack humans.
6. The menace of Rhesus monkeys in the factory premise is indeed a matter of grave concern
in terms of work force safety and damage to property. Currently the PP has employed a
brigade of Common Langurs and their trainers, who regularly scout the campus to scare and
drive away the Rhesus troops that scavenge in and around the Factory premises.
The proposed expansion of clinkerisation and opening of mining leases will impact the
wildlife found/reported in these areas. Tables of flora and fauna lists the biodiversity
sighted/reported within the core and buffer zones of the Plant and the 3 leases and also gives
their conservation status and whether the species enjoys protection under the Schedule 1 of
the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972. The probable impacts and their mitigation measures are
discussed minimize the project impact on the regions diverse fauna.
323
43
Perceived Project Impacts and Mitigation Measures

No industry even if operating with modern mechanised equipment and technical know-how
can claim to be absolutely free of its environmental consequences and impacts, more so if it
shares its premise with or is in proximity of a natural forest. The adoption of so called ‘Green
Technology’ and eco-ethical code of operations can only lessen the impact and allow the
resilience of the natural resources to recuperate and regenerate. Thus it is important to have a
clear scientific understanding of the likely impacts and respond with implementable
interventions, soliciting the cooperation of all the stakeholders involved.
In so far as the present proposal of Clinker expansion and opening of 2 new mining leases is
concerned, a few issues merit consideration from the view point of environmental impacts.
The existence of the Protected Areas and a few Reserve Forests are bound to raise
apprehensions from the conservation lobby, though there are no scientifically demonstrable
impacts of the present operational units of the PP that have been in operation for quite some
time. Though there are some cursory discussions on the ecological consequences of Cement
plant in this region, there is no body of specific data or scientifically gathered evidences to
correlate the operational status of existing unit (Raudi Plant and the Kashlog Lease) with loss
of biodiversity and /or wildlife of the region. The present study though on a short temporal
scale reveals a fairly impressive array of wildlife and birdlife in particular not only in the
buffer but also to some extent the core areas. This indicates resilience with floral and faunal
taxa
Impact on Wildlife Habitat
Mining and Cement sector projects (specific components thereof such as blasting, crushing,
transport, staking, clinkerisation ) inclusive of their subsidiary activity components and off
site spin-off are known to have a range of adverse impact on the natural environment through
direct and indirect portals. The potential for environmental damage is greater in case of
opening up of a new lease area. New leases being opened up, always disrupt former
continuity between adjacent lands that are often a part of range or habitat of wildlife. These
then act as impediments to unhindered wildlife movements. Connecting the leases with road,
leads to environmental damage of natural resources (that become more accessible); besides
altering the natural land features and vegetation patterns. Loss of forest cover along the road
stretches is a common feature, which happens because of increased access of people for
extracting resources, as well as of timber smugglers by transporting timber through roads.
324
44
As in case of the incumbent proposal, where there is a conveyor belt assembly erected to
transport the ore from the site of extraction to the Plant, at the site of installation of conveyor
belt pillars there is land manipulation, displacement and destruction of flora and associated
fauna in some measure. In deciding the conveyor belt alignment, the singular consideration is
the connectivity between the mines and the Plant, and no serious attention is paid to the likely
impact of this manufactured capital on the in situ earth capital.
Besides, the anthropogenic causes of loss of forest cover, destruction of forest habitats also
happens due to edge effects brought in with the development of the leases. The edge effects
results in increased light penetration into the forest edges that are created as a result of tree
felling along project/lease boundaries. This enhanced availability of light leads to changes in
species composition, increasing the population sizes of photophilic flora over the shade
loving ones.
Another impact on natural composition of forests arises due to introduction of many exotic
species and road side common weeds, the seeds/propagules of which reach the naturally
vegetated areas along with materials transported for infrastructure building or brought in by
travellers. These have severe biodiversity implications.
From the view point of wildlife, this accidental introduction of invasive species, and their
quick colonisation can impact the prospects of availability of fodder; as being invasive, the
introduced flora dominates and displaces the palatable food and fodder species for the
herbivore wildlife thriving in the habitat.
In the PAs visited during this surveillance it is evident that invasive weeds like Lantana
camara and Eupatorium have already been established. Many of these invasive weeds not
being consumed by herbivores spread and take over other natural habitats and niches. This
escape from their predator makes them competitively superior over the native species and
gradually these exotic weeds are able to out-compete the native species and establish
themselves. These processes changes the biodiversity value of a habitat and may even render
them unproductive in the long run.
The impacts of a mining and Clinker expansion project are not limited to the design and
construction phase alone, but go much beyond into the operational phase, making mitigation
strategy and measures mandatory. In the present case, the proposed projects are in the vicinity
of Darlaghat (Piplughat) and Majathal wildlife sanctuaries that are known for species with
precarious conservation status.
325
45
Taking cognizance of the environmental concerns and biodiversity/wildlife issues from the
planning stage of the project, shall aid in minimizing the project impacts significantly.
Certain precautions, as part of a mitigation plan, could restrict the loss of natural habitat and
help preserving the integrity of the wildlife. . Once the habitat integrity is assured, the
wildlife shall be conserved as such.
The following account puts in perspective the possible project impacts and prescribes a
mitigation plan for limiting the impacts on biodiversity, particularly on forests and movement
of wildlife along and across the buffer, so as to ensure that the proposed clinker expansion
and mining leases project does not change the biodiversity values of the region.
Firstly, general project impacts on critical components of the environment are listed along
with the mitigation measures that should be undertaken. This is followed by location specific
project impacts on biodiversity and their mitigation strategy and finally project impacts on
wildlife movement corridors and their mitigation measures are listed.
1. Health Impacts
Mining, transport of ore and fugitive emissions are a cause of air pollution, the severity of
the impact being phase specific. For example blasting and surface earth removal as well as
stake and fugitive emissions can be potential health hazards. Also, burning of charcoal and
wood for any purpose as well as emission of acrid smoke from burning Bitumen can
predispose workforce to pulmonary pathology. Animals generally have an acute sense of
olfaction and may be prompted to stay away from such areas that are otherwise suitable
foraging grounds or habitats. Such displacement renders them vulnerable to road kills and
even poaching and trapping. Care must be taken to suppress dust and other particulate matter
by regularly spraying water during construction and transport of minerals and other vehicular
movement within the core and buffer. Smothering of leaves can severely depress some vital
functional capacities interfering with productivity of vegetation. Even burning of wood for
any purpose can spew a lot of smoke that is of health consequence both to man and animals.
Bitumen Hotmix plants for the purpose of road construction between the lease and plant or
otherwise should be suitably located away from natural areas to prevent acrid smoke and
odour affecting wildlife. Since smoke diffuses through canopy, the birds could also get
affected in this Important Bird Area
326
46
C. Impact on Aquatic Habitat.
Barring the Sutlej in the northern part of Majathal, the area has only ephemeral hill streams
rushing from higher altitudes downstream into the valleys. The Shivalik mountain range
being the youngest in the Himalayan montane ecosystem is susceptible to erosion by these
hill streams. Thus the breaking of new lease areas in this mountainous terrain can lead to
changing of the water courses, changing the micro-drainage pattern, silting of marshes and
swamps at lower altitudes and soil erosion, thinning out the top soil and leaching out soil
nutrients. Such deficits in soil nutrients can manifest into poor quality fodder for herbivores
predisposing them to malnutrition.
In fact, the Majathal sanctuary has good soil and water conservation and management; as is
evident from the frequently met check dams, percolation tanks and drains all throughout the
terrain. The PP can partner with the state forest department to foster this effort further. The
few lotic water bodies here have dried up due to siltation thereby depriving the wildlife of its
‘water hole’ function and value. Lotic water-bodies are also well known breeding grounds for
Odonates and other lesser aquatic invertebrate fauna.
To the extent possible, road and conveyor belt alignments should be such that it does not alter
water courses. It must be remembered that the project has a potential for loss of productive
land in the vicinity of the leases, besides may accentuate the Landslides/slips due to blasting
in fragile Shivaliks or conglomerate rock systems. Improper drainage mechanism may lead to
saturation of overhanging rocks posing risk of fracture and detachment. Wherever on slopes
gullies are created due to erosion bioengineering measures such as gully plugging and
fascines should be taken up. Only controlled blasting should be taken up in the Shivaliks
considering the fragile mountain range and the vibrations that may sweep through the entire
region.
D. Soil erosion
Mining of limestone will result in loss of top soil and damage to soil biota. It is necessary to
have preventive mechanisms installed to control erosion during and post construction phase
E. Forests
Opening up new mining leases in this hilly terrain will inevitably result in varying degrees of
habitat alteration and damage, fragmentation and loss. This has potential to impact the
conservation prospects of species such as the Goral that find foraging grounds here, as well as
several ground dwelling avifauna with restricted range and rather small populations such as
327
47
the Kalij Pheasant and the Cheer Pheasant. It is imperative that the conservation concerns of
these species be recognised and Proponents across all sectors aspiring for projects in this area
chip in to ensure management and long term conservation. Often, proximity of industrial
units and workforce colonies to Protected Areas like these is known to encourage violations
and trespassing; rendering the wildlife vulnerable to anthropogenic pressures. PP should
mandate sensitisation of the entire hierarchy of workforce to the habitat value of this general
landscape and the conservation concerns of the wild taxa it holds.
Human presence and access to wilderness areas increase chances of weed invasion through
creation of degraded habitats. There should be a check on these accidental introductions and
efforts at eradicating these fast spreading exotic invasive species.
The lease areas earmarked for mining purpose should be thoroughly investigated for their
biodiversity, with taxa specific approach and enumerated to approximate the loss of biomass.
Compensatory plantation on the ratio of 1:3 (every tree felled shall be compensated by
planting three trees) should be undertaken. Further care shall be taken to prioritise native
species and preferably the same species of trees that have been felled.
Of particular consequence and concern with opening of new leases, is the likelihood of
interfering with movement of fauna in the area. Many species that have natal imprinting on
the original pre-broken landscape may negotiate their movements in the new terrain with
different levels of difficulty. Such confused animals are vulnerable to accidents specially
whiles crossing roads. Changes in animal corridors due to blockage and/or non-existence of
favourite routes, increased traffic density of mining vehicles can discourage animal to cross
road. Erect signboards (readable at night) that caution drivers about wildlife crossings
Chances of increased accidents make animals change movement/routes paving way for
human-wildlife conflicts due to intrusions in human settlements. Presently, there is a menace
of Rhesus monkey intrusion in the factory premises and colony and some episodes of attacks
on workforce and their dependents. The opportunity for scavenging is also another reason for
increased incursions of this monkey here. The settlements immediately outside the factory
premise are a source of organic garbage that is hap hazardously disposed off. This garbage
dumps attract rhesus troops. The Project proponent has deployed a couple of Black-faced
Langurs (Semnopithecus entellus) to scare and chase the Rhesus away from the Plant
premise. The Langur accompanied by the trainer is paraded in the campus twice daily and as
when required, to deter the rhesus incursions.
328
Annexure‐8 Extract From Traffic and Air Pollution Surveys on Road Network
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
ANNEXURE-9 Pollution Testing Data of Existing mine & Plant
Monthly Average of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results (Suli Plant)
(PM 10, SPM, SO2 and NO2 Concentration in µg/m3)
Khata Darlaghat Bahan Mines Dormitory Rathoh

MONTH PM PM PM PM PM
10 SPM SO2 NO2 10 SPM SO2 NO2 10 SPM SO2 NO2 10 SPM SO2 NO2 10 SPM SO2 NO2
Jan-11 76.2 161.1 5.0 8.5 74.0 159.7 4.8 7.8 72.9 154.7 4.5 7.0 75.5 159.5 6.0 9.0 69.1 145.4 5.5 7.4
Feb-11 70.7 150.1 4.7 7.1 70.7 148.1 4.8 7.4 66.4 140.7 4.3 6.7 73.8 157.4 4.8 8.2 71.2 150.3 4.5 7.0
Mar-11 69.2 145.6 4.8 9.7 66.5 144.2 4.8 9.6 61.8 134.0 4.0 8.1 69.1 149.4 5.1 9.8 65.3 138.4 4.3 8.6
Apr-11 73.8 158.6 4.7 10.4 73.5 156.6 5.0 10.3 70.5 150.1 5.0 9.8 73.4 155.6 5.1 9.6 71.0 147.9 4.3 8.7
May-11 72.8 153.2 5.6 9.6 70.4 150.6 5.5 11.1 67.4 142.6 4.1 6.8 71.2 150.9 7.0 10.1 65.3 137.7 4.3 7.7
Jun-11 66.2 138.7 4.4 7.8 65.7 137.5 3.5 6.5 60.9 128.2 4.0 6.8 65.5 135.8 3.2 5.8 59.1 123.2 4.5 7.8
July-11 57.5 120.1 4.4 10.4 56.0 116.0 4.2 9.0 55.6 114.4 4.6 10.6 55.0 116.1 4.8 9.4 50.3 105.6 3.3 6.0
Aug-11 53.6 110.3 3.6 6.7 56.0 116.7 5.5 10.6 48.1 100.3 3.7 7.0 48.6 100.7 3.5 6.5 32.9 70.2 5.0 9.0
Sep-11 57.9 119.7 3.6 6.8 63.7 134.1 5.0 11.3 55.9 118.2 3.6 6.8 56.9 118.8 3.5 6.5 42.9 110.3 3.5 7.0
Oct-11 61.2 131.3 3.5 7.2 63.8 133.5 5.00 11.6 56.3 120.7 4.8 9.2 60.4 128.7 3.9 7.7 48.1 103.6 4.22 8.2
(From January - 2011 to October - 2011)

(PM 10, SPM, SO2 and NO2 Concentration in µg/m3)
(From January, 2011 to October, 2011)
MONTH Mangoo Chandi Pacheaur Rauri Batedh

PM PM
10 SPM SO2 NO2 PM 10 SPM SO2 NO2 PM10 SPM SO2 NO2 PM 10 SPM SO2 NO2 10 SPM SO2 NO2
Jan-11 74.3 155.7 5.1 8.75 70.9 148.7 5.71 8.14 71.0 152.3 5.5 8.0 77.6 162.2 5.8 9.3 74.9 157.5 5.5 8.6
Feb-11 70.2 149.7 5.1 7.6 66.4 143.5 4.3 7.0 66.6 139.9 7.8 7.1 68.5 146.8 5.8 8.4 68.6 147.7 5.1 7.8
Mar-11 63.5 139.1 4.7 9.0 63.8 136.8 5.0 8.5 62.5 133.2 4.7 9.0 68.4 145.8 4.6 9.8 63.2 136.8 4.5 8.8
Apr-11 66.3 142.6 4.1 8.1 67.2 141.4 4.6 8.6 68.4 146.3 4.0 7.5 73.9 156.3 5.5 10.1 72.1 150.7 4.8 9.4
May-11 63.8 135.1 4.7 10.3 65.1 135.6 4.6 9.0 66.8 139.4 5.4 9.8 72.0 151.1 4.7 11.8 67.7 141.4 6.3 11.4
Jun-11 61.1 127.2 3.9 7.1 59.5 125.1 3.8 6.1 59.3 124.1 3.4 6.2 57.7 119.8 4.2 7.2 56.8 118.2 4.0 7.0
July-11 54.9 113.9 3.7 6.5 53.7 109.5 4.2 7.6 55.6 114.8 3.8 7.4 59.4 123.4 4.2 7.8 53.0 115.2 5.0 8.4
Aug-11 48.9 101.3 3.6 6.3 50.3 104.6 4.5 7.5 47.1 98.3 3.6 7.3 53.5 109.8 4.6 8.3 47.4 98.4 4.3 8.3
Sep-11 55.7 116.4 3.7 6.8 52.9 110.8 3.6 7.6 53.2 113.1 3.8 7.4 64.3 134.6 3.8 8.6 62.2 130.8 3.8 8.3
Oct-11 57.1 122.2 4.2 7.8 56.7 121.6 3.6 7.4 57.4 122.1 3.9 7.9 62.8 134.7 4.1 8.7 61.9 132.5 4.0 8.2

(PM 10, PM 2.5, SO2 and NO2 Concentration in µg/m3)
(For November 2011 to January - 2012)
MONTH Khata Darlaghat Bahan Mines Dormitory Rathoh

PM PM PM PM PM PM PM
10 2.5 SO2 NO2 PM 10 2.5 SO2 NO2 PM10 2.5 SO2 NO2 PM 10 2.5 SO2 NO2 10 2.5 SO2 NO2
Nov-11 60.5 19.7 3.8 7.2 62.8 21.1 4.5 11.6 53.4 9.6 4.5 10.9 60.5 20.6 5.0 9.3 52.2 9.5 3.9 9.3
Dec-11 73.5 27.4 6.0 13.5 70.7 26.4 6.9 15.7 55.8 17.2 5.8 12.0 64.2 32.9 6.3 13.9 54.3 17.2 5.2 11.5
68.3 26.9 4.1 16.1 68.8 27.6 5.2 14.7 47.9 15.6 3.8 10.3 67.8 25.5 4.7 12.3 55.5 18.6 4.1 11.6
Jan-12
68.55 31.47 5.55 17.35 75.89 37.57 5.15 16.96 45.18 17.23 3.44 10.92 65.90 29.87 5.07 15.63 63.6 26.8 3.65 12.42
Feb-12 4 1
75.12 37.42 6.55 18.27 77.33 40.21 7.45 19.31 45.18 14.70 4.49 10.95 74.92 35.57 7.36 19.65 63.2 28.3 5.09 15.24
March- 5 1
12
April- 68.17 25.69 4.42 16.1 68.87 36.17 6.35 16.4 47.9 25.6 4.2 12.37 69.47 30.33 6.07 15.7 55.5 18.5 4.1 11.6
0 8
12
59.84 28.02 4.75 15.7 71.18 38.7 8.4 14.80 51.83 26.6 4.60 11.07 63.74 32.42 6.11 15.25 51.7 18.5 4.5 11.80
May-12 3 8
342
(PM 10, PM 2.5, SO2 and NO2 Concentration in µg/m3)
(For November - 2011 to January - 2012)
MONTH Mangoo Chandi Pacheaur Rauri Batedh

PM PM PM PM PM PM PM
10 2.5 SO2 NO2 PM 10 2.5 SO2 NO2 PM10 2.5 SO2 NO2 PM 10 2.5 SO2 NO2 10 2.5 SO2 NO2
Nov-11 49.8 11.2 3.7 8.0 52.7 10.6 4.4 8.3 55.1 17.9 3.9 7.9 62.1 21.9 4.6 8.4 63.6 17.0 4.4 10.9
Dec-11 51.9 15.6 4.2 9.1 56.7 15.6 4.4 8.3 60.8 21.9 4.1 10.3 64.1 25.0 5.1 12.6 63.1 29.8 4.9 12.8
Jan-12 58.5 19.9 3.8 10.1 53.0 13.3 4.1 9.7 63.6 23.8 4.1 12.7 65.2 22.7 4.5 14.3 67.1 25.4 4.6 10.7
55.36 14.44 3.65 12.42 44.63 10.17 3.31 7.49 60.89 25.72 4.01 12.60 71.46 31.27 5.02 17.44 67.8 30.55 4.87 15.02
Feb-12 8
March- 57.45 19.78 3.80 10.65 46.37 12.97 3.23 8.06 63.19 29.42 4.96 13.93 76.68 37.14 6.42 21.91 76.3 36.01 5.36 16.47
0
12
April- 58.52 19.96 3.8 10.1 53.02 23.85 4.05 9.72 63.65 23.8 4.1 12.74 65.17 22.76 4.45 14.34 67.1 28.94 4.6 10.75
1
12
57.53 19.96 3.80 10.10 55.13 22.10 4.2 9.82 63.75 23.81 4.8 13.20 63.82 22.38 5.3 13.74 538 29.31 4.80 10.9
May-12 4
Monthly Average of Stack Monitoring Results (Suli Plant)

(From January - 2011 to January - 2012)
Monthly PM Value in mg/Nm3

MONTHS Glass Bag Lime Stone
House Cooler ESP Coal Mill B/F Cement Mill Crusher
Jan-11 31.39 40.46 43.07 40.75 41.17
Feb-11 26.14 41.73 43.09 42.32 40.91
Mar-11 27.65 45.64 44.44 41.52 42.88
Apr-11 25.44 44.79 43.97 38.62 41.84
May-11 26.40 44.83 42.26 44.20 44.22
Jun-11 26.30 48.65 52.31 41.31 42.03
Jul-11 27.18 43.01 41.60 41.75 41.32
Aug-11 20.77 48.05 45.65 39.44 42.61
Sep-11 23.66 45.34 47.16 41.13 43.46
Oct-11 23.50 46.80 43.02 41.89 41.85
Nov-11 * * * 41.74 44.61
Dec-11 30.00 49.96 48.59 44.30 43.50
Jan-12 22.45 49.40 43.26 41.77 44.00
Feb-12 55.5 47.025 42.6 44.75 43.5
March-12 47.35 56.05 43.13 39.28 45.19
April-12 42.35 49.55 41.525 37.73 44.65
May-12 58.74 33.8 44.3 43.92 44.48
Note: * Plant was under maintenance
343
Monthly Average of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results Rauri Plant
(TOTAL SPM,SO2 AND NOX CONCENTRATION IN µg/m3)
(From January, 2011 to October, 2011)
Rauri - 1 Rauri - 2 Rauri - 3
MONTH
SPM PM10 SO2 NOx SPM PM10 SO2 NOx SPM PM10 SO2 NOx
Jan-11 163.34 76.26 5.0 9.0 160.47 77.28 5.0 9.0 157.54 74.46 5.1 8.5
Feb-11 145.27 68.15 4.2 7.9 139.82 65.32 5.0 8.4 137.84 63.54 4.8 8.6
Mar-11 154.22 72.72 5.1 9.3 160.18 75.59 4.7 8.6 150.84 70.63 4.9 9.3
Apr-11 150.89 69.88 4.0 8.0 158.01 74.94 5.0 8.0 153.19 72.67 5.0 9.0
May-11 160.00 75.06 6.0 10.0 150.85 71.78 5.0 9.6 158.32 73.59 5.0 8.9
Jun-11 121.00 57.43 4.0 7.0 111.52 51.75 4.6 7.5 116.24 54.82 5.0 7.1
July-11 109.32 48.71 3.8 7.8 115.75 54.60 4.0 7.5 117.63 51.88 4.7 8.5
Aug-11 96.14 45.89 4.0 5.3 93.33 43.33 6.0 6.0 92.52 40.96 4.5 5.8
Sep-11 114.75 50.88 5.3 7.8 103.96 45.52 5.0 9.6 112.18 52.15 4.8 10.2
Oct-11 142.49 63.85 4.8 9.4 145.26 67.03 6.1 9.3 136.7 60.85 5.5 8.4
Monthly Average of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Results Rauri Plant
(TOTAL PM 2.5, PM 10, SO2 AND NOX CONCENTRATION IN µg/m3)

(For November 2011 to May, 2012)
Month Rauri - 1 Rauri - 2 Rauri - 3
PM 2.5 PM10 SO2 NO2 PM 2.5 PM10 SO2 NO2 PM 2.5 PM10 SO2 NO2
Nov-11 20.94 63.19 6.00 10.25 18.86 57.55 5.75 11.25 17.49 59.70 5.63 10.0
Dec-11 20.73 65.02 5.13 10.00 26.22 66.54 5.50 11.50 18.98 63.43 6.0 12.0
Jan-12 17.56 61.62 5.83 10.63 22.30 60.37 6.0 12.00 20.12 67.32 7.17 12.63
Feb-12 23.72 66.63 5.38 12.38 20.14 63.89 5.50 13.38 18.16 70.11 6.00 12.75
Mar-12 28.07 72.18 7.00 15.25 34.14 76.65 6.63 14.50 32.03 80.27 7.25 15.38
April-12 28.34 65.36 5.13 13.63 26.73 56.36 5.38 14.88 31.98 63.06 4.75 13.00
May-12 39.80 77.55 5.75 15.88 41.37 73.34 6.63 16.25 43.95 75.01 6.13 14.50
Monthly Average of Stack Monitoring Results

(From January 2011 to May 2012)
Monthly PM Value in mg/Nm3

MONTH
Glass Bag House Cooler ESP Coal Mill B/F
Jan-11 25.56 27.44 24.95
Feb-11 22.70 24.91 21.00
Mar-11 19.55 20.61 26.60
Apr-11 17.76 24.03 21.38
May-11 20.91 27.67 24.55
Jun-11 23.11 26.92 21.07
Jul-11 16.42 15.12 24.60
Aug-11 11.71 18.46 22.20
Sep-11 11.59 24.67 25.86
Oct-11 10.39 25.20 14.47
Nov-11 14.53 15.7 23.52
Dec-11 15.09 14.49 20.9
Jan-12 12.48 15.80 25.63
344
Feb-12 13.84 21.75 15.46
March-12 11.12 24.56 22.56
April-12 12.07 23.23 19.15
May-12 10.09 24.59 27.35
Monthly Average of Air Borne Dust Survey Results

Rauri Plant
(From August, 2011 to May, 2012)
Month Coal Dump Raw Mill L/S Coal Clinker Time Office Factory
Hopper Area Stacker Stacker Loading Rauri Gate
Aug-11 1.98 4.59 1.93 2.14 7.71 1.56 2.14
Sep-11 4.17 3.33 3.54 3.13 7.08 2.29 5.0
Oct-11 5.63 3.75 2.50 3.13 7.50 2.29 6.25
Nov-11 4.58 5.42 4.58 5.42 5.42 5.83 6.25
Dec-11 4.37 3.75 4.79 5.00 5.83 4.17 5.21
Jan-12 5.42 5.62 6.04 6.88 7.92 5.83 6.46
Feb-12 5.21 6.25 5.83 5.42 7.71 4.58 7.08
March-12 4.38 5.42 5.42 5.83 7.08 5.63 5.62
April-12 5.63 6.04 5.83 5.62 6.25 3.75 6.25
May-12 5.00 5.42 6.67 4.79 7.92 5.62 6.04

Suli Plant
(From January, 2011 to May, 2012)
Month Coal Dump Raw Mill L/S Packing Clinker Factory Gate Main Gate
Hopper Area Stacker Plant Loading
Jan-11 6.04 5.42 4.58 4.79 6.46 6.67 5.62
Feb-11 4.79 4.58 5.42 5.21 7.50 6.04 5.42
Mar-11 4.58 4.58 5.00 5.42 6.87 5.42 5.00
Apr-11 5.42 5.42 4.58 5.42 7.29 5.42 5.00
May-11 4.58 5.21 4.79 4.58 7.08 4.58 5.21
Jun-11 5.42 4.37 4.58 5.10 6.67 5.21 6.67
Jul-11 4.58 5.21 5.21 7.08 7.92 5.42 6.04
Aug-11 6.04 4.38 4.58 6.25 5.63 5.00 5.63
Sep-11 4.58 4.38 4.79 5.42 6.46 5.00 6.42
Oct-11 5.42 6.67 4.17 5.42 5.00 4.58 5.00
Nov-11 4.79 5.62 5.42 5.21 4.58 5.42 5.83
Dec-11 4.79 5.00 4.58 4.79 5.42 5.83 4.58
Jan-12 6.04 5.00 5.42 6.25 5.63 5.42 7.08
Feb-12 5.00 5.83 5.42 5.42 7.08 6.87 7.50
March-12 4.58 5.21 4.38 7.50 7.50 7.29 5.83
April-12 3.75 4.58 6.04 5.21 6.46 6.67 7.08
May-12 4.79 5.42 4.58 5.21 4.79 6.25 6.67
Unit: - mg/m3
345
Kashlog Limestone Mines
(From January, 2011 to May, 2012)
Month PC-650 Haulpack cabin Crusher Hoppper Drilling Machine

Jan-11 5.83 5.42 4.58 5.21
Feb-11 4.58 4.38 3.96 5.42
Mar-11 5.42 3.54 3.75 4.58
Apr-11 4.58 5.42 4.58 4.58
May-11 4.79 4.38 3.75 5.42
Jun-11 4.79 4.37 4.58 3.75
Jul-11 4.58 4.38 4.79 4.58
Aug-11 6.67 3.96 4.79 5.42
Sep-11 3.96 3.75 5.00 5.42
Oct-11 4.58 4.38 4.58 5.00
Nov-11 4.58 3.96 3.96 4.58
Dec-11 3.75 5.42 5.00 5.42
Jan-12 5.00 5.42 6.25 5.83
Feb-12 5.83 5.21 6.25 4.79
Mar-12 4.79 4.58 3.75 4.38
April-12 3.75 4.17 4.38 5.00
May-12 5.42 5.63 5.00 5.83
Unit: - mg/m3
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358

ACLEIA

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ACLEIA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DRAFT ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT

Section TITLE PAGE

1.1 Purpose of the Report 1

CHAPTER 2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 Project Profile 13

CHAPTER 3 DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT

3.1 Study Area, Period and Methodology 64

CHAPTER 4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION

4.1 Identification of Impact 112

CHAPTER 5 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

5.1 Risk Analysis 156

CHAPTER 6 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN

6.1 Monitoring Plan 175

CHAPTER 7 PROJECT BENEFIT 183-184

8.1 EMP During Construction Stage 185

CHAPTER 10 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS ENGAGED 253

Appendix 1: Point-wise Compliance to TOR Conditions Issued by MOEF

Table No. Name of the Table Page No.

1.1 Purpose of Report

1.2 Identification of Project and Project Proponent

Project: The project under EIA study comprises the following:

Considerations of site selection for cement plant are as follows:

Project Proponent: Ambuja Cement Limited is a leading manufacturer of various types

productivity, energy conservation, quality control, environmental management and

1.3 Nature, Size and Location

Location – Cement Plant

Salient Features Location

Table 1.1 Name of Protected Forests within 10 km Study Area

20 Samtiari NNW 9.4 36.20

1.4 Importance of the Project to Country & Region

1.5 Compliance with CREP Recommendations

CREP RECOMMENDATION COMPLIANCE

8 After performance evaluation of various types of ACL proposed continuous

9 Trippings in kiln ESP to be minimized by July 2003 as ACL will comply

11 NCBM will carry out a study on hazardous waste As above

1.6 Scope of EIA Study

Gyanu MANGU Sangal

Figure 1.1 Locations of Plant Site and Mine

CHAPTER 2 - PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 Project Profile

Limestone Mining: Ambuja Cement Limited has obtained Environmental Clearance

2.2 Type of Project

2.2.2 Clinkerization Unit

Serial No. Constituents Kashlog Mines (%)

2.3 Need of Project

2.4 Layout Maps

2.5 Size & Magnitude of Operation

Figure 2.1 Layout Map (Clinkerization Unit)

Figure 2.2 Surface Layout (Mine Area)

Figure 2.3 Land use Map of Mining Lease Area

2.6 Schedule for Approval & Implementation

2.7 Mining Process

2.7.1 Background Information

2.7.2 Mining Plan

As on 01-4-2009, Western Block is having residual mineable reserves of 76.57 million

regularly dressed to prevent overhangs or undercuts. The slope stability investigations

2.7.3 Mining Methodology

2.7.4 Mining Plan Details

2.7.4.1 Western (Kashlog) Block

Figure 2.4 Pre Operational Landuse Plan

Figure 2.5 Operational Landuse Plan

Figure 2.6 Post Operational Landuse Plan

Table 2.2: Details of Proposed Yearwise Development Works-Western Block

2.7.4.2 Eastern (Mangu) Block